Technical Data

Construction of New Campus for National Institute of Design (NID), Vijayawada,A.P.
CONSTRUCTION OF NEW CAMPUS FOR NATIONAL

INSTITUTE OF DESIGN (NID) AT VIJAYAWADA,AP
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page 1 of 202
Signature of Contractor with Seal NBCC
GENRAL CONDITIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF NEW NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF

DESIGN (NID) AT VIJAYAWADA (ANDHRA PRADESH)
1. The work in general shall be carried out as per the latest CPWD specifications with up to date
correction slips, unless otherwise specified in the nomenclature of the individual item or as
specifications shall be carried out as per approved specifications. In case any item is not covered
in any of these documents, the same shall be carried out as per the latest BIS codes in practice
or as per approval of Engineer in Charge of NBCC. Where any portion of special conditions of
contact is repugnant to or at variance with any provision of the with Instruction to Tender and
General Conditions of contract and/or the other documents forming part of the contract then
unless a different intention appears the provisions of the general conditions of Contract shall the
other documents forming part of the contract only to the extent such repugnant/variations in the
special conditions of contract as are not possible of being reconciled with the provision with
Instruction to Tender of General Conditions of Contract and/or the other forming part of
thecontract.
2. The work in general shall be carried out as per the latest CPWD specifications 2009 Vol. 1&2.
3. The Electrical works shall be carried out as per CPWD Specifications for Electrical works (Part-I)
Internal, 2005 (Part-II) External, 1994 with up to date corrections slips, General specifications for
Electrical works Part-VII (DG Sets), 2006 General Specifications for Electrical works Part-IV
(Substation), 2007; General specifications for Electrical works – Part- V (Wet Riser & Sprinkler
Systems) 2006 and General specifications for Electrical works (Lifts & Escalators) Part-III,2003.
4. For items not covered under any of the specifications mentioned in tender documents, the works
shall be carried out as per BIS code/manufactures specifications/ General Engineering practice
and/or as per direction ofEngineer-in-Charge.
5. For Non DSR Items, Technical specifications specified in tender documents may be followed.
6. GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee the entire works & services, installation as per specifications both
for components and for system as a whole. All equipment shall be guaranteed for One year from
the date of handed over to the Department against unsatisfactory performance or breakdown due
to defective design, manufacture and/or installation. The installation shall be covered by the
conditions that the whole installation or any part thereof found defective within one year from the
date of completion shall be replaced or repaired by the contractor free of charge as decided by
theEngineer-in-Charge.
Page 2 of 202
CIVIL WORKS
The work shall be executed as per CPWD General Specifications as amended up to
date, relevant IS codes relevant IE rules, NBC codes and as per directions of
Engineer-in-Charge
SPECIFICATION FOR NON SCHEDULED ITEMS OF WORK
1.0 GRANITE STONE IN RISERS OF STEPS, SKIRTING,DADO AND FLOOR
1.1 Granite StoneSlabs

The slabs shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture free
from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws. They shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite
thickness. They shall be of the colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being
brought to site, unless otherwise specified. The slabs shall conform to the size required.
Before starting the work the contractor shall get the samples of slabs approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
1.2 Dressing
Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed on the sides to
the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be in full contact
with it. The sides (edges) shall be table rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before
paving. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, square and free from chippings and
the surface shall be true and plane. The thickness of the slab after it is dressed shall be 20,
25, 30 or 40 mm as specified in the description of the item. Tolerance of ±2 mm shall be
allowed for the thickness. In respect of length and breadth of slabs Tolerance of ± 5 mm for
hand cut slabs and ± 2 mm for machine cut slabs shall be allowed. except that the thickness
of the slabs shall be 18 mm or as specified in the description of the item. The slabs may be
of uniform size ifrequired.
1.3 Preparation ofSurface

The joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15 mm in masonry walls. In case of
concrete walls, the surface shall be hacked and roughened with wire brushes. The surface
shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet before skirting is commenced.
where necessary, the wall surface shall be cut uniformly to the requisite depth so that the
skirting face shall have the projection from the finished face of wall as shown in drawings or
as required by the Engineer-in-Charge. In no case the skirting should project by more than
thickness of stone.
1.3.1 Laying
The risers of steps and skirting shall be in grey or white cement admixed with or without
pigment to match the shade of the stone, as specified in the description of the item, with the
line of the slab at such a distance from the wall that the average width of the gap shall be 12
mm and at no place the width shall be less than 10 mm, if necessary, the slabs shall be held
in position by temporary M.S. hooks fixed into the wall at suitable intervals. The skirting or
riser face shall be checked for plane and plumb and corrected. The joints shall thus be left to
harden then the rear of the skirting or riser slab shall be packed with cement mortar 1:3 (1
cement : 3 coarse sand) or other mix as specified in the description of the item. The fixing
hooks shall be removed after the mortar filling the gap has acquired sufficient strength. The
joints shall be as fine as possible but not more than 1 mm. The top line of skirting and risers
shall be truly horizontal and joints truly vertical, except where otherwise indicated. The risers
and skirting slab shall be matched as shown in drawings or as instructed by the Engineer-in-
Charge. except that the joints of the slabs shall be set in grey cement mixed with pigment to
match the shade of the slabs.
Page 3 of 202
1.3.2 Curing, Polishing andFinishing
1.3.2.1 The day after the tiles are laid all joints shall be cleaned of the grey cement grout with
a wire brush or trowel to a depth of 5 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed and
cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with grey or white cement mixed with or without
pigment to match the shape of the topping of the wearing layer of the tiles. The same cement
slurry shall be applied to the entire surface of the tiles in a thin coat with a view to protect the
surface from abrasive damage and fill the pin holes that may exist on thesurface.
1.3.2.2 The floor shall then be kept wet for a minimum period of 7 days. The surface shall
thereafter be grounded evenly with machine fitted with coarse grade grit block (No. 60).
Water shall be used profusely during grinding. After grinding the surface shall be thoroughly
washed to remove all grinding mud, cleaned and mopped. It shall then be covered with a thin
coat of grey or white cement, mixed with or without pigment to match the colour of the
topping of the wearing surface in order to fill any pin hole that appear. The surface shall be
again cured. The second grinding shall then be carried out with machine fitted with fine grade
grit block (No.120).
1.3.2.3 The final grinding with machine fitted with the finest grade grit blocks (No. 320) shall
be carried out the day after the second grinding described in the preceding para or before
handing over the floor, as ordered by theEngineer-in-Charge.
1.3.2.4 For small areas or where circumstances so require, hand grinding/polishing with
hand grinder may be permitted in lieu of machine polishing after laying. For hand polishing
the following carborundum stones, shall beused:
1st grinding — coarse grade stone (No.60)
Second grinding — medium grade (No. 80)
Final grinding — fine grade (No.120)
In all other respects, the process shall be similar as for machine polishing.
1.3.2.5 After the final polish, oxalic acid shall be dusted over the surface at the rate of 33 gm
per square metre sprinkled with water and rubbed hard with a ‗namdah‘ block (pad
ofwoollen rags). The following day the floor shall be wiped with a moist rag and dried with a
soft cloth and finished clean. If any tile is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or
replaced, properly jointed and polished. The finished floor shall not sound hollow when
tapped with a woodenmallet.
2.0 TRAP DOOR IN THE FALSECEILING

Trap doors shall be provided in the false ceiling using 20mm thick commercial ply laminated
with approved finish laminate with necessary CP teak frame work of size 2" x 1.5", Oak wood
moldings as per drawings, brass hinges, latches etc. complete to the approval of Engineer-
in-Charge
3.0 CHICKEN WIRE MESH ON JOINTS OF RCC & BRICKWORK
24 gauge galvanized chicken wire mesh of approved width at junctions of concrete and brick
work and other locations called for including necessary laps and U shape galvanized wire
nails complete at all heights and leads and lifts, doing independent double legged
scaffolding, etc. complete as directed byEngineer-in-charge.
Chicken wire Mesh at Junction

All junction of Masonry wall with R.C. structure e.g. column, beam, etc, which are to be
plastered, shall be reinforced by fixing strips of approved 22 SWG G.I Chicken wire mesh
250mm wide with an overlapping of 100 mm centrally over the length of junction. G.I.
Chicken wire mesh of required width shall also be fixed over chasing for conduits, pipes, etc.
on masonry walls before plastering is commenced. The mesh shall be nailed rigidly to the
Page 4 of 202
Masonry with G.I. nails of suitable type of approx. 400 mm centres. The finished mesh shall
be straight, rigid and laid without sagging. The contractor shall take into account the cost of
G.I. chicken wire mesh while coating for plastering work.
Double scaffolding to be used shall be as specified.
The finished plaster surface shall not show any deviation more than 4mm when checked with
a straight edge of 2m length placed against the surface.
To overcome the possibility of development of cracks in the plastering work following

measures shall be adopted.
Plastering work shall be deferred as much as possible so that fairly complete drying
shrinkage in concrete and masonry works takes place.
Where plastering is to be done over junction of two different materials e.g. concrete and
masonry, the junction shall be covered by a chicken mesh of 100 mm width with margins on
either side and then the plaster shall be applied. Where only one of the materials is
plastered over, the plaster at junction shall be stuck to obtain a groove as shown below:
SCAFFOLDING
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided. The supports shall
be sound and strong, tied together with horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall
be fixed.
4.0 EXTERNALCLADDING
Terracotta colouredprecoated with silicon, brick faced tiles of size 230x75x15mm of

approved make & fixed at all heights as per approved design for veneering work on wall and
dado fixed with a grout of average 12 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 (1cement:3coarse sand)
including pointing to matching shade complete in all respects as per direction of the
Engineer-in-charge.
SCAFFOLDING
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided. The supports shall
be sound and strong, tied together with horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall
be fixed.
5.0 ETCHING STRIPS(FILM)

Over glass 1mm thick Etching strips (film) as per design and pattern of approved make as
directed by Engineer-in-Charge and fixed as per manufacturer's specifications.
6.0 12MM THICK FRAMLESS TOUGHENED GLASS DOORPARTITIONS

12 mm thick frameless toughened glass door partitions of approved brand and manufacturer,
including providing and fixing partitions at top & bottom with aluminum channel etc. all
complete as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.
7.0 MULTIWALL POLYCORBONATESHEET
16mm thick multiwall polycorbonate sheet or equivalant of required shade fixed to aluminium
profile framework with stainless steel screws and supported on MS tube framework including
G.E silicon sealant ,cold forged fastnersetc.complete as per specification, drawing and
direction of Engineer in Charge. The rate includes cost of all the operations,labour materials
and tests (as applicable) for proper completion of the work except the M.S tubular framework
which shall be measured and paid separately (For payment purpose the area of finished
polycorbonate sheet fixed in position shall only be measured).
Page 5 of 202
8.0 GLAZING 6 MM THICK TOUGHENEDGLASS
Glazing with 6 mm thick toughened glass ST 450 from Saint Gobain or equivalent complete in
all respects as per direction of the Engineer-in-charge. (Required properties Solar factor 0.43,
U-Value (W/sq.m-K) 5.6, Visible light transmittance 0.43)
9.0 TOILETCUBICALS
Toilet Cubicle (of following standard dimension which includes 600 mm door size
width) made of heat, bacteria, water, chemical, scratch, impact and anti bacterial resistant 12
mm thick solid compact laminate panels Finish of the compact laminate should be raw silk
which include doors, pilasters and intermediate panels finished with approved texture/shade
as per the detail drawing and as per IS 2046 (Indian Standard) and as per fire retardant BS-
476/97standard.
This also includes providing and fixing in position necessary hardware made out of Stainless
Steel (Grade 304) as per manufacturer's specifications and EIC instructions like (1) Door
Knob, (2) Gravity Hinges, (3) Thumb turn lockset indicators, (4) Coat hooks, (5) U- Channels,
(6) SS-Shoe Box Plate, (7) MS-Base Plate, (8) Rubber noise deafening tape, (9) Screws and
wall Plugs.
All screws will be of 304 Grade in stainless steel with satin finish. All pilasters are supported
by series stainless steel shoe box with MS- Base Plate. The Base of stainless steel shoe box
will be anchored to the floor with a clearance height upto 110 mm. Fixing of intermediate
panels to the wall shall be stainless steel 'L'- Bracket or stainless U- Channel section are
fixed into wall with screw inserts. All screws will be of 304 Grade in Stainless steel with satin
finish. All pilasters are supported by stainless steel Bottom Cladding. The base of the
stainless steel bottom cladding will be anchored to the floor with a clearance height upto 110
mm.
All intermidiate panels shall be 12 mm thick, pilasters and door shall be 18 mm thick with
edges chamfered complete as per drawing and directions of Engineer- In- Charge.
Toilet Cubicle with standard dimension of 1840 mm Height x 1000 mm width x 1550 mm
Depth, which include 600 mm door size width).
Toilet Cubicle I- Shape (Front Partion) with standard dimension of 1840 mm Height x 1000
mm width which includes 600 mm door sizewidth).
10.0 FOAM CONCRETE FILLING IN SUNKENAREA
Foam concrete filling in sunken portion of W.C. & kitchen with approved quality of materials
including supply of labour, material, and tools and plant etc. required for proper completion of
the work as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.
11.0 S.SHARDWARES
Approved brand and manufacturer SS 304 grade S.S Hardware‘s fixed with SS screws etc.
complete in all respects as per manufacturers' specifications & as directed by Engineer-in-
charge.
12.0 MELAMINE POLISHING:
Melamine polishing: Two or more coats on new works including a coat of wood filler.
Page 6 of 202
13.0 ANTITERMITE TREATMENT:
Preconstruction anti termite treatment to the building under construction by providing Stage 1:
Treating the bottom and the sides (upto 30cm hight of the excavated trench @ 5 litter per sqm
of the surface area. Stage 2: After masonry/RCC work, the backfill in the immdiate contact
with the foundation structure treatment @ 7.5 litter per sqm. of the vertical surface of the
substructure for each side. Stage 3: surface treatment by spreading emulsion over the plinth
area before laying the base concrete under floors @ 5.0 litres/Sqm. Stage 4: Pumping the
emulsion in plinth masonry on filling side at floor junction @ 7.5 litres/Sqm. Stage 5 : Pumping
the emulsion from outer side of the plinth below ground alround the masonry @ 5.0 litres/Sqm
as per I.S. 8944 Emulsion. (1Chlorpyrifos: 19 water) with five years service guarantee
(Measurements to be taken for plinth area) Note – Treatment should start when foundation
trenches and pits are ready to take bed concrete or leveling course in foundations. Laying of
bed concrete should start when the chemical emulsion has been absorbed by the soil and the
surface is reasonably dry. Treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or when soil
is wet with rain or subsoil water. This also applies to filled up soil within the plinth area before
laying the subgrade forflooring.
14.0 PVC FLOORING IN 2MM THICKNESS:
Flexible PVC sheet flooring in 2.0mm thickness. It shall be homogeneous and monolayer in
construction, and shall be manufactured by calendering and presssing, to ensure a dense,
smooth surface and non-directional design. The flooring shall incorporate a specially
formulated polyurethane reinforcement, to significantly reduce maintenance costs.
[Equivalent to Polyfloor Mystique PUR] INCLUDING Self Levelling
15.0 COLORED CONCRETE FLOORING:
Top surface of concrete, in accordance with broadcasting of Bomanite Color Hardener / OR

EQUIVALENT at the rate of 2.7 kgs/sqmtr. Floating the surface with different types of floaters,
application of Release Agent at the rate of 0.113 kg/sq.mtr stamping the concrete with
stamping tools, cleaning the surface with water and application of acrylic based Sealer for
finishing. Our color hardeners and release agents have been tested for abrasion resistance
and should have a depth of wear not greater than 0.05mm under BS8204
16.0 INTERNAL TEXTUREDPAINT:
Material
Finishing walls with textured internal paint of required shade : New work (Two or more coats
applied @ 3.28 ltr/10 sqm) over and including priming coat of internal primer applied @
2.20kg/10 sqm.
17.0 EXTERIOR TEXTURED PAINT:
Natural shade with stone dust tinted trowel texture in approved shade over a coat of base
texture that is natural shade with stne dust without chips acrylic primer along with repair check
with exterior grade putty as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
18.0 PVC GUARD:
PVC Guard minimum 150 mm wide with extruded aluminium base including all accessories
per approved design all complete as per direction of Engineer-In-Charge.
Page 7 of 202
PLUMBING WORKS
Section-I Special Conditions
1.1 Scope ofwork
1.1.1 The form of Contract shall be according to the "Conditions of Contract". The following clauses
shall be considered as an extension and not in limitation of the obligation of theContractor.
1.1.2 Work under this Contract shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipment and
appliances necessary and required. The Contractor is required to completely furnish all the
plumbing and other specialised services as described hereinafter and as specified in the Bill of
Quantities and/or shown on the plumbingdrawings.
1.1.3 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the sanitary installations shall include the
following:-
1. PlumbingWorks
- Sanitary Fixtures & C.P BrassFittings
- Soil, Waste, Vent, Pipes &Fittings
- Water Supply & Garden IrrigationSystem
- Sewerage &Drainage
- Solar Water HeatingSystem
1.4 Services rendered under this section shall be done without any extracharge.
2 Specifications
2.1 Work under this Contract shall be carried out strictly in accordance with specifications attached
with thetender.
2.2 Items not covered under these specifications due to any ambiguity or misprints, or additional
works, the work shall be carried out as per specifications of the latest Central Public Works
Department with upto date amendments as applicable in theContract.
2.3 Works not covered under Para 2.1 and 2.2 shall be carried out as per relevant Codes & Bureau
of Indian Standards and in case of its absence as per British Standard Code ofPractice.
3 Execution ofwork
3.1 The Contractor should visit and examine the site of work and satisfy himself as to the nature of
the existing roads and other means of communication and other details pertaining to the work and
local conditions and facilities for obtaining his own information on all matters affecting the
execution of work. No extra charge made in consequence of any misunderstanding, incorrect
information on any of these points or on ground of insufficient description will beallowed.
3.2 The work shall be carried out in conformity with the Plumbing drawings and within the
requirements of architectural, HVAC, electrical, structural and other specialized services
drawings.
3.3 The Contractor shall cooperate with all trades and agencies working on the site. He shall make
provision for hangers, sleeves, structural openings and other requirements well in advance to
prevent hold up of progress of the construction schedule. All supports to the civil structure shall
be provided with dash fasteners as per approved makeonly.
3.4 On award of the work, Contractor shall submit a schedule of construction in the form of a PERT
chart or BAR chart for approval of the Engineer Incharge/Architect/ Consultant. All dates and
time schedule agreed upon shall be strictly adhered to within the stipulated time of completion/
commissioning along with the specified phasing, ifany.
Page 8 of 202
4 Drawings
4.1 Contract drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction
permits. Any deviations made shall be in conformity with the architectural and other services
drawings.
4.2 Architectural drawings shall take precedence over plumbing or other services drawings as to all
dimensions.
4.3 Contractor shall verify all dimensions at site and bring to the notice of the Engineer Incharge all
discrepancies or deviations noticed. Decision of the Engineer Incharge shall befinal.
4.4 Large size details and manufacturers dimensions for materials to be incorporated shall take
precedence over small scaled drawings.
5 Inspection and testing ofmaterials
5.1 Contractor shall be required, to produce manufacturers test certificate for the particular batch of
materials supplied to him. Contractor may be required to get the material tested from outside
approved laboratory for confirmation of material as per PM/Client instruction as and when
required. The tests carried out shall be as per the relevant Bureau of IndianStandards.
5.2 For examination and testing of materials and works at the site Contractor shall provide all testing
and gauging equipment necessary but not limited to thefollowing:
a) steeltapes
b) Weighingmachine
c) Plumb bobs, sprit levels,hammer
d) Micrometres
e) Hydraulic
5.3 All such equipment shall be tested for calibration at approved laboratory, if required by the
Engineer Incharge. All testing equipment shall be preferably located in special room meant for the
purpose.
5.4 Samples of all materials shall be got approved Engineer in charge and Client and should be the
approved make list before placing order and the approved samples shall be deposited with the
EngineerIncharge.
6 Metricconversion
6.1 All dimensions and sizes of materials and equipment given in the tender document are
commercial metricsizes.
6.2 Any weights, or sizes given in the tender having changed due to metric conversion, the nearest
equivalent sizes accepted by Indian Standards shall be acceptable without any additionalcost.
7 Reference points
7.1 Contractor shall provide permanent bench marks, flag tops and other reference points and
check that with other agencies to confirm the same reference point for all the proper execution
of work and these shall be preserved till the end of thework.
7.2 All such reference points shall be in relation to the levels and locations, given in the architectural
and plumbingdrawings.
8 Referencedrawings
8.1 The Contractor shall maintain one set of all drawings issued to him as reference drawings. These
shall not be used on site. All important drawings shall be mounted on boards and placed in racks
indexed. No drawings shall berolled.
Page 9 of 202
8.2 All corrections, deviations and changes made on the site shall be shown on these reference
drawings for final incorporation in the completion drawings to be submitted by the contractor in
fulfillment of the conditions of thiscontract.
8.3. On award of the work the contractor shall be issued four sets of consultant‘s working drawings
stamped ―good for construction‖ by the Engineer Incharge. The consultant‘s drawings shall be the
basis of contractor‘s shop drawings. In addition, the Engineer Inchargeshall also be issue one
copy of the Interior Designer‘s; Electrical & HVAC approved shop drawings relevant to his work
for coordinationpurpose.
8.4 Shop drawings are detailed working drawings which incorporate the contractor's details for
execution of the work and incorporate equipment manufacturer's details and dimensions to
ensure that the same can be installed in the spaceprovided.
8.5 All shop drawings should detailed pipe routing and levels, showing location of other services at
crossings etc., cable runs, route cable trays and all allied works and must be fully co-
ordinated with other services and approved by the Engineer Incharge before execution of the
works. Engineer Incharge shall arrange to issue two copies/prints of services drawings from the
respective contracting agencies. All drawings will be valid only when stamped and issued by
the EngineerIncharge.
8.6 Shop drawings shall also be furnished for detailed layout of all equipment, foundation, bolting
and vibration elimination details along with information on dead and dynamic load, vibrationetc.
8.7 Six sets of manufacturer's equipment drawings, roughing in and wiring diagrams shall be
submitted.
8.8 Contractor shall submit shop drawings furnishing all details of MCC panels, cable routes, wiring
diagrams and connection details asrequired.
8.9 Three copies of each set of shop drawings shall be submitted for initial scrutiny, discussion and
approval.
8.10 Each submission shall be accompanied by contractor's certificate stating that the shop drawings
meet all the contract requirements and that the piping and equipment can be satisfactorily
installed without any obstructions in the spaceavailable.
8.11 On approval of the above the contractor shall furnish six sets of the approved shop drawings for
execution of thework.
9 Completiondrawings
9.1 On completion of work, Contractor shall submit one complete set of original tracings and three
prints of "as built" drawings to the Engineer in charge duly approved and stamped by Consultant.
These drawings shall have the followinginformation.
a) Run of all piping, diameters on all floors, vertical stacks and location of externalservices.
b) Ground and invert levels of all drainage pipes together with location of all manholes and
connections uptooutfall.
c) Run of all water supply lines with diameters, locations of control valves, access panels.
d) Location of all mechanical equipment with layout and piping connections and mechanical
equipment.
e) All shop drawings shall be updated from time to time for the purpose of making
Completiondrawings.
No completion certificate shall be issued unless the above drawings are submitted.
9.2 Contractor shall provide four sets of catalogues, service manuals manufacturer's drawings,
performance data and list of spare parts together with the name and address of the manufacturer
for all electrical and mechanical equipment provided byhim.
Page 10 of 202
9.3 All "warranty cards" given by the manufacturers shall be handed over to the EngineerIncharge.
10. Contractor'srates
10.1 Rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of cost of materials, labour, supervision, erection,
tools, plant, scaffolding, service connections, transport to site, all taxes, octroi and levies,
breakage, wastage and all such expenses as may be necessary and required to completely do all
the items of work and put them in a workingcondition.
10.2 Rates quoted are for all heights and depths and in all positions as may be required for thiswork.
10.3 All rates quoted must be for complete items inclusive of all such accessories, fixtures and fixing
arrangements, nuts, bolts, hangers as are a standard part of the particular item except where
specially mentionedotherwise.
10.4 All rates quoted are inclusive of cutting holes and chases in walls and floors and making good the
same with cement mortar/concrete/water proofing of appropriate mix and strength as directed by
the Engineer Incharge. Contractor shall provide holes, sleeves, recesses in the concrete and
masonry work as the work proceeds. All hot and cold water supply pipes crossing masonry walls
and floors shall be provided with G.I. pipe sleeves. The annular space between the pipe and
sleeve shall be filled up with fire proof sealant after testing. Contractor shall give the pipe sleeves
to the civil contractor well in time so that the same can be fixed along with civil works. Any co-
ordination gap shall be of Plumbing contractor‘sresponsibility.
10.5 The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer Incharge with vouchers & test certificates, to prove
that the materials are as per the specification and to indicate that the rates at which the
materials are purchased are in order to work out the rate analysis of non-tendered items which he
may be called upon tocarryout.
11 Testing
11.1 Piping and drainage works shall be tested as specified under the relevant clauses of the
specifications.
11.2 Tests shall be performed in presence of the Engineer Incharge and test records for the tests shall
be duly signed by Plumbing Consultant, Contractor and the EngineerIncharge.
11.3 All materials and equipment found defective shall be replaced at contractor cost and whole work
shall be tested to meet the requirements of thespecifications.
11.4 Contractor shall perform all such tests as may be necessary and required by the local authorities
to meet municipal or other bye-laws inforce.
11.5 Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment and materials for the performance of the tests at no
extracost.
12 Site clearance andcleanup
12.1 The Contractor shall, from time to time, clear away all debris and excess materials accumulated
at the site. Failing of which attractpenalties:
12.2 After the fixtures, equipment and appliances have been installed and commissioned, Contractor
shall clean-up the same and remove all plaster, paints, stains, stickers and other foreign matter or
discolouration leaving the same in a ready to use condition. The equipment installed shall be
protected by contractor till formal handing over takes place byClient.
12.3 On completion of all works, Contractor shall demolish all stores, remove all surplus materials and
leave the site in a broom clean condition, failing which the same shall be done by the Engineer
Incharge at the Contractor‘s risk and cost. Cost of the cleanup shall be deducted from the
contractor's bills on pro-rata basis in proportion to his contractvalue.
Page 11 of 202
13 Licence permits andauthorities
13.1 Contractor must hold a valid plumbing or any other licence as required by the municipal authority
or other competent authority under whose jurisdiction the workfalls.
13.2 Contractor must keep constant liaison with the local development, municipal/statutory authority
and obtain approval of all drainage, water supply, fire suppression and other works carried out by
him.
13.3 Contractor shall obtain, from the municipal and other authorities 'C' & 'D' forms approval of
drainage and water supply works during execution and the completion certificate with respect to
his work as required for occupation of the building. Contractor shall obtain permanent water
supply and drainage connections from authorities concerned. Employer shall re-imburse the fees
paid to the authorities towards the connection charges a production of receipts for moneypaid.
13.5 Contractor shall get any materials tested from the appropriate authority if so required at no extra
cost.
14 Recovery of cost for materials issued to Contractors free ofcost
14.1 If any materials issued to the Contractor free of cost, are damaged or pilfered, when in his
possession, the cost of the same shall be recovered from the Contractor on the basis of actual
cost to owner. The cost shall include the cost paid, freight, transportation, excise duty, sales tax,
octroi, import duty and other levies, plus 100% as penalty. The decision on the actual cost given
by the Employer shall be final and binding on theContractor.
14.2 Contractor has to keep full records of material issued by the owner with reference and challans
etc. Contractor has to give account of all such materials to the EngineerIncharge.
15 Cutting of Water ProofingMembrane:
No walls terraces shall be cut for making and opening after water proofing has been done without
written approval. Cutting of water proofing membrane shall be done very carefully so as other
portion of water proofing is not damaged. On completion of work at such place the water proofing
membrane shall be made good and ensured that the opening/cutting is made fully water proof as
per specifications and details of water proofing approved by Engineer Incharges. Actual cost of
any damage to finished work by contractor shall be recovered from Plumbing Contractor.
16 Cutting of structuralmembers
No structural member shall be chased or cut without the written permission of the Engineer
Incharge. Any damage to the structure shall be on contractor‘s account.
17 Materials supplied byemployer
The Contractor shall verify that all materials supplied by the employer conform to the
specifications of the relevant item in the tender. Any discrepancy found shall be brought to the
notice of the Engineer Incharge.
18 Materials
8.1 Contractor to procure material as per first make from approved make list only unless otherwise
specified and expressly approved in writing by the Engineer Incharge/Client.
18.2 If required, the Contractor shall submit samples of materials proposed to be used in the works.
Approved samples shall be kept in the office of the Engineer Incharge.
Page 12 of 202
Section-II Specifications for Sanitary Fixtures & C.P BrassFittings

1 Scope ofwork
1.1 Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all materials &labour necessary and required
to completely install all sanitary fixtures, chromium plated fittings and accessories as required by
the drawings specified hereinafter and given in the Bill ofQuantities.
1.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the sanitary fixtures shall include the
following:-
a) Sanitary fixtures
b) Chromium platedfittings
c) Porcelain or stainless steelsinks
d) Accessories e.g. towel rods, toilet paper holders, soap dish, towel rack, coat hooksetc.
1.3 Whether specifically mentioned or not all fixtures and appliances shall be provided with all fixing
devices, nuts, bolts, screws, hangers arerequired.
1.4 All exposed pipes within toilets and near fixtures shall be chromium plated brass or copper unless
otherwisespecified.
2 Generalrequirements
2.1 Sanitary fixtures shall be of the best quality approved by the Engineer Incharge/ Client. Wherever
particular makes are mentioned, the choice of selection shall remain with the Engineer in charge /
Client.
2.2 All fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are required to complete the
item in working condition whether specifically mentioned or not in the Bill of Quantities,
specifications, drawings. Accessories shall include proper fixing arrangement, brackets, nuts,
bolts, screws and required connectionpieces.
2.3 Fixing screws shall be half round head chromium plated brass screws with C.P. washers where
necessary.
2.4 Contractor shall furnish without cost all such accessories and fixing devices that are necessary
and required but not supplied along with the Plumbing Fixtures & CP Fittings by the
manufacturers as a part of the original and standardsupply.
2.5 All fittings and fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workmanlike manner true to level and heights
shown on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer‘s recommendations. Care shall
be taken to fix all inlet and outlet pipes at correct positions. Faulty locations shall be made good
and any damage to the finished floor, tiling or terrace shall be made good at Contractor'scost.
2.6 Contractor seal all fixtures fixed near wall, marble and edges. With an approved type of poly-
sulphide sealant appropriate for itsapplication.
3 EuropeanW.C
3.1 European W.C. shall be wash down or symphonic type wall mounted set flushed by means of
dual flush Cistern systems which will be an integral part of the wall system. Framework, walling
and finishing will not form a part of the contractor’s work. Where applicable flush pipe / bend
shall be connected to the W.C. by means of a suitable rubber adapter. Wall hung W.C. shall be
supported by C.I. floor mountedchair.
3.2 Each W.C. set shall be provided with a plastic seat shall be with rubber buffers and chromium
plated hinges.
Page 13 of 202
3.3 Plastic seat shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely stationary in vertical position without falling
down on the W.C. Each W.C. shall be suitable for flushing in low volume of water 5-6litres.
3.4 Flushing Cistern shall be provided with all internal flushing mechanism, 15 mm dia ball cock with
unbreakable polythene float and overflow pipe. Any frame work required for fixing cistern has to
be provided by thecontractor.
3.5 Laboratorybasin
3.5.1 Laboratory basins shall be white glazed vitreous china of size, shape and type specified in the
Schedule of Quantities.
3.5.2 Each basin shall be provided with brackets and clips of approved and securely fixed. Placing of
basins over the brackets without secure fixing shall not beaccepted.
3.5.3 Each basin shall be provided with 32 mm dia C.P. waste with overflow, pop-up waste or rubber
plug and chain as specified in the Bill of Quantities, 32 mm dia C.P. brass bottle trap with C.P
pipe to wall andflange.
3.5.4 Each basin shall be provided with Mixer as specified in the Bill ofQuantities.
3.5.5 Basins shall be fixed at proper heights as shown on drawings. If height is not specified, the rim
level shall be 79 cms or as directed by EngineerIncharge.
3.6 Sinks
3.6.1 Sinks shall be white glazed fireclay or vitreous china or stainless steel or any other material as
specified in the Bill ofQuantities.
3.6.2 Each sink shall be provided with brackets of approved and securely fixed. Counter top sinks shall
be fixed with suitable brackets or clips as recommended by the manufacturer. Each sink shall be
provided with 40 mm dia C.P. waste with chain and plug as given in the Bill of Quantities. Fixing
shall be done as directed by EngineerIncharge.
3.6.3 Supply fittings for sinks shall be mixing fittings or C.P. taps as specified in the Bill ofQuantities.
3.7 Toilets forDisabled

3.7.1 Where specified in washroom facilities designed to accommodate physically handicapped,
accessories should be provided as directed by the EngineerIncharge.
3.7.2 Stainless steel grab bars of required size suitable for concealed or exposed mounting and non-
slip gripping surface shall be provided in all washrooms to be used by physically handicapped as
directed by the EngineerIncharge.
3.8 Showerset
3.8.1 Shower set shall comprise of single lever shower mixer, C.P. shower arm with wall flange and
shower head of approved quality or as specified in the Schedule of Quantities or supplied
by the Owner‘s SiteRepresentative.
3.8.2 Shower mixer and shower arm shall be so fixed as to keep the wall flange clear off the finished
wall. Wall flanges embedded in the finishing shall not beaccepted.
3.9 Urinals
3.9.1 Urinals shall be white glazed vitreous china of size, shape and type specified in the Bill of
Quantities.
3.9.2 Bowl urinals shall be provided with 15 mm dia C.P. spreader, 40 mm dia stainless steel domical
waste and C.P. cast brass bottle trap with pipe and wall flange, and shall be fixed to wallby
C.I. brackets and C.I. wall clips as recommended by manufacturers complete as directed by
Owner‘s Site Representative.
Page 14 of 202
3.9.3 Urinals shall be fixed with C.P. brass screws and shall be provided with 32 mm dia domical waste
leading to urinal'strap.
3.9.4 Flush pipes shall be G.I. pipes concealed in wall chase but with chromium plated bends at inlet
and outlet or as given in Bill ofQuantities.
3.9.5 Urinals shall be flushed by means of fully automatic no-touch flush valve with solenoidvalves.
3.9.6 Waste pipes for urinals shall be G.I pipes (Medium class) to IS: 1239. Waste pipes may be
exposed on wall or concealed in chase as directed by the Specifications for waste pipes shall be
same as given in Section V.
3.10 Urinalpartitions
3.10.1 Urinal partitions shall be white glazed vitreous china, marble, granite or any other material
selected by the Owner‘s Site Representative. The same shall be fixed by Contractor executing
the finishing work. The exact location shall however be co oriented by the PlumbingContractor.
3.10.2 Urinal partitions shall be fixed at proper heights with C.P. brass bolts, anchor fasteners and M.S.
Clips as recommended by the manufacturer and directed by Owner‘s SiteRepresentative.
3.11 Accessories
3.11.1 Contractor shall install all chromium plated and porcelain accessories as shown on the drawings
or directed by the EngineerIncharge.
3.11.2 All C.P. accessories shall be fixed with C.P. brass half round head screws and cup washers in
wall with rawlplugs or nylon sleeves and shall include cutting and making good as required or
directed by EngineerIncharge.
3.11.3 Recessed porcelain accessories shall be fixed in walls and set in cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2
coarse sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work as per Interior Designer‘sdrawings.
3.12 FinalInstallation
The contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures and fittings in their position in accordance with
approved trial assemblies and as shown on drawings. The installation shall be completed with all
supply and waste connections. The connection between building and piping system and the
sanitary fixtures shall be through proper unions and flanges to facilitate removal/replacement of
sanitary fixtures without disturbing the built in piping system. All unions and flanges shall match in
appearance with other exposed fittings.
Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and to alignment. The outlets of water closet pans and
similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that outlet ends are butting on the receiving pipes
before making the joints. It shall be ensured that the receiving pipes are clear of obstruction.
When fixtures are being mounted, attention shall be paid to the possibility of movement and
settlement by other causes. Overflows shall be made to ensure that the necessary anchoring
devices have been provided for supporting water closets, wash basins, sinks and other
appliances.
3.13 Protection againstDamage

The contractor shall take every precaution to protect all sanitary fixtures against damage, misuse,
cracking, staining, breakage and pilferage by providing proper wrapping and locking arrangement
till the completion of the installation. At the time of handling over, the contractor shall clean,
disinfect and polish all the fixtures and fittings. Any fixtures and fittings found damaged, cracked
chipped stained or scratched shall be removed and new fixtures and fittings free from defects
shall be installed at his own cost to complete thework.
3.14 Measurement
3.14.1 Sanitary fixtures and accessories shall be counted by numbers in the unit given in the Bill of
Quantities.
3.14.2 Rates for all items shall be inclusive of cutting holes and chases and making good the same, C.P
Brass screws, nuts, bolts and any fixing arrangements required and recommended by
manufacturers, testing andcommissioning.
Page 15 of 202
Section-III Specifications for Soil, Waste, Vent & Rainwater Pipes &Fittings
1. Scope ofwork
1.1 Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipment and appliances
necessary and required to completely install all soil, waste, vent rain water pipes and fittings as
required by the drawings, and given in the Bill ofQuantities.
1.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the soil, waste, vent pipes system shall
include thefollowing:-
a) Horizontal soil, waste and vent pipes, and fittings, joints, clamps, connections tofixtures.
b) Floor and urinal traps, cleanout plugs, inletfittings.
c) Testing of all pipelines.
2.1 All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications and subject to the
approval of EngineerIncharge.
2.2 Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat
workmanlikemanner.
2.3 Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and
shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passagesetc.
2.4 Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps intervalsspecified.
2.5 Access doors for fittings and clean outs shall be so located that they are easily accessible for
repair and maintenance. Any access panel required in the civil structure, false ceiling or marble
cladding etc. shall be clearly reported to the Owner in the form of shop drawing so that other
agencies are instructed to provide the same well inadvance.
3 PipingSystem
3.1 Schedule of PipesUse
1. CI Spun Soil & Waste PipesI.S3989 Horizontal Soil, Waste.Vent

Within toilets, up to Stacks.& Vertical Stacks
2 GI Pipe&fittings Connections from fixtures toFT.
3 uPVC SWR pipes Type-A(IS 13592-1992-) For Rain waterSystem.
3.2 Soil, Waste & VentPipes
a) The Soil & Waste Pipe System above ground has been planned as a "two pipe system" as
defined in IS: 5329 having separate pipes for waste for kitchen sinks, bath tubs, showers,
washbasins, condensate drains and floor drains and is approved by EngineerIncharge.
b) Vertical soil &waste stacks shall be connected to a horizontal Soil and Waste Pipe as shown on
thedrawings.
c) Toilet layouts have been so arranged that the W.C. outlets shall be with "P" trap aboveground.
3.3 Cast Iron Soil, Waste & VentPipes
a) All Soil, Waste & Vent Pipes used in building shall be centrifugally cast spun iron pipes as
specifiedbelow.
Page 16 of 202
b) All pipes shall be straight and smooth from inside free from irregular bore, blow holes, cracks and
other manufacturingdefects.
 Spun Cast Iron Pipes & Matching Fittings shall be to I.S.3989
c) Standard weight, dimensions and pig lead required for joints shall be asfollows:-
Cast Iron Soil Pipes & Matching fitting shall be to I.S. 3989
Nominal diameter thickness overall internal Depth of lead

Weight diameter Length
1.83 m of socket
Inches mm mm kg mm mm
2 50 5 11.41 76 25
3 75 5 16.52 101 25
4 100 5 21.67 129 25
6 150 5 31.91 181 38
3.4 Tolerances
Acceptable tolerance for pipes to I.S 3989 shall be as follows:-
a) Wallthickness - 15%
b) Length ± 20mm
c) Weight - 10%
3.5 Fittings
3.5.1 Fittings shall conform to the same Indian Standard as for pipes. Pipes and fittings must be of
matching I.S. Specification. Interchange of pipes of one standard with fittings on the other
standard will not bepermitted.
3.5.2 Fittings shall be of the required degree of curvature with or without accessdoor.
3.5.3 Access door shall be made up with 3 mm thick insertion rubber washer and white lead. The
bolts shall be lubricated with grease or white lead for easy removal later. The fixing shall be air
and watertight.
3.6 uPVC Rain WaterPipes
a) All Rain Water Pipes used in building shall be uPVC pipes as specified below.
b) All pipes shall be straight and smooth from inside free from irregular bore, blow holes, cracks and
other manufacturingdefects.
c) uPVC Pipes & Matching Fitting shall be uPVC SWR pipes Type-A (IS13592-1992).
3.7 Fittings
3.7.1 Fittings shall conform to the same Indian Standard as for pipes. Pipes and fittings must be of
matching I.S. Specification. Interchange of pipes of one standard with fittings on the other
standard will not bepermitted.
3.7.2 Fittings shall be of the required degree of curvature with or without accessdoor.
3.7.3 Access door shall be made up uPVC access door with cap jointing with solvent cement joint. The
fixing shall be air and watertight.
3.8 Fixing
3.8.1 All vertical pipes shall be fixed by Galvanisedclamps and galvanised angle brackets truly
vertical. Branch pipes shall be connected to the stack at the same angle as that of the fittings. No
collars shall be used on vertical stacks. Each stack shall be terminated at top with acowl
(terminal guard).
Page 17 of 202
3.8.2 Horizontal pipes running along ceiling shall be fixed on galvanised structural adjustable clamps of
special design shown on the drawings or as directed. Horizontal pipes shall be laid to uniform
slope and the clamps adjusted to the proper levels so that the pipes fully rest onthem.
3.8.3 Contractor shall provide all sleeves, openings, hangers, inserts during the construction. He shall
provide all necessary information to the building Contractor for making such provisions in the
structure as necessary. All damages shall be made good to restore thesurfaces.
3.9 Clamps
3.9.1 All pipe clamps, supports and hangers shall be galvanised. Factory made Pre-fabricated clamps
shall be preferred. Contactor may fabricate the clamps of special nature and galvanise them after
fabrication but before installation. All nuts, bolts, washers and other fasteners shall be factory
galvanised.
3.9.2 Clamps shall be of approved designs and fabricated from M.S. flats (which shall be galvanised
after fabrication) of thickness and sizes as per drawings or contractor‘s shop drawings. Clamps
shall be fixed in accordance to manufacturer‘s details/shop drawings to be submitted by the
contractors.
3.9.3 When required to be fixed on RCC columns, walls or beam they shall be fixed with approved type
of galvanised expansion anchor fasteners (Dash fasteners) of approved design and size
according toload.
3.9.4 Structural clamps e.g. trapeze or cluster hangers shall be fabricated by electro-welding from M.S.
Structural members e.g. rods, angles, channels flats as per Contractors shop drawing shall be
galvanised after fabrication. All nuts, bolts and washers shall begalvanised.
3.9.5 Galvanised slotted angle/channel supports on walls shall be provided wherever shown on
drawings. Angles/channels shall be of sizes shown on drawings or specified in Bill of Quantities.
Angles/channels shall be fixed to brick walls with bolts embedded in cement concrete blocks and
to RCC walls with anchor fasteners mentioned above. The spacing of support bolts on support
members fixed horizontally shall not exceed 1m.
3.10 Traps
3.10.1 Floortraps
a) Floor traps where specified shall be siphon type full bore P or S type cast iron having a
minimum 50 mm deep seal. The trap and waste pipes when buried below ground shall be set
and encased in cement concrete blocks firmly supported on firm ground or when installed on a
sunken RCC structural slab. The blocks shall be in 1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone
aggregate 20 mm nominalsize).
b) Contractor shall provide all necessary shuttering and centring for the blocks. Size of the block
shall be 30x30 cmsof the requireddepth.
3.10.2 Floor Trapinlet
Bath room traps and connections shall ensure free and silent flow of discharging water. Where
specified, Contractor shall provide a special type of floor or manhole inlet fitting fabricated from
G.I. pipe without, with one, two or three inlet sockets welded on side to connect the waste pipe or
joint between waste and inlet socket shall be lead caulked. Inlet shall be connected to a C.I. P or
S trap. Floor trap inlet and the traps shall be set in cement concrete blocks where varied in floors
as specified without extra charge. Floor trap for the shower cubicle shall suit site and as per the
approval of Engineer Incharge.
Page 18 of 202
3.10.3 Floor TrapGrating
Floor and urinal traps shall be provided with 100 -150mm square or round Stainless Steel
gratings as approved with frame and rim of approved design and shape or as specified in the Bill
of Quantities approved by the EngineerIncharge.
3.11 Jointing (CI Soil Pipes &Fittings)
Joints for Cast Iron Soil, waste vent, anti-siphon age pipes shall be made with drip seal PJS-43. It
is a salient manufactured in two colours ―Black‖ and ―White‖, and can be used for sealing of C.I.,
PVC, RCC & Ceramic Pipe joints in place of lead or cement mortar. It has high bonding strength
and is nontoxic. The density of Drip Seal PJS – 43 is 1.95 grams / c.c against the density of lead
@ 11.35 grams / c.c and as such its consumption is nearly 1/6 th of the consumption of lead and
thereby making it cheaper compound to be used in place of lead or cement mortar. The salient
features of Drip Seal Sealant are as under.
Two pack system, which hardens on mixing

Being non flow able, it is easy to apply on horizontal pipe joints without shuttering support.
Cures at room temperature with a setting time of 4 to 6 hours.
Water proof
Resistance to chemicals
Excellent bonding and compressive strength
Water curing, heating or hammering is not required
Doesn‘t shrink onsetting
Withstand pressure higher than 20 kg / cm2 in water supply pipe line
Low labour cost as it is easy to apply
Prolonged service life
Non-polluting, non-toxic and environmental friendly
MIXING & APPLICATION:
The Drip seal in two different colours is mixed homogeneously in the supplied packets. In cold
conditions both unmixed packets are to be heated in Sun or heated to room temperature (250 C)
to make them more workable for mixing. The pipe joint is cleaned to make it free from dust,
grease, oil, cement splashes and all other foreign matters and contaminants. The joint is made
dry. Hemp yarn is provided as usual in pipe joint as back filler. Force the mixed compound into
the lap of pipe joint with Caulking tool, MS Flat piece or by Hand. Proper pressing of compound is
necessary to avoid air entrapment. The joint is not to be disturbed till the compound is hardened.
The mixed compound has a life of 30 to 40 minutes and should be used within this consumption
period.
Dia of Pipes in mm Lead required per Joints in Grams
50 130 to 150
80 150 to 170
100 200 to 250
150 250 to 300
Page 19 of 202
3.12 Cleanout plugs
a) Floor Clean out Plug.

Clean out plug for Soil, Waste or Rainwater pipes laid under floors shall be provided near pipe
junctions bends, tees, ―Ys‖ and on straight runs at such intervals as required as per site
conditions. Cleanout plugs shall terminate flush with the floor levels. They shall be threaded and
provided with key holes for opening. Cleanout plugs shall be Cast Brass suitable for the Pipe dia.
With screwed to a G.I. socket. The socket shall be lead caulked to the drain pipes.
3.13 Waste pipe fromappliances
3.13.1 Waste pipe from appliances e.g. washbasins, sinks and urinals shall be of GI pipes in typical
Toilets kitchens, pantries, equipments and service areas where so required, and as given in the
Bill of Quantities or shown on thedrawings.
3.13.2 All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the connection to stack or drains. Pipes inside all
toilets shall be in chase unless otherwise shown on drawings. Where so required and shown on
drawings or directed by the EngineerIncharge.
3.13.3 Galvanised pipes (Where specified or required at site for Wasteonly)
Pipes shall be galvanised steel tubes conforming to I.S.1239 (medium class) and quality
certificates shall be furnished. Pipes shall be provided with all required fittings e.g. tees,
couplings, bends, elbows, unions, reducers, nipples, plugs. All G.I. waste pipes shall be
terminated at the point of connection with the appliance with an outlet of suitable diameter. Pipes
in chase shall be painted with two coats of black bitumen paint and exposed pipes with one
coat of red oxide primer and two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint or as given in the Bill
ofQuantities.
3.14 Cleanout on Drainage Pipes (COPlugs)
a) Cleanout plugs shall be provided on head of each drain and in between at locations indicated
on plans or directed by Cleanout plugs shall be of size matching the full bore of the pipe but
not exceeding 150 mm dia. CO Plugs on drains of greater diameters shall be 150 mm dia.
Fixed with a suitable reducingadapter.
b) Floor cleanout plugs shall be cast brass as given in Para 3.9above.
c) Cleanouts provided at ceiling level pipe shall be fixed to a CI flanged tail piece. The cleanout
doors shall be specially fabricated from light weight galvanised sheets and angles with
hinged type doors with fly nuts, gasket etc. as perdrawing.
3.15 Encasing in CementConcrete

3.15.1 Encasing of pipes is required to provide stability to the line and prevent its damage during
construction.
a) Cast iron soil and waste pipes underfloor

Pipes lay in sunken slabs and in wall chases (when cut specially for the pipe) shall be encased in
cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate 12 mm size) 75 mm in
bed and all round. When pipes are running well above the structural slab, the encased pipes shall
be supported with suitable cement concrete pillars of required height at intervals of 1.8 m.
3.16 Painting
3.16.1 Paints used shall be as specified in approved make list of approved quality and shade. Wherever
directed pipes shall be painted in accordance with approved pipe colour code and direction of
flow.
3.16.2 All cast iron, soil, waste, vent, anti-siphon age, rainwater pipe sand CI (LA) Drainage pipes in
exposed locations e.g. in shafts, pipe spaces and service floors or fixed at ceiling levels shall be
painted with two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint to give an even shade . CI Soil pipes
buried under floors shall not bepainted.
3.16.3 G.I. waste pipes buried in ground or fixed in chase shall be protected with 2 mm thick bitumen
membrane tape with a final coat of hot or cold applied bitumen. Exposed waste pipes shall be
painted with two or more coats of synthetic enamelpaint.
Page 20 of 202
3.17 Cutting and makinggood
3.17.1 Contractor shall provide all holes cut outs and chases in structural members necessary and
required for the pipe work as building work proceeds. Wherever cut outs , holes are left in the
original construction, they shall be made good with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse
sand: 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) or cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand)
and the surface restored as in originalcondition.
3.18. Sleeves/Cut-outs.
3.18.1 Contractor shall utilised all cut out and sleeves provided during construction to prevent breaking.
The annular space between the pipe and the sleeve shall be filled up with approved type of fire
retardant sealant. When sleeves are misplaced or inaccurately located contractor shall make the
holes in the wall or structural members at his own cost but only with the prior permission of the
Engineer Incharge.
3.19 Testing
3.19.1 Testing procedure specified below apply to all soil, waste and vent pipes aboveground.
3.19.2 Entire drainage system shall be tested for water tightness and smoke tightness during and after
completion of the installation. No portion of the system shall remain untested. Contractor must
have adequate number of expandable rubber bellow plugs, manometers, smoke testing
machines, pipe and fitting work test benches and any other equipment necessary and required to
conduct thetests.
3.19.3. All materials obtained and used on site must have manufacturer's hydraulic test certificate for
each batch of materials used on thesite.
3.20 Measurements
3.20.1 General
a) Rates quoted for all items shall be inclusive of all work and items given in the Specifications and
Bill ofQuantities.
b) Rates are applicable for the work in basements, underground, floors, in shafts at ceiling level area
for all depths and building up to 45 m inheight.
3.20.2 Rates are inclusive of cutting holes and chases in RCC and masonry work where no sleeves or
cut outs have been provided during construction and making good thesame.
3.20.3 Rates are inclusive of pre testing, on site testing, of the installations, materials and
commissioningof theworks.
3.20.4 Pipes (unit of measurement linear meter to the nearestcentimetre).
3.20.5 C.I. soil, waste, vent, anti-siphon age, rain water pipes, shall be measured net when fixed correct
to a centimetre including all fittings along its finishedlength.
3.20.6 G.I. pipes shall measure per running metre correct to a centimetre for the finished work which
shall include fittings e.g. bends, tees, elbows, reducers, crosses, sockets, nipples and nuts. The
length shall be taken along centre line of the pipes and fittings. All pipes and fittings shall be
classified according to their diameter, method of jointing and fixing substance, quality, and finish.
The diameters shall be nominal diameter of internal bore. No allowances shall be made for the
portions of pipe length entering the sockets of the adjacent pipe orfittings.
All supports required to support the pipes from slab/ceiling/i/c dash fasteners, M.S. structural,
slotted angles/channels including support bolts and nuts embedded in masonry walls and
hangers etc shall be included in the item rate of pipe including the item of work givenbelow:-
a) Expandable anchor fasteners
b) Galvanisingof all supports andhangers
Page 21 of 202
c) Cutting holes in walls, ceiling of floors and making good wherepermitted

d) Nuts, bolts and washers for fixing andassembling
e) Wooden/PVC pipe saddles for vertical or horizontalruns
3.20.7 Cement concrete around pipes shall be measured along the centreof the pipe line measured per
linear metre and include any masonry supports ,shuttering and centring cutting complete as
described in the relevant specifications.
3.20.8 Fittings (excluding pipe fittings) (Unit of measurement bynumbers)
Urinal traps, trap gratings, hoppers, cleanout plugs khurras shall be measured by number per
piece and shall include all items described in the relevant Specifications and Bill of Quantities.
3.20.9 Painting
Painting of pipes and fittings shall be measured per running metre.
3.20.10 Excavation for soilpipes

No extra payment shall be admissible with respect to excavation, refilling and disposal of surplus
earth for cast iron soil and waste pipes laid below ground, in sunken slabs or over basement rafts
or for CI (LA) drainage pipes laid below ground.
Section-IV Specification for Water SupplySystem

1. Scope ofwork
1.1 Work under this section consists of furnishing all labour, materials equipment and appliances
necessary and required to completely install the water supply system as required by the
drawings, specified hereinafter and given in the Bill ofQuantities.
1.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the water supply system shall include the
following:-
a) Distribution system from main vertical stack to all fixtures and appliances for cold & hot
water.
b) Pipe protection andpainting.
c) Controlvalves
2.1 All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications. All works executed
shall be to the satisfaction of the EngineerIncharge.
2.2 Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat work
man likemanner.
2.3 Short or long bends shall be used on all main pipe lines as far as possible. Use of elbows shall be
restricted for shortconnections.
2.5 Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervalsspecified.
2.6 Clamps, hangers and supports on RCC walls, columns & slabs shall be fixed only by means of
approved made of expandable metal fasteners inserted by use of powerdrills.
2.7. Allpipeclamps,supports,nuts,bolts,washersshallbegalvanisedMSsteelthroughoutthe building.

Painted MS clamps & MS nuts, bolts & washers shall not beaccepted.
Page 22 of 202
2.8 Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located as to provide easy accessibilityfor
operations, maintenance andrepairs.
3 Water Supply System
3.1.1 Contractorshouldstudythesiteplanandwatersupplysystemdiagramforanoverviewofthe system.

3.1.1 Source
Water supply will be acquired from OHT located at terrace of building.
3.1.2 The system has been planned to ensure adequate pressure in all parts of thetoilets.
3.1.3 It is proposed to provide dual flushing cistern for allWCs.
4.0 CPVC PIPES,FITTINGS

All cold & hot water pipes inside the building up to 50mm diameter and where it specified shall be
CPVC pipes.
4.1 MATERIAL
4.1.1 All pipes and fitting comply with ASTM D2446standard.
4.1.2 CPVC fusion compound (solvent cement) as per ASTMF493.
4.1.3 All fitting are fusion bonding type (assembly using CPVC fusion compound) unless otherwise
specified.
4.1.4 All metal transition are brass type with threads as per IS 554CPVC threaded fitting are not
recommended.
4.2 INSTALLATIONS
4.2.1 Install product according to Manufacturer installation instruction and manual and follow
recommended safe workspractices.
4.2.2 Keep pipe and fitting in original packaging until needed and store pipes in coveredareas.
4.2.3 Use tools designed for use with plastic pipe andfitting.
4.2.4 Cut of minimum 25mm beyond the edge of the crack in case any crack is discovered in thepipe.
4.2.5 Cut the pipe as square (perpendicular) as possible before making joint. Always use sharp edge
cutting tools. Sharpen holder toolsperiodically.
4.2.6 Always apply a heavy & even cost of CPVC solvent cement on pipe and a light cost insidefittings.
4.2.7 Use CPVC fusion compound confirming with ASTMF493.
4.2.8 Always hold the fresh fusion compounded joint in place for 20-30second.
4.2.9 Use brass threaded MTA‘s and FTA‘s for hot water & for transition to or fromMetal.
4.2.10 Always conducts hydraulic pressure testing after installation to detect any leaks and faults. Wait
for appropriate cure time before pressure testing. Fill lines slowly and bleed air from the system
prior to pressuretesting.
4.2.11 Deburr, bevel and clean mating surface of pipe and fittings beforejoining.
4.2.12 Rotate the pipe 80 degree to 190 degree to spread the CPVC solvent cement evenly in the while
pushing the pipe intofitting.
4.2.13 Use Teflon tapes with threadedfitting.
4.2.14 Ensure that there no share edge in contact with the pipe while embedding the pipes on the wall or
in thefloors.
Page 23 of 202
4.2.15 Provide vertical and horizontal supports as recommended using the plastic strapsonly.
4.2.16 Apply only water- based paint on exposed pipes andfitting.
4.2.17 Provide sleeves (pipe cover) at entry & exit it under slab installations & while crossing
walls. Visually inspect all joints for proper cemented at the end of shift or day. A visual
inspection of the complete system is also recommended during pressuretesting.
4.2 G.I. pipes, fittings &valves
4.2.1 All pipes inside the buildings and where specified, outside the building shall be galvanised steel
tubes conforming to I.S. 1239 of HeavyClass.
4.2.2 Fittings shall be malleable galvanised iron and shall have manufacturer's trade mark stamped on
it. Fittings for G.I. pipes shall include couplings, tees, reducers, nipples, unions, bushes. Fittings
shall conform to I.S.1879-(Part I toX).
4.2.3 Pipes and fittings shall be jointed with screwed joints. Care shall be taken to remove burr from the
end of the pipe after reaming with a propertime.
4.2.4 Pipe threaded joints will be made by applying suitable grade of TEFLON tape used for drinking
watersupply.
4.2.5 All pipes shall be fixed in accordance with layout and alignment shown on the drawings. Care
shall be taken to avoid air pockets. G.I. pipes inside toilets shall be fixed in wall chases well
above the floor. No pipes be run inside a sunken floor as far as possible. Pipes may be run under
the ceiling or floors and other areas as shown ondrawings.
4.3 PipeSupports
4.3.1 All pipes clamps, supports, hangers, rods, pipe supports, nuts bolts & washers shall be factory
made galvanised MS steel or alternatively galvanised after fabrication to suit siterequirements.
4.3.2 Stainless Steel Pipes in shafts and other locations shall be supported by galvanised M.S. clamps
of design approved by Pipes in wall chases shall be anchored by G.I. hooks. Pipes at ceiling level
shall be supported on structural clamps fabricated from M.S. Structural. Pipes in typical shafts
shall be supported on Galvanised slotted angles/channels as specifiedelsewhere.
4.4 Clamps
Galvanized iron pipes in shafts and other locations shall be supported by M.S. clamps of design
approved by Engineer Incharge. Pipes in wall chases shall be anchored by iron hooks, Pipes at
ceiling level shall be supported on structural clamps fabricated from M.S. structural as described
above. Pipes in typical shafts shall be supported on slotted angles/channels as specified
elsewhere.
4.5 AnchorFasteners
4.5.1 All pipes supports, hangers and clamps to be fixed on RCC walls, beams, columns, slabs and
masonry walls 230mm thick and above by means of galvanised expandable anchor fasteners in
drilled holes of correct size and model to carry the weight of pipes. Drilling shall be made only by
approved type of power drill as recommend and approved by manufacturer of the anchor
fasteners. Failure of any fastening devices shall be the entire responsibility and contractor shall
redo or provide additional supports at his own cost. He shall also compensate the owner for any
damage that may be caused by suchfailures.
4.6 Unions
Contractor shall provide adequate number of unions on all pipes to enable easy dismantling later
when required. Unions shall be provided near each gunmetal valve, stop cock, or check valve
and on straight runs as necessary at appropriate locations as required and/or directed by
EngineerIncharge.
4.7 Flanges
Flanged connections shall be provided on pipes as required or where shown on the drawings, all
equipment connections as necessary and required or as directed by Connections shall be made
by the correct number and size of GI nuts, bolts & washers with 3 mm thick gasket. Where hot
water or steam connections are made insertion gasket shall be of suitable high temperature
Page 24 of 202
grade and quality approved by Bolt hole dia for flanges shall conform to match the specification
for C.I. sluice valve to I.S. 780. And C.I. butterfly valve to IS:13095.
4.8 Trenches
All water supply pipes below ground shall be laid in trenches with a minimum cover of 60 cms.
The width and depth of the trenches shall be asfollows:-
Dia of pipe Width of trench Depth of trench
------------- --- --------------- -------------------
15 mm to 50 mm 30 cms 75 cms
65 mm to 100 mm 45 cms 100 cms
4.9 Sandfilling
G.I.Pipes in trenches shall be protected with fine sand 15 cms all round before filling in the
trenches.
4.10 Painting
4.10.1 All pipes above ground shall be painted with one coat of red lead and two coats of synthetic
enamel paint of approved shade and quality. Pipes shall be painted to standard colour code given
in these documents or specified by EngineerIncharge.
4.11 Pipeprotection
4.11.1 All GI in wall chase and below floor in toilets (where so fixed) shall be protected against corrosion
by the application of two coats of bitumen paint covered with polythene tape and a final coat of
bitumenpaint.
4.11.2 G.I. waste pipes buried in ground or sunken slab shall be protected with multi-layer bitumen
membrane tape 3mm thick with a final coat of hot or cold appliedbitumen.
4.12 INSULATION
4.12.1 All hot water pipes shall be insulated with elastomeric closed shells circularpipes.
4.12.2 All insulation material shall be elastomeric closed shells foam has a high diffusion resistance
factor that prevent excessive water diffusion that gives longer lifetime ofmaterial.
4.12.3 The insulation material having the property of resistance of fire i.e. in case of fire these materials
do not drop and do not spreadflames.
4.12.4 All insulation material as per din 1988/7 (standard for drinking water pipe installation and for
avoiding corrosion damage and scaleformation).
4.12.5 The thermal conductivity of material at 0 deg. C = 0.035w/(m.K).
4.12.6 The temperature resistance of material between –45 deg. C to +116 deg.C.
4.12.7 The Thickness of insulation pipes asfollows:
Size of pipes Application of Location Thickness of Type of Section

pipes Material (mm)
15 mm to 40mm Hot water supply Concealed 6 mm Tube Section
15 mm to 100 mm Hot water supply Exposed 9 mm Tube Section
Page 25 of 202
4.13 Valves
4.13.1 BallValves
Valves upto 40 mm dia. shall be screwed type Ball Valves with stainless steel balls, spindle,
2
Teflon seating and gland packing tested to a hydraulic pressure of 20 kg/cm , and accompanying
couplings and steel handles.( to BS 5351)
4.14 ButterflyValves
4.14.1 Valves 50 mm dia and above shall be cast iron butterfly valve to be used for isolation. The valves
shall be bubble tight, resilient seated suitable for flow in either direction and seal in both direction
with accompanying flanges and steelhandle.
4.14.2 Butterfly valve shall be of best quality conforming to IS:13095.
4.15 Non Return Valve (SlimType)
Where specified non return valve (swing check type) shall be provided through which flow can
occur in one direction only. It shall be single door swing check type of best quality.
4.15.1 Each Butterfly and Slim Type Swing Check (NRV) Valve shall be provided with a pair of flanges
screwed or welded to the main line and having the required number of galvanised nuts, bolts and
washers of correctlength.
4.16 Testing
4.16.1 All pipes, fittings and valves after fixing at site, shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 times
2
the working pressure or 20 kg/cm whichever ismore.
Pressure shall be maintained for a period of at least two hours without any drop.
A test register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed and dated by Contractor (s) and
Engineer Incharge.
4.16.2 In addition to the sectional testing carried out during the construction, Contractor shall test the
entire installation after connections to the overhead tanks or pumping system or mains. He shall
rectify all leakages and shall replace all defective materials in the system. Any damage done due
to carelessness, open or burst pipes or failure of fittings, to the building, furniture and fixtures
shall be made good by the Contractor during the defects liability period without anycost.
4.16.3 After commissioning of the water supply system, Contractor shall test each valve by closing and
opening it a number of times to observe if it is working efficiently. Valves which do not effectively
operate shall be replaced by new ones at no extra cost and the same shall be tested asabove.
4.17 Measurement
All pipes above ground shall be measured per linear meter (to the nearest cm) and shall be
inclusive of all fittings e.g. coupling, tees, bends, elbows, unions, flanges and U clamps with nuts,
bolts & washers fixed to wall or other standard supports. No allowance shall be made for the
portions of pipe length entering the sockets of the adjacent pipe or fittings.
All supports required to support the pipes from slab/ceiling/i/c dash fasteners. M.S. structural,
slotted angles/channels including support bolts and nuts embedded in masonry walls and
hangers etc shall be incl. in the item rate of pipe including the item of work givenbelow:-
a) Expandable anchorfasteners
b) Galvanisingof all supports and hangars
c) Cutting holes in walls, ceiling of floors and making good wherepermitted
d) Nuts, bolts and washers for fixing andassembling
Page 26 of 202
e) Wooden/PVC pipe saddles for vertical or horizontalruns

Jointing with Teflon tape, white lead and insertion gasket of appropriate temperature grade.
Cutting holes, and chases in walls, floors, any pipe support required for pipes below ground &
making good the same.
Excavation, back filling, disposal of surplus earth and restoring the ground & floor in original
condition.
4.18 PipeSupports.
4.18.1 Rate quoted for supports & hangers shall be inclusiveof:-
a) Expandable anchorfastens.
b) Galvanisingof all supports &hangers.
c) Cutting holes in walls, ceilings on floors and making good wherepermitted.
d) Nuts, bolts and washers for fixing andassembling.
e) Wooden/PVC pipe saddles for vertical or horizontalruns.
4.19 Valves
Gunmetal, cast iron, butterfly and non-return valves and puddle flanges shall be measured by
numbers and shall include wheels/caps, GI nuts, bolts, washers and insertion gasket.
4.20 Painting / pipeprotection/insulation
Painting / pipe protection / insulation for pipes shall be measured per linear metre over finished
surface and shall include all valves and fittings for which no deduction shall be made. No extra
payment shall be made for fittings, valves or flanges.
Section-V. Specification for Sewerage and Drainage system

a) Sewer lines including excavations, pipe lines, manholes, dropconnections
b) Storm water drainage, excavation, pipelines.
c) Drainage lines and open drains shall be laid to the required gradients andprofiles.
d) All drainage work shall be done in accordance with the local municipalbye-laws.
e) Location of all manholes, etc. shall be got approved from the Engineer Incharge. No drains or
sewers shall be laid in the middle of road unless otherwise specifically shown on the drawings or
directed by the EngineerIncharge.
5.1 Excavation
5.1.1 Alignment andgrade
The sewer pipes shall be laid to alignment and gradient shown on the drawings but subject to
such modifications as shall be ordered by the No deviations from the lines, depths of cutting or
gradients of sewers shown on the plans and sections shall be permitted except by the express
direction in writing of the EngineerIncharge.
5.1.2 Opening out trenches
In excavating the trenches, etc.The solid road metalling, pavement, kerbing, etc. And turf is to be
placed on one side and preserved for reinstatement when the trenches or other excavation shall
be filled up. Before any road metal is replaced, it shall be carefully sifted. The surface of all
trenches and holes shall be restored and maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer Incharge.
Page 27 of 202
The Contractor shall grub up and clear the surface over the trenches and other excavations of all
trees, stumps roots and all other encumbrances affecting execution of the workand shall remove
them from the site to the approval of the EngineerIncharge.
5.1.3 Obstruction ofroads
The Contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more than one half of the width
of any road or street and sufficient space shall then be left for public and private transit, he
shall remove the materials excavated and bring them back again when the trench is required to
be refilled. The Contractor shall obtain the consent of the EngineerIncharge.
5.1.4 Removal offilth

All night soil, filth or any other offensive matter met with during the execution of the works,
immediately after it is taken out of any trench, sewer, shall not be deposited on to the surface
of any street or where it is likely to be a nuisance or passed into any sewer or drain but
shall be at once put into the carts and removed to a suitable place to be provided by the
Contractor.
5.1.5 Excavation to be taken to properdepths
The trenches shall be excavated to such a depth that the sewer shall rest on concrete as
described in the several clauses relating thereto and so that the inverts may be at the levels
given in thesections.
5.1.6 Refilling
After the sewer or other work has been laid and proved to be water tight, the trench or other
excavations shall be refilled. Utmost care shall be taken in doing this, so that no damage shall be
caused to the sewer and other permanent work. The back filling up to 75 cms above the crown of
the sewer pipe shall consist of the finest selected materials placed carefully in 15 cms layers
and flooded and consolidated. After this has been laid, the trench and other excavation shall be
refilled carefully in 15 cms layers with materials taken from the excavation, each layer being
watered to assist in the consolidation unless the EngineerIncharge.
5.1.7 Contractor to restore settlement anddamages
The Contractor shall, at his own costs and Charges, make good promptly during the whole period
the works are in hand, any settlement that may occur in the surfaces of roads, berms, footpaths,
gardens, open spaces etc. Whether public or private caused by his trenches or by his other
excavations and he shall be liable for any accidents caused thereby. He shall also, at his own
expense and Charges, repair and make good any damage done to buildings and other property.
If in the opinion of the EngineerIncharge.
5.1.8 Disposal of surplussoil
The Contractor shall at his own costs and charges provide places for disposal of all surplus
materials not required to be used on the works. As each trench is refilled the surplus soil shall be
immediately removed, the surface properly restored and roadways and sides left clear.
5.1.9 Width oftrench

Recommended width of trenches at the bottom shall be as follows:-
100 mmdia pipe 55cms
225-250 mm diapipe 60cms
400 mmdiapipe 80cms
Page 28 of 202
5.2 Salt glazed stonewarepipes
5.2.1 Stoneware pipes shall be of first class quality salt glazed and free from rough texture inside and
outside and straight. All pipes shall have the manufacturers name marked on it and shall comply
with I.S.651.
5.2.2 Laying and jointing of stoneware salt glazedpipes
a) Pipes are liable to be damaged in transit and not withstanding tests that may have been made
before dispatch each pipe shall be examined carefully on arrival at site. Each pipe shall be rung
with a wooden hammer or mallet and those that do not ring true and clear shall be rejected.
Sound pipes shall be carefully stacked to prevent damage. All defective pipes should be
segregated, marked in a conspicuous manner and their use in the worksprevented.
b) The pipes shall be laid with sockets leading uphill and rest on solid and even foundations for the
full length of the barrel. Socket holes shall be formed in the foundation sufficiently deep to allow
the pipe jointer room to work right round the pipe and as short as practicable to admit the socket
and allow the joint to bemade.
c) Where pipes are not bedded on concrete the trench bottom shall be left slightly high and carefully
bottomed up as pipe laying proceeds so that the pipe barrels rest on firm ground. If excavation
has been carried too low it shall be made up with cement concrete at the Contractor's cost and
Charges.
d) If the bottom of the trench consists of rock or very hard ground that cannot be easily excavated to
a smooth surface, the pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed to ensure evenbearing.
5.2.3 Jointing ofpipes
a) The spigot shall be placed into the socket of the pipe previously laid; the pipe shall then be
adjusted and fixed in its correctposition.
b) The socket shall be filled with stiff mix of cement mortar (1cement: 1 clear sharp washed sand).
When the socket is filled, a fillet should be formed round the joint with a trowel forming an
angle of 45 degrees with the barrel of the pipe. The mortar shall be mixed as needed for
immediate use and no mortar shall be beaten up and used after it has begun toset.
c) After the joint has been made any extraneous materials shall be removed from inside of the joint
with a suitable scraper of "badger". The newly made joints shall be protected until set from the
sun, drying winds, rain or dust. Sacking or other materials which can be kept damp shall be used.
The joints shall be exposed and space left all-round the pipes for inspection by the inside of the
sewer must be left absolutely clear in bore and free from cement mortar or other obstructions
throughout its entire length, and shall efficiently drain anddischarge.
5.3 Gullytraps
a. Gully traps shall be of the same quality as described for stoneware pipes in clause 5.2 above and
used where shown on drawings.
b) Gully traps shall be fixed in cement concrete 1:4:8 mix and a brick masonry chamber 30x30
cms inside in cement mortar 1:5 with 15x15 cms grating inside and 30x30 cmsC.I sealed cover
and frame weighing not less than 7.0 kg (approx.) to be constructed as per standard drawing.
5.4 Reinforced cement concretepipes
5.4.1 All underground storm water drainage pipes and sewer lines where specified shall be
centrifugallyspun S & S RCC pipes of NP2 class. Pipes shall be true and straight with uniform
bore, throughout. Cracked, warped pipes shall not be used on thework.
5.4.2 Laying R.C.C. spun pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed as specified and shown on the
detaileddrawings.
Page 29 of 202
5.4.3 Jointing
After setting out the pipes the socket shall be centered over the spigot and filled with cement
mortar 1:1 (1 cement: 1 fine sand) and caulked by means of proper tools. All joints shall be
finished at an angle of 45 degrees to the longitudinal axis of the pipe.
5.5 Manholes and chambers
5.5.1 All manholes, chambers and other such works as specified shall be constructed in brick masonry
in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) or as specified in the Bill ofQuantities.
5.5.2 All manholes and chambers, etc. shall be supported on base of cement concrete of such
thickness and mix as given in the Bill of Quantities or shown on thedrawings.
5.5.3 All manholes shall be provided with cement concrete benching in 1:2:4 mix. The benching shall
have a slope of 10 cms towards the channel. The depth of the channel shall be full diameter of
the pipe. Benching shall be finished with a floating coat of neat cement. (1 cement: 2 coarse
sand: 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal Size) as per standarddetails.
5.5.4 All manholes shall be plastered with 12/15 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse
sand) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement inside. Manhole shall be plastered outside
as above but with rough plaster mixed with water proofingcompound.
5.5.5 All manholes with depths greater than 1 m. Shall be provided with plastic coated catch rings set
in cement concrete vertically andstaggered.
5.5.6 All manholes shall be provided with steel Fibre reinforced plastic (SFRC) covers and frames and
embedded in reinforced cement concrete slab. Weight of cover, frame and thickness of slab shall
be as specified in the Bill of Quantities or givenabove.
5.6 Cement concrete and masonry works (for manholesetc.)
5.6.1 Materials
a) Water
Water used for all the constructional purposes shall be clear and free from oil, acid, alkali,
organic and other harmful matters, which shall deteriorate the strength and/or durability of the
structure. In general, the water suitable for drinking purposes shall be considered good enough
for constructionalpurpose.
b) Aggregate for concrete
The aggregate for concrete shall be in accordance with I.S.383 and I.S. 515.in general; these
shall be free from all impurities that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement. Before actual use
these shall be washed in water, if required as per the direction of Architect/Construction
Management Consultant/ Engineer Incharge. The size of the coarse aggregate shall be done as
per I.S.383.
c) Sand
Sand for various constructional purposes shall comply in all respects with I.S. 650 and I.S. 2116.
It shall be clean, coarse hard and stone, sharp, durable, uncoated, free from any mixture of clay,
dust, vegetable matters, mica, iron impurities soft or flaky and elongated particles, alkali,
organic matters, salt, loam and other impurities which may be considered by the Architect/
EngineerIncharge‘
d) Cement
The cement used for all the constructional purposes shall be grade 43 or 53 conforming to
I.S.269.
e) Mild steelreinforcement
Page 30 of 202
The mild steel for the reinforcement bars shall be in the form of round bars conforming to all
requirements of I.S. 432 Grade I.
f) Bricks
Brick shall have uniform Colour, thoroughly burnt but not over burnt, shall have plain rectangular
faces with parallel sides and sharp right angled edges. They should give ringing sound when
struck. Brick shall not absorb more than 20% to 22% of water, when immersed in water for 24
hours. Bricks to be used shall be approved by the Architect/ Engineer Incharge
g) Other materials
Other materials not fully specified in these specifications and which may be required in the work
shall conform to the latest I.S. All such materials shall be approved by the Architect/ Engineer
Incharge
5.6.2 Cement concrete (plain orreinforced)
a) Cement concrete pipes bedding, cradles, foundations and R.C.C. slabs for all works shall be
mixed by a mechanical mixer where quantities of the concrete poured at one time permit. Hand
mixing on properly constructed platforms may be allowed for small quantities by the
Architect/Construction Management Consultant/ Engineer Incharge Rate for cement concrete
shall be inclusive of all shuttering and centering at all depth andheights.
b) Concrete work shall be of such thickness and mix as given in the Bill ofQuantities.
c) All concrete work shall be cured for a period of at least 7 days. Such work shall be kept moist by
means of gunny bags at all times. All pipes trenches and foundations shall be kept dry during the
curingperiod.
5.6.3 Masonrywork
Masonry work for manholes, chambers, septic tanks, and such other works as required shall be
constructed from1st class bricks or 2nd class as specified in the bill of quantities in cement
mortar 1:5 mix (1cement: 5 coarse sand). All joints shall be properly raked to receiveplaster.
5.6.4 Cement concrete for pipesupport
a) Wherever specified or shown on the drawings, all pipes shall be supported in bed all round or
haunches. The thickness and mix of the concrete shall be given in the Bill OfQuantities.
b) Unless otherwise directed by the Architect/Construction Management Consultant/ Engineer

Incharge cement concrete for bed, all around or in haunches shall be laid as follows:-
Upto 1.5m Upto 3m Beyond 3m

Depth Depth Depth
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stonewarepipes all round in haunches allround
Inopenground (1:4:8) (1:4:8) (1:4:8)
(No subsoil
Water)
R.C.C or SW Allround in haunches inhaunches
Insubsoil (1:3:6) (1:3:6) (1:3:6)
Water
C.I.Pipes Allround in haunches inhaunches
(Inall (1:3:6) (1:3:6) (1:3:6)
Conditions)
R.C.C.Pipes Allaround allaround allaround
(1:4:8) (1:3:6) (1:3:6)
(Ratio refer to cement: coarse sand: stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size)
Page 31 of 202
Section –VISpecifications for Pumps & Water Treatment Equipments

1. Scope ofwork
Work under this section shall consists of furnishing all labour, materials, equipment and
appliances necessary and required to supply install and commission the water supply and
drainage pumps as described hereinafter and given in the schedule of quantities and/or shown
on thedrawings.
2. Generalrequirements
2.1 All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications and subject to
the approval of EngineerIncharge.
2.2. All equipment shall be of the best available as per approved make list manufactured by reputed
firms.
2.3. All equipment shall be installed on suitable foundations true to level and in a neat workmanlike
manner.
2.4. Equipment shall be so installed as to provide sufficient clearance between the end walls and
between equipment toequipment.
2.5. Piping within the pump house shall be so done as to prevent any obstruction in the movement
within the pumphouse.
2.6. Each pumping set shall be provided with a butterfly valve on the suction and delivery side and a
flap type non return valve on the delivery side along with pressure gauges asrequired.
.2.7. All pump couplings and belt guards for air compressors shall be totally enclosed with 5 mmmesh.
Specifications for Pumps
3. Variable speed pumping system for water supplysystems
3.1 Water supply pumping system for the building shall be fully automatic variable speeddrive
system, packaged skid mounted system with three vertical centrifugal pumping sets and arranged
in a manner to operate the entire system between pre-determined operating conditions specified.
Pumps shall be protected against running dry by providing low level electronic cut off switch
separately for system selected. The system will be provided with an integral programmable
sequence controller so that each pump operates sequentially and no single pump remains idle.
The system will also be provided with stainless steel vessel of capacity as per manufacturer‘s
recommendations with timing mechanism to ensure that each pump operates for a minimum
period of one minute between two starts. Pumps shall have a pump head / efficiency curve to
operate within the range given in the specifications. The pumps selected shall be suitable for
continuous dutyoperating.
3.2 All systems offered will be complete packaged systems comprising of the pumps, stainless steel
vessels, variable speed control systems, sensors, pressure gauges andswitches.
3.3 Items of the work given are broad indications for progressive payment. Not withstanding the
descriptions, BOQ and drawings issued with the tender, offer for which system must be complete
in all respects in ready to use condition. Contractor must include all items necessary and
required, whether described in the specification, drawing andBOQ.
4 Pumping sets for Filter Feed Pump & Garden Irrigation Pumps (Imported Stainless Steel
Pumps)
4.1 Water supply pumps shall be suitable for clean filtered water. Pumps shall be single stage,
vertical/horizontal, centrifugal pumps with stainless steel body and stainless steel (DIN W-Nr
.1.4301) impeller, stainless steel shaft and mechanical seal and coupled to a TEFC electric motor.
Each pump should be operating to a curve required by the operating conditions.
Page 32 of 202
4.2 All parts in contract with water shall be corrosion resistant stainless steelDIN-Nr.1.4401.
4.3 Each pump shall be provided with a totally enclosed fan cooled induction motor of suitable H.P.
The motors shall be suitable for 410 volts, 3 phases, 50 cycles A.C. power supply and shall
conform to IS 325 operating at 2900 RPM nominalspeed.
4.4 Each pumping set shall be provided with 100-mm diagunmetal ―Borden‖ type pressure gauge
with gunmetal valve and connectingpiping.
4.5 Pump or the whole set shall be stable on rubber vibration eliminating pads appropriate for each
pump as recommended by the manufacturer and accepted by the EngineerIncharges..
5. Submersiblepumps
5.1. Submersible pumps for sewage/drainage shall be single stage, single entry pump. Pump shall be
with C.I. casing and C.I. two vane open type dynamically balanced impeller connected to a
common shaft to the motor. The vane for sewage pump will be open type, while for drainage
pump etc. It will be of semi opentype.
5.2 Stuffing box shall be provided with mechanicalseals
5.3 Each pump shall be provided with water cooled squirrel cage induction motor suitable for 415
volts, 3 phase, 50 cycles AC powersupply.
5.4 Each pump shall be provided with liquid level controller for operating the pump between
predeterminedlevels.Operationoflevelcontrollershallbesimilartoasdiscussedinpara6.1&
6.2 below.
5.5 The pumping set shall be for stationary application and shall be provided with pump connector in
it. The delivery pipe shall be joined to the pump through a rubber diaphragm, and bend and
guide pipe for easy installation, without disturbing delivery pipe the pump unit shall have a back
pull out design. A rust proof chain shall be provided for eachpump.
5.6 Pump shall be provided with all accessories and devices necessary and required for the pump to
make a complete workingsystem.
6 LevelControllers
6.1 Level controllers shall be electronic low voltage type using required number of stainless steel type
probes, shrouded in PVC sheath or encapsulated in a stainless steel pipe. The level controller
will be used for following applications:-
6.2 Variable speed pumping system, filter feed pump and soft water transfer pump.
To start/cut off all operating pumpswhen:-
a) Water level is low in storage water tanks with low water level audiblealarm.
b) To cut off filter feed pump and soft water transfer pump when water in tank isfull.
6.3 Sump Pump level controller & high wateralarm
To cut off the drainage sump pump when the sump is empty and to start when:-
a) Duty pump No. 1 at pre-determined levelNo.1
b) Duty pump No. 2 at a higher pre-determinedlevel.No.2
7.0 Pipe & Fittings (for Headers andConnections)
7.1 Pump suction and delivery headers shall be Galvanized iron pipes/MS heavy class with matching
fittings. The pipe joints shall be threaded as per manufacturer‘sinstructions.
Page 33 of 202
7.2 VibrationEliminators
Provide on all suction and delivery lines as shown on the drawings double flanged reinforced
neoprene flexible pipe connectors. Connectors should be suitable for a working pressure of each
pump and tested to the test pressure given in the relevant head. Length of the connectors shall
be as per site requirements in accordance with manufacturerdetails.
7.3 Valves
7.3.1 ButterflyValves
Butterfly Valves shall be cast iron body with following details:-
a) Disc shall be CI heavy duty electrolyses nickel plated abrasion resistant.
b) The shaft is EN-8 Carbon Steel with low friction nylonbearings.
c) The seat shall be drop tight constructed by bonding resilient elastomer inside a rigidbacking.
d) Built in flanged rubberseals.
e) Actuator to level operated for valves above ground and T Key operated for valves below
ground.
7.3.2 Built in flanges for screwed on flanged connections.
Manufacturer‘s details on fixing and installation will befollowed.
7.3.3 Non Return Valves(NRV)
a) Non return valves will be used at location to allow flow only in one direction and prevent flow
in the oppositedirection.
b) NRV shall be cast iron slim type with cast iron body and gunmetal internal parts and
accompanying flanges. Valves shall confirm toBS.
8. Painting and cleanup
a) On completion of the installation contractor shall scrub clean all pumps, piping, filters and
equipment and apply one coat ofprimer.
b) Apply two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved make and shade on steel
pipes.
c) Provide painted identification legend and direction arrows on all equipment and piping as
directed byengineer-in-charge.
d) On final completion of the work, contractor should cleanup the site, filter room of all surplus
materials rubbish and leave the place in a broom-cleancondition.
9. Measurement
9.1 General
9.2 Unit rate for individual items, e.g., Pumps, MCC and level controller are for purposes of payments
only. Piping, headers, valves, accessories, cabling and MCC to measured separately in this
contract only.
9.3 All items must include all accessories fittings as described in the specifications, BOQ and shown
on thedrawings.
9.4 All water supplypumps
Pumps shall be measured by numbers and shall include all items as given in the specifications
and schedule of quantities to provide a complete working system.
Page 34 of 202
9.5 DrainagePumps
Drainage pumps shall be measured by numbers and shall include all items as given in the
specifications and schedule of quantities to provide a complete working system.
9.6 Level controllers &Alarms

Level controllers for each set of pumps shall be measured by number and inclusive of probes,
cabling unto surface box near the pump and shall include all items as given in the specifications
and schedule of quantities to provide a complete working system.
9.7 PipingWork
9.7.1 Suction and delivery headers for each pumping system shall be measured per linear meter of
finished length and shall include all items as given in the schedule of quantities. Painting shall be
included in rate ofheaders.
9.7.2 G.I. pipes between various equipment‘s shall be measured per linear meter of the finished length
and shall include all fittings, flanges, jointing, clamps for fixing to walls or hangers and testing.
Flanges shall include 3 mm thick insertion rubber gasket, nuts, bolts andtesting.
9.7.3 Water Tank, Vibration eliminators, ―Y‖ strainers, butterfly valves, slim non return valves shall be
measured by numbers and shall include all items as given in the schedule of quantities and
specifications.
Section-VIII Specification for Water Treatment Equipments

1. Generalrequirements
1.1 All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to specifications and subject to
the approval of EngineerIncharge.
1.2. All equipment shall be of the best available make manufactured by reputedfirms.
1.3. All equipment shall be installed on suitable foundations, true to level and in a neat workmanlike
manner.
1.4. Equipment shall be so installed as to provide sufficient clearance between the end walls and
between equipment toequipment.
1.5. Piping within the pump house shall be so done as to prevent any obstruction in the movement
within the pumphouse.
1.6. Each pumping set shall be provided with a butterfly valve on the suction and delivery side and a
flap type non return valve on the deliveryside
.1.7. All pump couplings and belt guards for air compressors shall be totally enclosed with 5 mmmesh.
2.0 Corrosion ResistantMaterial

2.1 All piping, valves and accessories from outlet of raw water to inlet of treated water tank shall be of
material fully resistant to internal and external corrosion. Such material may be stainless steel,
PVC, rubber or other type of lining material accepted in international water works engineering
practice.
3. Water filters for watersupply
3.1 Filter shall be designed in accordance with the code of unfired pressure vessel conforming to I.S.
2825.
3.2 Water filter shall be pressure dual media filter may be altered to suite contractor‘s own design of
the most efficientperformance.
3.3 Filters shall be vertical type of required diameter. The shell and dished ends shall be fabricated
from M.S. sheet tank suitable to with stand a working pressure given in Bill of quantities. The
shell shall have a minimum thickness of 6 mm and dished ends 8 mm or as per manufactures
recommendations.
Page 35 of 202
3.4 Each filter shall have at least one pressure tight manhole cover for inspection andrepairs.
3.5 Each filter shall be provided with screwed or flanged connections for inlet, outlet individual drain
connections and all face piping, diaphragm valves and all other connections necessary and
required.
3.6 Face piping shall be G.I. class ‗C‘ as per IS:1239.
4. Chemical DosingPump
4.1 Chemical dosing system comprising of metering pump, 100 lts. Capacity HDPE solution tank with
level gauge and lid ontop.
4.2 Motor driven metering pump with mechanically activated diaphragm with oil lubricatedgear
mechanism. The output of the plug should be adjustable operation from 10-100 %. Pump
construction shall be corrosion resistant polypropylene or similarmaterial.
4.3 Each pump shall be provided with an injector assembly with suction and delivery piping complete
in allrespects.
5. Pipe & Fittings (for Headers andConnections)
5.1 Pump suction and delivery headers shall be of approved corrosion resistant material with
matching fittings. The pipe joints shall be threaded or as per manufacturer‘sinstructions.
5.2 VibrationEliminators
Provide on all suction and delivery lines as shown on the drawings double flanged reinforced
neoprene flexible pipe connectors. Connectors should be suitable for a working pressure of each
pump and tested to the test pressure given in the relevant head. Length of the connectors shall
be as per site requirements in accordance with manufacturerdetails.
5.3 Valves
Valves 50 mm dia and above shall be rubber lined butterfly valves.
Non return valves shall be rubber lines cast iron slim type of approved make.
6. Flowmeasurement
6.1 Provide Rota meter reading "LPH" or "LPM" on delivery line of theplant.
6.2. Provideonedirectreadingflangedtypewatermeterwithstraineronoutletofwatersofteneror waterfilter.
7. Painting and cleanup
a) On completion of the installation contractor shall scrub clean all pumps, piping,filters and
equipment and apply one coat ofprimer.
b) Apply two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved make and shade on steel pipes.
c) Provide painted identification legend and direction arrows on all equipment and piping as directed
by EngineerIncharge.
d) On final completion of the work, contractor shall cleanup the site, filter room of all surplus
materials rubbish and leave the place in a broom-cleancondition.
Page 36 of 202
SectionIX I.S. CODES AND REFERENCESTANDARDS.

A. Codes and reference standards referred to in the contract shall be understood to form a part
of the contract.
B. Alternative reference standards produced by different standards authorities may be specified

in a Section. Standards of any of the specified authorities may be acceptable,
however, materials specified in the Section shall be incorporated in the works from only
one of the specified standards authority to ensure compatibility in the performance of the
materials.
C. The contractor shall be responsible for adherence to reference standard requirements by

subcontractors andsuppliers.
D. Where edition date is not specified, consider that reference to manufacturer's and
published codes, standards and specifications are made to the latest edition (revision or
amendment) approved by the issuing organization current at issue date of theTender.
E. The specified reference standards are INDIAN STANDARD CODES and are intended to
establish the quality of materials and workmanship required for the works. Reference
standards published in other countries may, in the sole judgementof the owner's consultant,
also be acceptable providing that the Contractor furnishes sufficient data for the Owner's
Consultant to determine if the quality of materials and workmanship at least equals or
exceeds all tests prescribed by the specified reference Indian Standardscodes.
Such other reference standards published by the following will be considered;

BSI : British StandardsInstitute
AFNOR : Association Francise deNormalization
(French Standards Institute)
DIN : Deutsche Industries Norman(GermanStandards)
ANSI : American National StandardsInstitute
ASTM : American Society for Testing andMaterials
F. Reference standards and specifications are quoted in the specification to establish minimum
standards. Works of quality or of performance characteristics that exceed these minimum
standards will be considered toconfirm.
Should regulatory requirements or the contract conflict with specified reference standards or
specifications, the more stringent in each case shall govern.
G. Where reference is made to manufacturer's directions, instructions or specifications they

shall include full information on storing, handling, preparing, mixing, installing, erection,
applying or other matters concerning the materials pertinent to their use in the works and
their relationship to materials with which they areincorporated.
H. Obtain copies of codes applying to the Work, manufacturer‘s directions and reference
standards referred to in the contract within 90 days of signing thecontract.
I. Submit a copy of each code, reference standard and specification, and manufacturer's
directions, instructions and specifications, to which reference is made in the
specification to the Owner's AuthorizedRepresentative's.
J. LIST OF CODES (INDIAN STANDARDCODES)
Standards, specifications, associations, and regulatory bodies are generally referred to

throughout the specifications by their abbreviated designations. The materials workmanship
shall be in accordance with the requirement of the appropriate CP, I.S code wherever
applicable together with any building regulations or bye-laws governing the works.
Page 37 of 202
The following list is included for guidance only and the omission of any CP, I.S. codes
from the list does not relieve the contractor from compliancetherewith:
The more important Codes, Standards and Publications applicable to this section are listed
hereinafter:
1. General
SP : 6 (1) Structural SteelSections
IS:27 PigLead
IS:325 Three Phase InductionMotors
IS:554 Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints arerequired
on thethreads.
IS:694 PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto& including1100 V.
IS:779 Specification for water meters (domestictype).
IS:782 Specification for caulking lead
IS:800 Code of practice for general construction insteel
IS:1068 Electroplated coatings of nickel plus chromium and copper plusnickel

pluschromium.
IS:1172 Code of Basic requirements for water supply drainage andsanitation.
IS : 1367(Part1) Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners: Part 1

introduction and generalinformation.

product grades andtolerances.
IS : 1554(Part1) PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 1 forworkingvoltages

upto and including 1100 V.
IS : 1554(Part2) PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 2 forworkingvoltages

from 3.3 KV upto and including 11KV.
IS:1726 Specification for cast iron manhole coversandframes.
IS:1742 Code of practice for buildingdrainage.
IS:2064 Selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliance codeof

practice.
IS:2065 Code of practice for water supply inbuildings.
IS:2104 Specification for water meter for boxes(domestic ype)
IS:2373 Specification for eater meter (bulktype)
IS:2379 Colour code for identification of pipelines.
IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing on ironandSteel.
IS:3114 Code of practice for laying of cast ironpipes
Page 38 of 202
IS : 4111 (Part 1) Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system : Part 1
manholes.
IS:4127 Code of practice for laying glazed stonewarepipes.
IS:4853 Recommended practice for radiographic inspection offusionwelded

butt joints in steelpipes.
IS:5329 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above groundforbuildings.
IS:5455 Cast iron steps formanholes.
IS:6159 Recommended practice for design and fabrication of material, priorto

galvanizing.
IS:7558 Code of practice for domestic hotwaterinstallations.
IS:8321 Glossary of terms applicable to plumbingwork.
IS : 8419 (Part 1) Requirements for water filtration equipment: Part 1 Filtration medium
sand andgravel.
IS : 8419 (Part 2) Requirements for water filtration equipment: Part 2 under drainage
system.
IS:9668 Code of practice for provision and maintenance of water suppliesand

firefighting.
IS:9842 Preformed fibrous pipeinsulation.
IS:9912 Coal tar based coating materials and suitable primersforprotecting

iron and steel pipelines.
IS :10221 Code of practice for coating and wrapping of underground mildsteel

pipelines.
IS :10446 Glossary of terms relating to water supply andsanitation.
IS :11149 RubberGaskets
IS :11790 Code of practice for preparation of butt-welding ends forpipes,valves,

flanges andfittings.
IS : 12183 (Part 1) Code of practice for plumbing in multistoried buildings : Part 1 water
supply.
IS :12251 Code of practice for drainage ofbuildingbasements.
IS:5572 Code of practice for sanitary pipework.
BS :6700 Specification for design, installation, testing andmaintenance of

services supplying water for domestic use within buildings and their
cartilages.
BS :8301 Code of practice for buildingdrainage.
BSEN :274 Sanitary tap were, waste fittings for basins, bidets and baths.General
technicalspecifications.
Page 39 of 202
2. Pipes andFittings
IS:458 Specification for precast concrete pipes (with and without

reinforcement)
IS:651 Salt glazed stone ware pipes andfittings.
IS : 1239(Part1) Mild steel, tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings : Part 1Mild
Steeltubes.
IS : 1239(Part2) Mild Steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings: Part 2Mild
Steel tubular and other wrought steel pipefittings.
IS:1536 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and
sewage.
IS:1537 Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gasand
sewage.IS:1538 Cast Iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas andsewage.
IS:1729 Sand Cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilatingpipes,
fittings andaccessories.
IS:1879 Malleable cast iron pipefittings.
IS:1978 Linepipe
IS:1979 High test linepipe.
IS:2501 Copper tubes for general engineeringpurposes
IS : 2643(Part1) Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part 1 Basic
profile anddimensions.
IS : 2643(Part2) Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part 2

Tolerances.
IS : 2643(Part3) Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part 3 Limitsof
sizes.
IS:3468 Pipenuts.
IS:3589 Seamless or electrically welded steel pipes for water, gasandsewage

(168.3 mm to 2032 mm outsidediameter).
IS:3989 Centrifugally cast (sun) iron spigot and socket soil,waste and
ventilating pipes, fittings andaccessories.
IS:4346 Specifications for washers for use with fittings forwaterservices.
IS:4711 Methods for sampling steel pipes, tubes andfittings.
IS:6392 Steel pipeflanges
IS:6418 Cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering
purposes.
IS:7181 Specification for horizontally cast iron double flanged pipeforwater,

gas andsewage.
Page 40 of 202
3. Valves
IS:778 Specification for copper alloy gage, globe and check valves forwater
workspurposes.
IS:780 Specification for sluice valves for water works purposes (50 mmto 300
mmsize).
IS:1703 Specification copper alloy float valves (horizontal plunger type) for
water supplyfittings.
IS:2906 Specification for sluice valves for water works purposes (350 mmto
1200 mm size)
IS:3950 Specification for surface boxes for sluicevalves.
IS : 5312(Part1) Specificationforswingchecktypereflux(nonreturn)valves:part2 Multi

doorpattern.
IS : 5312(Part2) Specificationforswingchecktypereflux(nonreturn)valves:part2 Multi

doorpattern.
IS : 12992(Part1) Safety relief valves, spring loaded:Design
IS :13095 Butterfly valves for generalpurposes.
4. SanitaryFittings
IS : 771 (Part 1to 3) Specification for glazed fire clay sanitaryappliances.
IS:774 Specification for flushing cistern for water closets and urinals
(other than plasticcistern)
IS:775 Specification for cast iron brackets and supports for washbasins
andsinks
IS:781 Specification for cast copper alloy screw down bib taps andstops
valves for waterservices.
IS:1700 Specification for drinkingfountains.
IS : 2548(Part2) Specification for plastic seats and covers for water closets: Part1
Thermo set seats andcovers.
IS : 2556(Part1) Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (Vitreous china):

Part 1 General requirement.
IS : 2556(Part2) Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreouschina):Part 2

Specific requirements of wash-down waterclosets.

Specific requirements of squattingpans.
IS : 2556(Part4) Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreouschina):part 4

specific requirements of washbasins.
IS : 2556 (Part 6Sec2) Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreouschina):part 6

Specific requirements of urinals, section 2 half stallurinals.
IS : 2556 (Part 6Sec4) Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china):Part
Page 41 of 202
6 specific requirements of urinals, section 4 partition slabs.
IS : 2556 (Part 6 Sec 5) Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part
6 Specific requirements of urinals, section 5 wastefittings.
IS : 2556 (Part 6 Sec 6) Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china) : Part
6 Specific requirements of urinals, section 6 water spreaders for
half stall urinals.
IS : 2556(Part7) Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china):Part

7 Specific requirements of half roundchannels.

Specific requirements of siphoning wash down water closets.
IS : 2556(Part11) Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreouschina):Part

11 Specific requirements for shower rose.

12 Specific requirements of floortraps.

15 Specific requirements of universal waterclosets.
IS:2692 Specification for ferrule for waters services
IS:2717 Glossary of terms relating to vitreous enamelware andceramic

metals systems
IS:2963 Specifications for waste plug and its accessories forsinksand

washbasins.
IS:3311 Specification for waste plug and its accessories for sinksandwash
basins.
IS:5961 Specification for cast iron gratings for drainagepurposes.
IS:6249 Specification for gel-coated glass fiber reinforcedpolyesterresin

bathtubs.
IS:6411 Specification for gel-coated glass fiber reinforcedpolyesterresin

bathtubes.
IS:8931 Specification for copper alloy fancy single taps, combinationtap

assembly and stop valves for waterservices.
IS:9758 Specification for flush valves and fitting for water closets and
urinals.
Page 42 of 202
FIRE FIGHTING WORKS
Section-ISpecial Conditions
1.1 Scope ofwork
1.1.1 The form of Contract shall be according to the "Conditions of Contract". The following clauses
shall be considered as an extension and not in limitation of the obligation of theContractor.
1.1.2 Work under this Contract shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipment and
appliances necessary and required. The Contractor is required to completely furnish all the fire
fighting and other specialised services as described hereinafter and as specified in the Bill of
Quantities and/or shown on the fire fightingdrawings.
1.1.3 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the sanitary installations shall include the
following:-
1. Fire SuppressionWorks
- Fire HydrantSystem
- Fire SprinklerSystem
- Fire Pump &Accessories
- FireExtinguishers
1.4 Services rendered under this section shall be done without any extracharge.
2 Specifications
2.1 Work under this Contract shall be carried out strictly in accordance with specifications attached
with thetender.
2.2 Items not covered under these specifications due to any ambiguity or misprints, or additional
works, the work shall be carried out as per specifications of the latest Central Public Works
Department with upto date amendments as applicable in theContract.
2.3 Works not covered under Para 2.1 and 2.2 shall be carried out as per relevant Codes & Bureau
of Indian Standards and in case of its absence as per British Standard Code ofPractice.
3 Execution ofwork
3.1 The Contractor should visit and examine the site of work and satisfy himself as to the nature of
the existing roads and other means of communication and other details pertaining to the work and
local conditions and facilities for obtaining his own information on all matters affecting the
execution of work. No extra charge made in consequence of any misunderstanding, incorrect
information on any of these points or on ground of insufficient description will beallowed.
3.2 The work shall be carried out in conformity with the Fire fighting drawings and within the
requirements of architectural, HVAC, electrical, structural and other specialisedservices
drawings.
3.3 The Contractor shall cooperate with all trades and agencies working on the site. He shall make
provision for hangers, sleeves, structural openings and other requirements well in advance to
prevent hold up of progress of the construction schedule. All supports to the civil structure shall
be provided with dash fasteners as per approved makeonly.
3.5 On award of the work, Contractor shall submit a schedule of construction in the form of a PERT
chart or BAR chart for approval of the Engineer Incharge/Architect/ Consultant. All dates and
time schedule agreed upon shall be strictly adhered to within the stipulated time of completion/
commissioning along with the specified phasing, ifany.
Page 43 of 202
4 Drawings
4.1 Contract drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction
permits. Any deviations made shall be in conformity with the architectural and other services
drawings.
4.2 Architectural drawings shall take precedence over fire fighting or other services drawings as to all
dimensions.
4.4 Contractor shall verify all dimensions at site and bring to the notice of the Engineer Incharge all
discrepancies or deviations noticed. Decision of the Engineer Incharge shall be final.
4.4 Large size details and manufacturers dimensions for materials to be incorporated shall take
precedence over small scaledrawings.
4.5 Any drawings issued by the Architects/Consultant for the work are the property of the Architects/
Consultant and shall not be lent, reproduced or used on any works other than intended without
the written permission of theArchitects/Consultant.
5 Inspection and testing ofmaterials
5.1 Contractor shall be required, to produce manufacturers test certificate for the particular batch of
materials supplied to him. Contractor may be required to get the material tested from outside
approved laboratory for confirmation of material as per Engineer Incharge/Client instruction as and
when required. The tests carried out shall be as per the relevant Bureau of IndianStandards.
5.2 For examination and testing of materials and works at the site Contractor shall provide all testing
and gauging equipment necessary but not limited to thefollowing:
a) Steeltapes
b) Weighingmachine
c) Plumb bobs, sprit levels,hammer
d) Micrometres
e) Hydraulic
5.3 All such equipment shall be tested for calibration at approved laboratory, if required by the
Engineer Incharge. All testing equipment shall be preferably located in special room meant for the
purpose.
5.4 Samples of all materials shall be got approved by Engineer Inchargeand Client and should be first
make of the approved make list before placing order and the approved samples shall be
deposited with the EngineerIncharge.
6 Metricconversion
6.1 All dimensions and sizes of materials and equipment given in the tender document are
commercial metricsizes.
6.2 Any weights, or sizes given in the tender having changed due to metric conversion, the nearest
equivalent sizes accepted by Indian Standards shall be acceptable without any additionalcost.
7 Reference points
7.1 Contractor shall provide permanent bench marks, flag tops and other reference points and
check that with other agencies to confirm the same reference point for all the proper execution
of work and these shall be preserved till the end of thework.
7.2 All such reference points shall be in relation to the levels and locations, given in the architectural
and fire fightingdrawings.
8 Referencedrawings
8.1 The Contractor shall maintain one set of all drawings issued to him as reference drawings. These
shall not be used on site. All important drawings shall be mounted on boards and placed in racks
indexed. No drawings shall berolled.
Page 44 of 202
8.2 All corrections, deviations and changes made on the site shall be shown on these reference
drawings for final incorporation in the completion drawings to be submitted by the contractor in
fulfillment of the conditions of thiscontract.
8.3. On award of the work the contractor shall be issued four sets of consultant‘s working drawings
stamped ―good for construction‖ by the Engineer Incharge. The consultant‘s drawings shall be the
basis of contractor‘s shop drawings. In addition, the Engineer Inchargeshall also be issue one
copy of the Interior Designer‘s; Electrical & HVAC approved shop drawings relevant to his work
for coordinationpurpose.
8.4 Shop drawings are detailed working drawings which incorporate the contractor's details for
execution of the work and incorporate equipment manufacturer's details and dimensions to
ensure that the same can be installed in the spaceprovided.
8.5 All shop drawings should detailed pipe routing and levels, showing location of other services at
crossings etc., cable runs, route cable trays and all allied works and must be fully co-
ordinated with other services and approved by the Engineer Incharge before execution of the
works. Engineer Incharge shall arrange to issue two copies/prints of services drawings from the
respective contracting agencies. All drawings will be valid only when stamped and issued by
8.6 Shop drawings shall also be furnished for detailed layout of all equipment, foundation, bolting
and vibration elimination details along with information on dead and dynamic load, vibrationetc.
8.7 Six sets of manufacturer's equipment drawings, roughing in and wiring diagrams shall be
submitted.
8.8 Contractor shall submit shop drawings furnishing all details of MCC panels, cable routes, wiring
diagrams and connection details asrequired.
8.9 Three copies of each set of shop drawings shall be submitted for initial scrutiny, discussion and
approval.
8.10 Each submission shall be accompanied by contractor's certificate stating that the shop drawings
meet all the contract requirements and that the piping and equipment can be satisfactorily
installed without any obstructions in the spaceavailable.
8.11 On approval of the above the contractor shall furnish six sets of the approved shop drawings for
execution of thework.
9 Completiondrawings
9.1 On completion of work, Contractor shall submit one complete set of original tracings and three
prints of "as built" drawings to the Engineer Incharge duly approved and stamped by Consultant.
These drawings shall have the followinginformation.
a) Run of all piping, diameters on all floors, vertical stacks and location of externalservices.
b) Ground and invert levels of all drainage pipes together with location of all manholes and
connections uptooutfall.
c) Run of all fire lines with diameters, locations of control valves, accesspanels.
d) Location of all mechanical equipment with layout and piping connections and mechanical
equipment.
All shop drawings shall be updated from time to time for the purpose of making Completion
drawings.
No completion certificate shall be issued unless the above drawings are submitted.
9.2 Contractor shall provide four sets of catalogues, service manuals manufacturer's drawings,
performance data and list of spare parts together with the name and address of the manufacturer
for all electrical and mechanical equipment provided byhim.
Page 45 of 202
9.3 All "warranty cards" given by the manufacturers shall be handed over to the EngineerIncharge.
10. Contractor'srates
10.1 Rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of cost of materials, labour, supervision, erection,
tools, plant, scaffolding, service connections, transport to site, all taxes, octroi and levies,
breakage, wastage and all such expenses as may be necessary and required to completely do all
the items of work and put them in a workingcondition.
10.2 Rates quoted are for all heights and depths and in all positions as may be required for thiswork.
10.3 All rates quoted must be for complete items inclusive of all such accessories, fixtures and fixing
arrangements, nuts, bolts, hangers as are a standard part of the particular item except where
specially mentionedotherwise.
10.4 All rates quoted are inclusive of cutting holes and chases in walls and floors and making good the
same with cement mortar/concrete/water proofing of appropriate mix and strength as directed by
the Engineer Incharge. Contractor shall provide holes, sleeves, recesses in the concrete and
masonry work as the work proceeds. All fire pipes crossing masonry walls and floors shall be
provided with G.I. pipe sleeves. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve shall be filled up
with fire proof sealant after testing. Contractor shall give the pipe sleeves to the civil contractor
well in time so that the same can be fixed along with civil works. Any co-ordination gap shall be
of Fire contractor‘s responsibility.
10.5 The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer Incharge with vouchers & test certificates, to prove
that the materials are as per the specification and to indicate that the rates at which the
materials are purchased are in order to work out the rate analysis of non-tendered items which he
may be called upon to carryout.
11 Testing
11.1 Piping and drainage works shall be tested as specified under the relevant clauses of the
specifications.
11.2 Tests shall be performed in presence of the Engineer Incharge and test records for the tests shall
be duly signed by Fire Consultant, Contractor and the EngineerIncharge.
11.3 All materials and equipment found defective shall be replaced at contractor cost and whole work
shall be tested to meet the requirements of thespecifications.
11.4 Contractor shall perform all such tests as may be necessary and required by the local authorities
to meet municipal or other bye-laws inforce.
11.5 Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment and materials for the performance of the tests at no
extracost.
12 Site clearance andcleanup
12.1 The Contractor shall, from time to time, clear away all debris and excess materials accumulated
at the site. Failing of which attractpenalties:
12.2 After the fixtures, equipment and appliances have been installed and commissioned, Contractor
shall clean-up the same and remove all plaster, paints, stains, stickers and other foreign matter or
discolouration leaving the same in a ready to use condition. The equipment installed shall be
protected by contractor till formal handing over takes place byClient.
12.3 On completion of all works, Contractor shall demolish all stores, remove all surplus materials and
leave the site in a broom clean condition, failing which the same shall be done by the Engineer
Incharge at the Contractor‘s risk and cost. Cost of the cleanup shall be deducted from the
contractor's bills on pro-rata basis in proportion to his contractvalue.
Page 46 of 202
13 Licence permits andauthorities
13.1 Contractor must hold a valid plumbing or any other licence as required by the municipal authority
or other competent authority under whose jurisdiction the workfalls.
13.2 Contractor must keep constant liaison with the local development, municipal/statutory authority
and obtain approval of all drainage, water supply, fire suppression and other works carried out by
him.
13.3 Contractor shall obtain, from the municipal and other authorities 'C' & 'D' forms approval of
drainage and water supply works during execution and the completion certificate with respect to
his work as required for occupation of the building. Contractor shall obtain permanent water
supply and drainage connections from authorities concerned. Employer shall re-imburse the fees
paid to the authorities towards the connection charges a production of receipts for moneypaid.
13.4 Contractor shall get any materials tested from the appropriate authority if so required at no extra
cost.
14 Recovery of cost for materials issued to Contractors free ofcost
14.1 If any materials issued to the Contractor free of cost, are damaged or pilfered, when in his
possession, the cost of the same shall be recovered from the Contractor on the basis of actual
cost to owner. The cost shall include the cost paid, freight, transportation, excise duty, sales tax,
octroi, import duty and other levies, plus 100% as penalty. The decision on the actual cost given
by the Employer shall be final and binding on theContractor.
14.2 Contractor has to keep full records of material issued by the owner with reference and challans
etc. Contractor has to give account of all such materials to the EngineerIncharge.
15 Cutting of Water ProofingMembrane:
No walls terraces shall be cut for making and opening after water proofing has been done without
written approval. Cutting of water proofing membrane shall be done very carefully so as other
portion of water proofing is not damaged. On completion of work at such place the water proofing
membrane shall be made good and ensured that the opening/cutting is made fully water proof as
per specifications and details of water proofing approved by Engineer Incharges. Actual cost of
any damage to finished work by contractor shall be recovered from Fire Contractor.
16 Cutting of structuralmembers
No structural member shall be chased or cut without the written permission of the Engineer
Incharge. Any damage to the structure shall be on contractor‘s account.
17 Materials supplied byemployer
The Contractor shall verify that all materials supplied by the employer conform to the
specifications of the relevant item in the tender. Any discrepancy found shall be brought to the
notice of the Engineer Incharge.
18 Materials
18.1 Contractor to procure material as per first make from approved make list only unless otherwise
specified and expressly approved in writing by the EngineerIncharge/Client.
18.2 If required, the Contractor shall submit samples of materials proposed to be used in the works.
Approved samples shall be kept in the office of the EngineerIncharge.
Section II. Specifications for Fire Hydrant System

1.1 Scope ofwork
1.1.1 Wet riser fire hydrantsystem
1.1.2 Valves, suction and delivery connections andheaders.
Page 47 of 202
1.1.3 Pipe protection, painting, sleeves & minor civil works other than specifically mentioned in the
tender.
1.1.4 Electricalinstallations.
1.1.5 Specialized protection asspecified.
1.1.6 Testing andcommissioning.
1.2. GeneralRequirements
1.2.1 All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to the specifications and subject to the
approval of the EngineerIncharges.
1.2.2 Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat
workmanlikemanner.
1.2.3 Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and
1.2.4 Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls, and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals specified. Only
approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used for RCC ceilings andwalls.
1.2.5 Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located that they are easily accessible for
operations, repairs andmaintenance.
1.3 Pipes
1.3.1 All pipes within and outside the building in exposed locations and shafts including connections
buried under floor shall be M.S. Pipes asfollows:
a. Pipes 150 mm dia and below IS: 1239 HeavyClass
b. Pipe 200 mm dia and above IS 3589 of thicknessspecified.
1.4 PipeFittings.
1.4.1 Pipes and fittings means tees, elbows, couplings, flanges, reducers etc. And all such connecting
devices that are need to complete the piping work in itstotality.
1.4.2 Fabricated fittings shall be not be permitted for pipe diameters 50 mm andbelow.
1.4.3 When used, they shall be fabricated, welded and inspected in workshops under supervision of
Engineer Inchargeswhose welding procedures have been approved by the TAC as per TAC rule
4102 for sprinkler system and applicable to hydrant and sprinkler system. For "T" connections,
pipes shall be drilled and reamed. Cutting by gas or electrical welding will not beaccepted.
1.5 Jointing
1.5.1 Screwed (50 mm dia pipes andbelow)
Joint for black steel pipes and fittings shall be metal-to-metal thread joints. A small amount of red
lead may be used for lubrication and rust prevention. Joints shall not be welded or caulked. (With
screwed M.S. forged fittings).
1.5.2 Welded (65 mm dia andabove)
Joints between M.S. and pipes and fittings shall be made with the pipes and fittings having "V"
groove and welded with electrical resistance welding in an approved manner. Butt-welded joints
are not acceptable. Buried pipes will be subject to x ray test from an approved agency as per the
TAC norms at the cost of contractor. (With welded M.S. fittings heavy class with ―V‖ groove).
Page 48 of 202
1.5.3 Flanges.
Flanged joints shall be provided on:
a) Straight runs not exceeding 30 m on pipelines 80 mm dia andabove.

b) Both ends of any fabricated fittings e.g. bend tees etc. of 65 mm dia or largerdiameter.
b) For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pumps, connections with othertype of
pipes, to water tanks and other places necessary and required as good for engineeringpractice.
d) FlangesshallbeasperI.S:6392-1971Table17/18withappropriatenumberofhalfthreadnuts bolts and
make GKW, 3 mm insertion neoprene gasketcomplete.
1.5.4 Unions
Provide approved type of dismountable unions on pipes lines 65 mm and below in similar places
as specified for flanges.
1.6 Excavation
Excavation for pipe lines shall be in open trenches to levels and grades shown on the drawings or
as required at site. Pipe lines shall be buried to a minimum depth of 1.2 meter or as shown on
drawings.
Wherever required contractor shall support all trenches or adjoining structures with adequate
timber supports.
On completion of testing and pipe protection, trenches shall be refilled with excavated earth in 15
cms layers and consolidated.
Contractor shall dispose off all surplus earth with in a lead of 200m or as directed by Engineer
Incharge.
1.7 Anchor ThrustBlocks
a) Contractor shall provide suitably designed anchor blocks in cement concrete to encounter
excess thrust due to water hammer & highpressure.
b) Thrust blocks shall be provided at all bends & tees & such other location as determined by
c) Exact location, design, size and mix of the concrete block shall be approved by the Engineer
Incharge prior to execution of work.
1.8 Valves
1.8.1 BallValves
a) Valves 50 mm dia& below shall be heavy type nickel plated Brass body screwed type with
chromium plated brass balls, PTFE Teflon seating and gland packing tested to a hydraulic
pressure of 20 kg/sqcm including coupling and gunmetal handle conforming to B.S. 5351
with female screwedends.
b) All valves shall be approved by the Engineer Incharge before they are allowed to be used on
work.
1.8.2 ButterflyValves
2
Butterfly Valves shall be cast iron body and shall be of class P.N 16 tested to 20 kg/cm with
following details :-
a) Disc shall be CI heavy duty electrolyses nickel plated abrasionresistant.
b) The shaft is EN-8 Carbon Steel with low friction nylonbearings.
Page 49 of 202
c) The seat shall be drop tight constructed by bonding resilient electrometer inside a rigid
backing.
d) Built in flanged rubberseals.
e) Actuator to level operated for valves above ground and T Key operated for valves below
ground.
f) Built in flanges for screwed on flanged connections.
Manufacturer‘s details on fixing and installation will befollowed.
1.8.3 Non Return Valves (NRV) dual plate type non return valves PN16
a) Non return valves will be used at location to allow flow only in one direction and prevent flow in
the oppositedirection.
b) Non-return valves shall be wafer type check valve with cast iron body and disk, S. Steel pin and
hinges, nitrite/neoprene seal, suitable for horizontal/vertical line installation conforming to IS:
5312.
1.8.4 Air vessel / Air Cushiontank.
a) Air cushion tank shall beof size and capacity indicated in schedule of quantities. It shall be provided
at the top most point/points and/or in pump house (as specified). The tank shall be complete 25
mm dia. Brass Air Valve (Ball type), Stop Valve (25mm dia), Drain valve (25mm dia) and pressure
gauge including 25mm dia. Mild Steel M.S. pipes and fittings, unions, etc. as required to complete
the work as per siteconditions.
1.8.5 Air Cushion tank shall be measured by numbers and shall include Air Valve, Pressure Gauge,
and Globe Valves for testing and draining, M.S. Clamps, Pipes, Fittings, Tees Elbows Union and
all other items required completing thework.
1.8.6 OrificeFlanges
Provide orifice flanges fabricated from 6 mm thick stainless steel plate to reduce pressure on
2
individual hydrants to restrict the operating pressure to 3.5 kg/cm and allow a discharge of
560lpm.
1.8.7 DrainValve
Provide 25 mm dia black steel pipe to IS: 1239 (heavy class) with 25 mm Ball valve for draining
any water in the system in low pockets.
1.8.8 Inspection & testingassembly
Inspection and testing of the sprinkler system shall be done by providing an assembly consisting
of gunmetal valves, gunmetal sight glass, bye-pass valve. The drain pipe beyond the valve upto
the drainage point shall be measured with the pipe.
1.8.9. Pump testassembly
Provide on the main fire sprinkler header a150mm diabye pass valve locatedinan
accessible manner along with a rate of flow rotometer calibrated in lpm and able to read200
% of the rated pump capacity. The delivery shall be connected to the fire tank.
Page 50 of 202
1.8.10 Pressure Gauge
Pressure gauge shall be provided at pump room area and terrace hydrants only. Pressure gauge
shall be 100 mm dia gunmetal Bourden type with gunmetal isolation cock, tapping and connecting
pipe and nipple. The gauge shall be installed at appropriate level and height for easy readability.
2. Hydrant/valvechambers
2.1 Contractor shall provide suitable brick masonry chambers in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5
coarse sand) on cement concrete foundations 150 mm thick 1:5:10 mix (1 cement: 5 fine sand:
10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) 15 mm thick cement plaster inside and outside
finished with a floating coat of neat cement inside with cast iron surface box approved by fire
brigade including excavation, back fillingcomplete.
2.2 Valve chambers shall be 120 x120 cms. For depths up to 100cms.
3. Fire brigadeconnections
Provide as shown on drawings separate gunmetal 4 way collecting head with four 63 mm
instantaneous type inlets with built in check valves and 150 mm dia outlet connected to the fire
and sprinkler main. Collecting head shall be installed on a stand post and provided with horizontal
C.I. reflux valve and location to be approved by Engineer Incharge. Provide etched gunmetal
label plates with 50mm height letter. The plates should be firmly fixed to the FB connection and
any supportsystem.
4. Firehydrants
4.1 Externalhydrants
a) Contractor shall provide external hydrants. The hydrants shall be single headed gun metal
landing valve with instantaneous type 63 mm dia outlet, controlled by a cast iron butterfly
valve installed in underground lockable chambers. The hydrants shall be conforming to I.S.
5290 with bend, M.S. flanged riser of required height to bring the hydrant to correct level
aboveground.
b) Contractor shall provide for each external fire hydrant station two numbers of 63 mm dia. 15
m long non percolating rubberized fabric lined hose pipes to I.S. 636 Type A with gunmetal
male and female instantaneous type coupling to I.S. 903 riveted and bound with 1.5 mm
copper wire to hose pipe, fire hose reel, gunmetal branch pipe with nozzle I.S.903.
4.2 Internalhydrants
a) Contractor shall provide on each landing and other locations as shown on the drawings one
single headed gunmetal landing valve with 63 mm dia outlet mounted on a common 80 mm
inlet (I.S.5290-1969). Landing valve shall have flanged inlet and instantaneous type outlets
as shown on thedrawings.
b) Instantaneous outlets for fire hydrants shall be of standard pattern approved and suitable for
fire brigadehoses.
c) Contractor shall provide for each internal fire hydrant station two numbers of 63 mm dia. 15 m
long non percolating rubberized fabric lined hose pipes to I.S. 636 Type A with gunmetal
male and female instantaneous type coupling to I.S. 903 riveted and bound with 1.5 mm
copper wire to hose pipe, fire hose reel, gunmetal branch pipe with nozzle I.S.903.
d) Each hose box shall be conspicuously painted with the letters "FIREHOSE".
4.3 Fire hose reels
Contractor shall provide standard fire hose reels with 20 mm dia high pressure Dunlop rubber
hose 36.5 m long with gunmetal nozzle and control valve, shut off valve, all mounted on circular
hose reel of heavy duty mild steel construction and cast iron brackets. Hose reel shall be
connected directly to the wet riser. Hose reel shall conform to IS: 884-1969 and rubber hose to
IS:5132.
Page 51 of 202
4.4 HoseCabinets
a. Provide hose cabinets for all internal fire hydrants. Hose cabinets shall be fabricated from 16
gauge M.S. sheet of fully welded construction with hinged double front door partially glazed with
locking arrangement, stove enameled fire red paint with "FIRE HOSE" written on it
prominently.(Size as given in the Bill of Quantities).
4.5 Pipeprotection
a) All pipes above ground and in exposed locations shall be painted with one coat of zinc
chromate primer and two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of approvedshade.
b) Pipes in chase or buried underground shall be painted with two coats of zinc chromate primer
and wrapped with one layer of 4 mm thick PYPCOTE or equivalent multi-layer sheet as per
standard manufacturer'sspecifications.
4.6 PipeSupports
a) All pipe clamps and supports shall be galvanized steel. When fabricated from M.S. steel
sections, the supports shall be factory galvanized before use at site. Welding of galvanized
clamps and supports will not bepermitted.
b) Pipes shall be hung by means of expandable anchor fastener of approved make and design
(Dash Fasteners or equivalent). The hangers and clamps shall be fastened by means of
galvanized nuts and bolts. The size/diameter of the anchor fastener and the clamp shall be
suitable to carry the weight of water filled pipe and dead load normallyaccounted.
Pipe Spacing Table
<------------------- Pipe commercial dia.----- ---------- ---------- ------
S.No. Pipes & Position 15/20 20/25 32/40 50 75/80 100/110 150/160 200
1 Vertical
1.1 GI /MS 2.4 2.4 3 3.6 4.5 4.5 5.4 5.4
1.2 CI Pipes IS 1729/3989 X x <--------------------- 3 m --------------- ---------- -------
1.3 CI Heavy Duty IS 1536 X x <------------------- 3.6 m-------------- ---------- -------
1.4 uPVC SWR Systems X x 0.5 0.7 0.9 0.9 1.0
1.5 uPVC Water Supply
1.6 Polybutylene <-----As per manufacturer's Recommendations ---------- ---------- -------
1 Horizontal
1.1 GI /MS 2.0 2.0 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.0 4.5 4.5
1.2 CI Pipes IS 1729/3989 <----------------3 m-------------------->
1.3 CI Heavy Duty IS 1536 3.0 3.6 3.6 4.5
1.4 uPVC SWR Systems 1.2 1.8 1.8 1.8
1.5 uPVC Water Supply
1.6 Polybutylene <-As per manufacturer's recommendations---->
Page 52 of 202
4.7 Testing
a. All piping in the system shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 times the working pressure
or 20 kg/sq.cm( whichever is more) without drop in pressure for at-least 2hours.
b. Rectify all leakages, make adjustments and retest as required anddirected.
4.8 Cables
a. Contractor shall provide control cables from supervisory valves and switches to the annunciation
panels.
b. All control cables shall be copper conductor PVC insulated armored and PVC sheathed 1100 volt
grade.
c. All cables shall have stranded conductors. The cables shall be in drums as far as possible and
bear manufacturer'sname.
d. All cable joints shall be made in an approved manner as per standard practice.
Cable Trays
i All cables shall be routed in approved locations in coordination with all other services in a proper
manner.
ii Cable trays shall be of galvanized steel and hung from the ceiling by galvanized rods supported
by appropriate size and type of expandable expansion fasteners drilled into the slabs and walls
by an electricdrill.
4.9. Measurement
a. Mild steel pipes shall be measured per linear meter of the finished length and shall include all
fittings, flanges, and welding, jointing, clamps for fixing to walls or hangers, anchor fasteners,
painting and testing complete in allrespects.
b. Sluice and full way valves, check valves, installation valves, air valves & flow switches shall be
measured by numbers and shall include all items necessary and required for fixing and as
given in the specifications and bill ofquantities.
c. Fire hydrants, hose reels, fire brigade connections, orifice flanges shall be measured by number
and include all items given in the specifications and bill ofquantities.
d. Fire hose and boxes specified shall be measured by number and include all items given in
specifications and Bill ofQuantities.
e. Fire extinguishers shall be measured by number and shall include fullcharge.
f. Cables and cable trays shall be measured per linear meter shall include clamps, hangers, anchor
fasteners complete in all respects.
Section - III Specifications for Fire Sprinkler System

1 Scope ofwork
including scaffolding, M.S. ladders etc. necessary and required to completely install wet riser fire
hydrant and sprinkler system as required by the drawings and specified hereinafter or given in the
Bill ofQuantities.
1.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the work shall include but not limited to the
following:-
a) Piping for Sprinklersystems.
Page 53 of 202
b) Sprinkler heads, sparesprinklers
c) Inspection & test assemblies andaccessories
2. General
2.1 All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to the specifications and subject to the
approval of the EngineerIncharge.
2.2 Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat
workmanlikemanner.
2.4 Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls, and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals specified. Only
approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used for RCC ceilings andwalls.
2.5 Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located that they are easily accessible for operations,
repairs andmaintenance.
3 Pipes
a) All pipes within and outside the building in exposed locations and shafts including
connections buried under floor shall be M.S. pipes asfollows:
b) Pipes 150 mm dia and below IS: 1239 HeavyClass
4 PipeFittings
a) Pipes and fittings means tees, elbows, couplings, flanges, reducers etc. and all Such
connecting devices that are need to complete the piping work in itstotality.
b) Screwed fittings shall be approved type malleable or cast iron fittings suitable for screwed
joints.
c) Forged steel fittings of approved type with "V" groove for weldedjoints.
d) Fabricated fittings shall be not being permitted for pipe diameters 50 mm andbelow.
e) When used, they shall be fabricated, welded and inspected in workshops under
supervision of Engineer Inchargewhose welding procedures have been approved by
the TAC as per TAC rule 4102 for sprinkler system and applicable to hydrant and
sprinkler System. For "T" connections, pipes shall be drilled and reamed. Cutting by gas
or electrical welding will not beaccepted.
5 Jointing
5.1 Screwed (50 mm dia pipes andbelow)
Joint for black steel pipes and fittings shall be metal to metal thread joints. A small amount of red
lead may be used for lubrication and rust prevention. Joints shall not be welded or caulked.
5.2 Welded (65 mm diaandabove)
Joints between M.S. and pipes and fittings shall be made with the pipes and fittings having "V"
groove and welded with electrical resistance welding in an approved manner. Butt welded joints
are not acceptable.
5.3 Flanged
Flanged joints shall be provided on:
a) Straight runs not exceeding 30 m on pipe lines 80 mm dia andabove.
Page 54 of 202
b) Both ends of any fabricated fittings e.g. bends, tees etc. of 65 mm dia or larger
Diameter.
c) For jointing all types of valves, appurtenances, pumps, connections with other Type of
pipes, to water tanks and other places necessary and required as Good for engineering
practice.
d) Flanges shall be as per I.S. with appropriate number of G.I. nuts and bolts, 3 Insertion
neoprene gasketcomplete.
5.4 Unions
Provide approved type of dismountable unions on pipes lines 65 mm and below in similar places
as specified for flanges.
6 Excavation
6.1 Excavation for pipe lines shall be in open trenches to levels and grades shown on the drawings or
as required at site. Pipe lines shall be buried to a minimum depth of 1.2 meter or as shown on
drawings.
6.2 Wherever required contractor shall support all trenches or adjoining structures with adequate
timbersupports.
6.3 On completion of testing and pipe protection, trenches shall be refilled with excavated earth in 15
cms layers andconsolidated.
6.4 Contractor shall dispose of all surplus earth within a lead of 200 m or as directed by Engineer
Incharge.
7 Anchor ThrustBlocks
a) Contractor shall provide suitably designed anchor blocks in cement concrete to encounter
excess thrust due to water hammer & highpressure.
b) Thrust blocks shall be provided at all bends & tees & such otherlocationas determinedby
c) Exact location, design, size and mix of the concrete block shall be approved by the Engineer
Incharge prior to execution of work.
8 Valves
8.1 Cast Iron ButterflyValves
8.1.1 Valves 50 mm dia and above shall be cast iron butterfly valve to be used for isolation. The valves
shall be bubble tight, resilient seated suitable for flow in either direction and seal in both direction
with accompanying flanges and steelhandle.
8.1.2 Butterfly valves shall be of best quality conforming to I.S.13095 of classspecified.
8.3 Non-return valves (CheckValves)
Non-return valves shall be cast iron double flanged with cast iron body and gunmetal internal
parts conforming to IS:5312.
8.4 Airvalves
Provide 25 mm dia screwed inlet cast iron single acting air valve, on all high points in the system
or as shown on drawings.
Page 55 of 202
8.5 OrificeFlanges
Provide orifice flanges fabricated from 6 mm thick stainless steel plate to reduce pressure on
2
individual hydrants to restrict the operating pressure to 3.5 kg/cm and allow a discharge of 560
lpm. The contractor shall submit design of the orifice flanges for approval before installation.
8.6 DrainValve
Provide 50 mm dia black steel pipe to IS: 1239 (heavy class) with 50 mm gunmetal fullway valve
for draining any water in the system in low pockets.
8.7 Inspection & testingassembly
Inspection and testing of the sprinkler system shall be done by providing an assembly consisting
of gunmetal valves, gunmetal sight glass, and bye-pass valve. The drain pipe beyond the valve
upto the drainage point shall be measured with the pipe.
9. Pipeprotection
a) All pipes above ground and in exposed locations shall be painted with one coat of zinc
chromate primer and two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of approvedshade.
b) Pipes in chase or buried underground shall be painted with two coats of zinc chromate primer
and wrapped with one layer of 4 mm thick PYPCOAT multilayer sheet as per standard
manufacturer'sspecifications.
10. PipeSupports
10.1 All pipe clamps and supports shall be galvanized steel. When fabricated from M.S. steel sections,
the supports shall be factory galvanized before use at site. Welding of galvanized clamps and
supports will not bepermitted.
10.2 Pipes shall be hung by means of expandable anchor fastener of approved make and design
(Dash Fasteners or equivalent). The hangers and clamps shall be fastened by means of
galvanized nuts and bolts. The size/diameter of the anchor fastener and the clamp shall be
suitable to carry the weight of water filled pipe and dead load normallyencounter.
12 SprinklerHeads
12.1 Sprinkler heads shall be quartzoid bulb type with gunmetal body fully approved and having
current certification of the fire laboratory of the C.B.R.I. Roorkee, Underwriter's laboratory (UL)
and under the approved certified list of the Fire Office Committee (FOC) of U.K. or NFPA of
USA. Any one of the certification as acceptable to the local fire authorities obtained prior to the
procurement and approved and accepted by the EngineerIncharge.
12.2 Sprinkler heads shall be installed in conformity with approved shop drawings and in co-ordination
with electrical fixtures, ventilation ducts, cable galleries and other services along theceiling.
12.3 Following type of sprinklers shall beused:
S.No. TypeofSprinkler Temp rating

0
C
1. Pendantor upright 68
2. Special applicationquick wall 68
Type with throw suitable for
Room size of 5 m length
(Extended type)
3. Semiconcealedtype 68
(Recessed in rosette)
Page 56 of 202
12.4 Spacing and coverage of sprinkler shall be in accordance with risk classification of area in which
they are installed, design density and TACregulation.
13 SpareSprinklers
a) Provide lockable enamel painted steel cabinet including following type of sparesprinklers
i) Semi concealed type, Pendent or Uprighttype.
b) The cabinet should also contain one pair of wrenches (of each size of the same are
different) for thesprinklers.
c) Spare sprinklers shall be of the same specifications as that of the original sprinklers
specified.
14 Testing
2
14.1 All piping in the system shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 14 kg/cm without drop in
pressure for at least 8hours.
14.2 Rectify all leakages, make adjustments and retest as required anddirected.
15. Measurement
15.1 Mild steel pipes shall be measured per linear meter of the finished length and shall include all
fittings, flanges, and welding, jointing, clamps for fixing to walls or hangers, anchor fasteners,
painting and testing complete in allrespects.
15.2 Butterfly valves, check valves, installation valves, air valves & flow switches shall be measured by
numbers and shall include all items necessary and required for fixing and as given in the
specifications and bill of quantities.
15.3 Fire extinguishers shall be measured by number and shall include fullcharge.
15.4 Spare sprinkler cabinets with spare sprinklers specified and spanners shall be measured as per
actual item given in the specifications and Bill ofQuantities.
15.5 Sprinkler heads shall be measured bynumbers.
SectionIV. Specification for Fire Pumps & AncillaryEquipment

1 Scope ofWork
necessary and required to completely install electrically operated and diesel driven pumps as
required by the drawings and specified hereinafter or given in the schedule ofquantities.
1.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the pumps and ancillary equipment shall
include thefollowing:-
a) Electrically operated and diesel driven pumps with motors, base plates andaccessories.
b) Alarm system with all accessories wiring andconnections
c) Pressure gauges with isolation valves & piping bleed and blockvalves.
d) M.S. pipes, valves, suction strainers, delivery headers &accessories.
e) Foundations, vibration eliminator pads and foundationbolts.
2 GeneralRequirements
i) Pumps shall be installed true to level on suitable concrete foundations. Base plate shall be
firmly fixed by foundation bolts properly grouted in the concretefoundations.
ii) Pumps and motors shall be truly aligned by suitableinstruments.
iii) All pump connections shall be standard flanged type with appropriate number of bolts. In
case of non-standard flanges companion flanges shall be provided with thepumps.
Page 57 of 202
iv) Manufacturer's instructions regarding installation, connections and commissioning shall be

followed with respect to all pumps andaccessories.
a) Contractor shall provide necessary test certificates and performance charts with NPSH
requirement of the pumps from the manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide facilities to the
Engineer Incharge or their authorized representative for inspection of equipment during
manufacturing and also to witness various tests at the manufacturer‘s works without any cost to
theowners.
b) Each pump shall be provided with a 150 mm dia pressure gauge, isolation cock and connecting
piping, bleed and blockvalve.
c) Provide vibration eliminating pad and connectors for eachpump.

d) The Contractor shall submit with this tender a list of recommended spare parts for two years
of normal operation and quote the prices for thesame.
3 Fire & JockeyPumps
3.1 PumpingSets
a) Pumping sets shall be single stage single outlet with cast iron body and bronze dynamically
balanced impellers. Connecting shaft shall be of stainless steel with bronze sleeve and grease
lubricatedbearings.
b) Pumps shall be connected to the drive by means of spacer type love joy couplings which shall be
individually balanced dynamically andstatically.
c) The coupling joining the prime movers with the pump shall be provided with a sheet metalguard.
3.2 Pumps shall be provided with approved type of mechanicalseals.
3.3 Pumps shall be capable of delivering not less than 150% of the rated capacity of water at a head
of not less than 65% of the rated head. The shut off head shall not exceed 120% of the rated
head.
3.4 The pump shall meet the requirements of the Tariff Advisory Committee and the unit shall be
design proven in fire protectionservices.
4 Electricdrive
4.1 Electrically driven pumps shall be provided with totally enclosed fan cooled induction motors. For
fire pumps the motors should be rated not to draw starting current more than 3 times normal
running current.
4.2 Motors for fire protection pumps shall be at least equivalent to the horse power required to drive
the pump at 150% of its rated discharge and shall be designed for continuous full load duty and
shall be design proven in similarservice.
4.3 Motors shall be wound for class B insulation and winding shall be vacuum impregnated with heat
and moisture resistant varnish glass fiberinsulated.
4.4 Motors for fire pumps shall meet all requirements and specifications of the Tariff Advisory
Committee.
4.5 Motors shall be suitable for 415±10% volts, 3 phase 50 cycles a/c supply and shall be designed
for 38 deg C ambient temperature. Motors shall conform to I.S.325.
4.6 Motors shall be designed for two startsystem.
4.7 Motors shall be capable of handling the required starting torque of thepumps.
4.8 Contractor shall provide inbuilt heating arrangements for the motors for main pumps to ensure
that motor windings shall remaindry.
4.9 Speed of the motor shall be compatible with the speed of thepump.
Page 58 of 202
5 VibrationEliminators
Provide on all suction and delivery lines double flanged reinforced neoprene flexible pipe
connectors. Connectors should be suitable for a working pressure of each pump and tested to the
test pressure given in the relevant head. Length of the connector shall be as per manufactures
details.
6 Measurements:
6.1 Fire, sprinkler pumps shall be measured by numbers and shall include all items as given in the
specifications and schedule ofquantities.
6.2 Air vessel, fire alarm, installation valve, sluice valves, non-return valves, vibration eliminators,
flanges and suction strainer shall be measured by numbers and shall include all items as given in
the schedule of quantities andspecifications.
6.3 Pump headers, shall be measured per linear meter and shall include all items given in the
specifications and schedule ofquantities.
Section-V Commissioning andGuarantees

1 Scope ofwork
Work under this section shall consist of pre-commissioning, commissioning, testing and providing
guarantees for all equipment, appliances and accessories supplied and installed by the contractor
under this contract.
2 Generalrequirements:
2.1 The rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of the works given in thissection.
2.2 Contractor shall provide al tools equipment, metering and testing devices required for the
purpose.
2.3 On award of work, contractor shall submit a detailed proposal giving methods of testing and
gauging the performance of the equipment to be supplied and installed under thiscontract.
3 Pre-commissioning
3.1 On completion of the installation of all pumps, piping, valves, pipe connections, and water level
controlling devices, the contractor shall proceed asfollows:-
A Fire protectionsystem:
i) Check all hydrant valves and close if any valve is open. Also check all suction and
delivery connections are properlymade.
ii) Test run and check rotation of each motor and correct the same ifrequired.
B Pipework
i) Check all clamps, supports and hangers provided for thepipes.
ii) Fill up pipes with water and apply hydrostatic pressure to the system as given in the
relevant section of the specifications. If any leakage is found, rectify the same and retest
thepipes.
4 Commissioning &testing
A. Fire hydrantsystem
i) Pressurize the fire hydrant system by running the main Electric Driven fire pump and after
attaining the required pressure shutoff thepump.
Page 59 of 202
ii) Open hydrant valve and allow the water to flow into the fire water tank in order to avoid
wastage of water. The main fire pump should cut-in at the pre-set pressure and should
not cutout automatically on reaching the normal line pressure. The fire pump shouldstop
only by manual pushbutton.
iii) Switch off the main fire pump and test check the diesel engine driven pump in the same
manner as the electrically drivenpump.
iv) When the fire pumps have been checked for satisfactory working on automatic controls,
open five hydrant valves simultaneously and allow the hose pipes to discharge water into
the fire tank to avoid wastage. The electrically driven pump should run continuously for
eight hours so that its performance can bechecked.
v) Check each landing valve, male and female couplings and branch pipes for compatibility
with each other. Any fitting which is found to be incompatible and does not fit into the
other properly shall be replaced by the contractor. Landing valves shall also be checked
by opening and closing underpressure.
B. Handingover
1) All commissioning and testing shall be done by the contractor to the complete satisfaction of the
Engineer Incharge, and the job handed over to the Engineer Incharge, or his authorized
representative.
2) Contractor shall also hand over, to the Engineer Incharge, all maintenance & operation manuals
and all other items as per the terms of thecontract.
C. Guarantees
1) The contractor shall submit a warranty for all equipment, materials and accessories supplied by
him against manufacturing defects, malfunctioning or under capacityfunctioning.
2) The form of warranty shall be as approved by the EngineerIncharge.
3) The warranty shall be valid for a period of one year from the date of commissioning and handing
over.
4) The warranty shall expressly include replacement of all defective or under capacity equipment.
Engineer Incharge may allow repair of certain equipment if the same is found to meet the
requirement for efficient functioning of thesystem.
5) The warranty shall include replacement of any equipment found to have capacity lesser that the
rated capacity as accepted in the contract. The replacement equipment shall be approved by the
EngineerIncharge.
Section VI: Specification for Electrical Installations

1 Scope
The scope of this section comprises of fabrication, supply, erection, testing and commissioning
of electric control panels, wiring and Earthingof all air conditioning equipment, components and
accessories, including supply, installation and wiring of remote control-cum-indicating
lightpanel.
2 General
Work shall be carried out in accordance with the Specifications, Local Rules, Indian Electricity
Act 1910 as amended upto date, and rules issued there under, Regulations of the Fire Insurance
Company and relevant BIS Code ofPractice.
Page 60 of 202
3 WiringSystem
All power wiring shall be carried out with1100 volts grade PVC insulated, armored, overall PVC
sheathed aluminum conductor cables for sizes above 6 sqmm. Sizes 6 sqmm and below the
power wiring shall be of copper conductor only. Cables shall be sized by applying proper
derating factor. All control wiring shall be carried out by using 650 volts PVC insulated copper
conductor wires in race ways or in conduit. Minimum size of control wiring shall be 1.5 sqmm
PVC insulated copper conductor wires. Minimum size of conductor for power wiring shall be 4
sqmm1100 volts grade PVC insulated copper conductor wires inconduit.
4 ConstructionFeatures
The control panel shall be metal enclosed sheet steel cubicle, indoor type, dead front, floor
mounting / wall mounting type. The control panel shall be totally enclosed, and vermin proof.
Gaskets between all adjacent units and beneath all covers shall be provided to render the joints
dust proof. Control panels shall be arranged in multi-tier formation. All doors and covers shall be
suitable for double padlocking .All mild steel sheets used in the construction of control panels
shall be 14 SWG thick for floor mounted and 16 SWG for wall mounting and shall be folded and
braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for all components. Joints of any kind in sheet
metal shall be seam welded, all welding slag grounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with
Plumber metal.
All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and square with the frame and holes in the panel
correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes tapped into an adequate thickness of
metal or provided with hank nuts. Self-threading screws shall not be used in the construction of
control panels. Base channel of 75 mm x 75 mm x 5 mm thick shall be provided at the bottom.
Minimum clear space of 300 mm between the floor of control panel and bottom most unit
(MCB or Bus Bar) shall be provided.
The control panels shall be of adequate size with a provision of 25% spare space to
accommodate possible future additional switch gear. Knockout holes of appropriate size and
number shall be provided in the control panels in conformity with the location of incoming and
outgoing conduits/cables. All equipment such as meters and indicating lamps etc. shall be
located adjacent to the unit with which it is associated and care shall be taken to achieve a neat
and symmetrical arrangement. Facility shall be provided for termination of cables from top of the
control panel. Clamps shall be provided to support the weight of the cables. All power wiring
inside the control panel shall be Colour coded and control wiring ferruled for easy identification.
Circuit diagram showing the arrangement of circuits shall be pasted on the inside of panel door
and covered with transparent plastic sheet and all labeling shall be provided in engraved
anodized aluminum /Bakelite strips on the front face of the panelboard.
5 CircuitCompartment
Each circuit breaker, contactor and relay shall be housed in a separate compartment and shall
have steel sheets on top and bottom of compartment. Sheet steel hinged lockable door shall be
duly interlocked with the breaker in the ÒN' position. Safety interlocks shall be provided to
prevent the breaker or contactor from being drawn out when the breaker is in ÒN' position. The
door shall not form an integral part of the draw out portion of the panel. Sheet steel barriers
shall be provided between the tiers in a vertical section.
6 InstrumentAccommodation
Adequate space shall be provided for accommodating instruments, indicating lamps, control
contactors and control fuses etc. These shall be accessible for testing and maintenance without
any danger of accidental contact with live parts of the circuit breaker and bus bar.
7 Bus Bars and Bus BarConnections
The bus bar and interconnections shall be of aluminum and of rectangular cross sections
suitable for full load current for phase bus bars, and half rated current for neutral bus bar and
shall be extensible on either side. The bus bars and interconnections shall be insulated with
PVC sleeve / tapes and shall be color coded. Alternatively special insulating paints / materials
may be used for thepurpose.
Page 61 of 202
All bus bars shall be supported on unbreakable, non-hygroscopic insulated supports at regular
intervals, to withstand the forces arising in case of short circuit in the system. All bus bars shall
be provided in separate chamber and properly ventilated. All bus bars connections, in main
control panels shall be done by drilling holes with cadmium plated / hot dipped galvanized bolts,
nuts andwashers.
All bus bars connections in smaller control panels shall be done by drilling hole and connecting
by brass bolts and nuts.
All connections between the bus bar and breaker and between breaker and contactor shall be
through copper strips of proper size to carry rated current and shall be insulated with PVC
sleeves.
8 Raceways
A horizontal race way with screwed covers shall be provided at the top to take interconnecting
control wiring between different vertical sections.
9 Cablecompartments
Cable compartment of adequate size shall be provided in the control panels for easy termination
of all incoming and outgoing cables entering from bottom or top. Adequate and proper supports
shall be provided in cable compartments to support cables.
10 Indications
1. ÒN' lamps shall be provided on all outgoingfeeders.
2. Cable alley and bus chamber shall be identified on allpanels.
11 Rubber Mat
Rubber mat of ISI marked thickness not less than 12 mm shall be provided to cover the full
length of front of all panels and rear of panels where back space shall be available for working
from therear.
12 Materials
All materials shall be of the best quality complying with the BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards)
specifications. Materials used shall be subject to the approval of the Owner's site representative
and samples of the same shall be furnished where required.
a. MouldedCase CircuitBreaker
MCCB shall comprise of switching mechanism, contact system, are extinguishing device and the
tripping unit, Contained in a Compact, high strength, heat resistant, flame retardant, insulating
Moulded case with high withstand capability against thermal and mechanical stress.
Switching mechanism shall be of Quick Make- Quick Break type and the trip command shall
override all other commands. MCCB shall employ maintenance free contact system to minimize
the let thru energies while handling abnormal currents.
The handle position shall give positive indication of ÒN' ÒFF' or tripped.
MCCB shall conform to IS- 2516 (Part I & II/Sec.1) 1985.
b. Miniature CircuitBreaker
Miniature circuit breakers shall be quick make and break type, and shall conform to Relevant
Indian Standards. The housing shall be heat resistant and having high impact strength. The fault
current shall not be less than 10 KA at 230 V and shall be BIS approved. MCBs shall be flush
mounted and shall be provided with trip free manual operating liver and ÒN" and OFF"
indications. The contacts shall be provided to quench the arc immediately. MCB shall be
providedwithmagneticthermalreleasesforovercurrentandshortcircuitprotection.Theover
Page 62 of 202
load or short circuit device shall have a common trip bar in the case of D P, TP and TPN
miniature circuit breakers.
c. RotarySwitches
Switches upto 60 amps shall be rotary type with compact and robust construction, built up from
one or more stacks with contacts and a positioning mechanism with stop as required. Rotary
switches shall have HRC fuse fittings of appropriate rating.
d Selector Switch
Where called for, selector switches of rated capacity shall be provided in control panels, to give
the choice of operating equipment in selective mode.
e. Starters
Each motor shall be provided with a starter of suitable rating. Starters shall be in accordance
with relevant BIS Codes. All Star Delta and ATS Starters shall be fullyautomatic.
Starter‘s contactors shall have 3 main and 2 Nos. NO / NC auxiliary contacts and shall be air
break type suitable for making and breaking contact at minimum power factor of 0.35. For
design consideration of contactors the starting current of connected motor shall be assumed to
be 6 times the full load current of the motor incaseof direct-on-line starters and 3 times the full
load current of the motor in case of Star Delta / Reduced Voltage Starters. The insulation for
contactor coils shall be of class "B".
Operating coils of contactors shall be suitable for 230 / 415 +10% and (-) 15% volts AC, 50
cycles supply system. The contactors shall drop out when voltage drops to 90% of the rated
voltage. The housing of the contactors shall be heat resistant and having high impact strength.
Each starter shall have thermal overload protection on all threephases.
f. Over LoadRelays
Contactors shall be provided with a three element, positive acting ambient temperature
compensated time lagged hand-reset type thermal over load relays with adjustable setting.
Hand-reset button shall be flush with the front door for resetting with starter compartment door
closed. Relays shall be directly connected for motors upto 35 HP capacity. C.T operated relays
shall be provided for motors above 35 HP capacities. Heater circuit contactors may not be
provided with overload relays.
g. CurrentTransformers
Current transformers shall be of accuracy class I and suitable VA burden for operation of the
connected meters and relays. These shall be resin bonded and epoxy coated.
h. Single Phase Preventor
Single phase preventor (current base) shall be provided as per Bill of Quantities and shall be in
conformity with relevant BIS Standards. Single phase preventorshall act when the supply voltage
drops down to 90% of the rated voltage or on failure of one or morephases.
i. Time Delay Relays
Time delay relays shall be adjustable type with time delay adjustment from 0-180 seconds and
shall have one set of auxiliary contacts for indicating lamp connections.
j. Indicating Led (22 mm dia) andMetering
All meters and indicating lamps shall be in accordance with BS 37 and BS 39. The meters shall
be flush mounted and draw out type. The indicating lamp shall be of LED type. Each main panel
shall be provided with voltmeter 0-500 volts with three way and off selector switch, CT operated
ammeter of suitable range with three Nos. CTs of suitable ratio with three way and off selector
switch, phase indicating lamps, and other indicating lamps as called for. Each phase
indicating lamp shall be backed up with 5 amps fuse. Other indicating lamps shall be backed up
with fuses as called for.
Page 63 of 202
k. ToggleSwitch
Toggle switches, where called for, shall be in conformity with relevant BIS Codes and shall be of
5 amps rating.
l. Push ButtonStations
Push button stations shall be provided for manual starting and stopping of motors/equipment as
called for Green and Red Colourpush buttons shall be provided for `Starting' and `Stopping'
operations. `Start' or `Stop' indicating flaps shall be provided for push buttons. Push buttons
shall be suitable for panel mounting and accessible from front without opening door, Lock lever
shall be provided for `Stop' push buttons. The push button contacts shall be suitable for 6 amps
current capacity.
m. Conduits
Conduits shall be of mild steel and shall be hard drawn, stove enameled inside and outside with
minimum wall thickness of 1.6 mm for conduits upto 20 mm diameter and 2 mm wall thickness
for conduits above 20 mm diameter. GI pull wires shall be installed in the conduit while laying
theconduit.
n. Cables
M.V.cables shall be PVC insulated aluminium conductor and armored cables conforming to BIS
Codes. Cables shall be armored and suitable for laying in trenches, duct, and on cable trays as
required. M.V Cables shall be termite resistant. Control cables and indicating panel cables shall
be multi core PVC insulated copper conductor and armored cables.
o. Wires
1100 volts grade PVC insulated copper conductor wires in conduit shall be used.
13 CableLaying
Cable shall be laid generally in accordance with BIS Code of Practice. Cables shall be laid on 14
gauge perforated MS sheet cable trays, and cable drops / risers shall be fixed to ladder type
cable trays fabricated out of steel angle. Access to all cables shall be provided to allow cable
withdrawl/ replacement in the future. Where more than one cable is running, proper spacing shall
be provided to minimize the loss in current carrying capacity. Cables shall be suitably supported
with Galvanized saddles when run on walls / trays. When buried, they shall be laid in 350 mm
wide and 750 mm deep trench and shall be covered with 250 mm thick layer of soft sifted sand &
protected with bricks, tiles. Special care shall be taken to ensure that the cables are not
damaged at bends. The radius of bend of the cables when installed shall not be less than 12
times the diameter of cable. 1.1 KV cable shall be buried 600 mm below ground level.
14 WireSizes
For all single phase / 3 phase wiring, 1100 volts grade PVC insulated copper conductor wires
shall be used. The equipment inside plant room and AHU room shall be connected to the control
panel by means of insulated aluminium conductor wires of adequate size. An isolator shall be
provided near each motor / equipment wherever the motor/equipment is separated from the
supply panel through a partition barrier or through ceiling construction. PVC insulated single
strand aluminium conductor wires shall be used inside the control panel for connecting different
components and all the wires inside the control panel shall be neatly dressed and plastic beads
shall be provided at both the ends for easy identification in control wiring.
. The minimum size of control wiring shall be 1.5 Sq.m PVC insulated stranded soft drawncopper
conductor wires drawn through conduit to be provided for connecting equipment and control
panels.
Page 64 of 202
Power wiring cabling shall be of the following sizes:
MOTOR - SELECTION OF CABLE AND SWITCHGEAR
Motor Starter Full Load Al Cable 3 Core Contactor Overload Earthing (2

Type Current Rating AC3 Relay with nos.)
(Amp) (Amp) SPP (Amps)
(HP) (KW) Line Pha Supply Motor
se side side
1 0.7 DOL 2 2 2.5 2.5 16 1.8 – 2.7 8 SWG GI
sq.mm sq.mm Wire
2 1.5 DOL 3.5 3.5 2.5 2.5 16 3-5 8 SWG GI
sq.mm sq.mm Wire
3 2.2 DOL 5 5 2.5 2.5 16 4-6 8 SWG GI
sq.mm sq.mm Wire
5 3.7 DOL 7.5 7.5 2.5 2.5 16 6 - 10 8 SWG GI
sq.mm sq.mm Wire
7.5 5.6 DOL 11 11 4 sq.mm 4 sq.mm 16 10 - 16 8 SWG GI
Wire
10 7.5 DOL 14 14 4 sq.mm 4 sq.mm 25 10 - 16 8 SWG GI
Wire
12.5 9.3 Star 18 10.4 6 sq.mm 4 sq.mm 25 9 - 15 8 SWG GI
Delta Wire
15 11. Star 21 12.1 6 sq.mm 4 sq.mm 25 9 - 15 8 SWG GI
2 Delta Wire
20 14. Star 28 16.1 10 6 sq.mm 32 14 - 23 8 SWG GI
9 Delta sq.mm Wire
25 18. Star 35 20.2 16 6 sq.mm 32 14 - 23 8 SWG GI
6 Delta sq.mm Wire
30 22. Star 40 23 16 10 40 20 - 33 8 SWG GI
4 Delta sq.mm sq.mm Wire
35 26. Star 47 26.9 25 10 40 20 - 33 8 SWG GI
40 29. Star 55 30.4 25 16 40 28 - 42 6 SWG GI
50 37. Star 66 38.1 35 16 40 30 - 50 6 SWG GI
60 44. Star 80 46.2 50 25 70 30 - 50 6 SWG GI
75 55. Star 100 57.7 70 35 110 45 - 75 6 SWG GI
90 67. Star 120 69.2 95 50 110 60 - 100 25mm x 3mm GI
1 Delta sq.mm sq.mm Tape
100 74. Star 135 77.9 95 50 110 60 - 100 (CT 25mm x 3mm GI
6 Delta sq.mm sq.mm Optd) Tape
125 93. Star 165 95.3 120 70 200 90 - 150 (CT 25mm x 3mm GI
2 Delta sq.mm sq.mm Optd) Tape
150 111. Star 200 115. 185 70 200 90 - 150 (CT 25mm x 3mm GI
9 Delta 5 sq.mm sq.mm Optd) Tape
The earthing connections shall be tapped off from the main earthing of electrical installation. The
overlapping in earthing strips at joints where required shall be minimum 75 mm. These straight joints shall
be riveted with brass rivets & brazed in approved manner. Sweated lugs of adequate capacity and size
shall be used for all termination of wires. Lugs shall be bolted to the equipment body to be earthed after
the metal body is cleaned of paint and other oily substance, and properly tinned.
Page 65 of 202
15 Drawings
Shop drawings for control panels and wiring of equipment showing the route of conduit/cable
shall be submitted by the contractor for approval of Engineer Incharges/ Consultant before
starting the fabrication of panel and starting the work. On completion, four sets of complete "As-
installed" drawings incorporating all details like, conduits routes, number of wires in conduit,
location of panels, switches, junction/pull boxes and cables route etc. shall be furnished by the
Contractor.
16 Testing
Before commissioning of the equipment, the entire electrical installation shall be tested in
accordance with relevant BIS Codes and test report furnished by a qualified and authorised
person. The entire electrical installation shall be got approved by Electrical Inspector and a
certificate from Electrical Inspector shall be submitted. All tests shall be carried out in the
presence of Supervisor.
17 Painting
All sheet steel work shall undergo a process of degreasing, thorough cleaning, and painting with
a high corrosion resistant primer. All panels shall then be backed in an oven. The finishing
treatment shall be by application of synthetic enamel paint of approvedshade.
18 Labels andTags
Engraved PVC labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeders‘ switches. Circuit
diagram showing the arrangements of the circuit inside the control panel shall be pasted on
inside of the panel and covered with transparent plastic sheet. All cables terminations at panels
and at equipments shall be provided with tags as approved by Engineer Incharges.
19 All panels to have provision for padlocking and all MCCB's/MCB's to have provision for locking in
offposition.
20 Measurement of Electrical ControlPanels
Panels shall be counted as number of units. Quoted rates shall include as lump sum (NOT
measurable lengths) for all internal wiring, power wiring and Earthing connections from the
control panel to the starter and to the motor, control wiring for inter-locking, power and control
wiring for automatic and safety controls, and control wiring for remote start/stop as well as
indication as per the specifications. The quoted rate for panel shall also include all accessories,
switchgear fuses, contactors, indicating meters and lights as per the specifications.
Section-VII Specification for HandAppliances

1 Scope ofwork
1.1 Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour, material, appliances and equipment
necessary and required to install fire extinguishing handappliances.
1.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the work shall consist of thefollowing:-
Installation of fully charged and tested fire extinguishing hand appliances CO 2, foam, dry
chemical powder type as required by these specifications anddrawings.
2.1 Fire extinguishers shall conform to the following Indian Standard Specifications and shall be with
ISI approved stamp as revised and amended up todate:-
a) CO2type I.S.2878
b) Drypowdertype I.S.13849
(Storedpressure)
Page 66 of 202
2.2 Fire extinguishers shall be installed as per Indian Standard "Code of Practice for Selection,
Installation and Maintenance of Portable First Aid Appliances"I.S.2190-1962.
2.3 Hand appliances shall be installed in readily accessible locations with the appliance brackets
fixed to wall by suitable anchorfasteners.
2.4 Each appliance shall be provided withan inspection card indicating the date ofinspection,
testing, change of charge and other relevantdata.
2.5 All appliances shall be fixed in a true workmanlike manner truly vertical and at correctlocations.
3 Measurement
Fire extinguishers shall be measured by numbersandinclude installation and allitems

necessary and required and given in thespecifications.
Section -VIII I.S. CODES AND REFERENCE STANDARDS.

A. Codes and reference standards referred to in the contract shall be understood to form a part
of the contract.
B. Alternative reference standards produced by different standards authorities may be specified

in a Section. Standards of any of the specified authorities may be acceptable,
however, materials specified in the Section shall be incorporated in the works from only
one of the specified standards authority to ensure compatibility in the performance of the
materials.
C. The contractor shall be responsible for adherence to reference standard requirements by

subcontractors andsuppliers.
D. Where edition date is not specified, consider that reference to manufacturer's and
published codes, standards and specifications are made to the latest edition (revision or
amendment) approved by the issuing organization current at issue date of theTender.
E. The specified reference standards are INDIAN STANDARD CODES and are intended to
establish the quality of materials and workmanship required for the works. Reference
standards published in other countries may, in the sole judgementof the owner's consultant,
also be acceptable providing that the Contractor furnishes sufficient data for the Owner's
Consultant to determine if the quality of materials and workmanship at least equals or
exceeds all tests prescribed by the specified reference Indian Standardscodes.
Such other reference standards published by the following will be considered;
BSI : British StandardsInstitute
AFNOR : Association Francise deNormalization
(French Standards Institute)
DIN : Deutsche Industries Norman(GermanStandards)
ANSI : American National StandardsInstitute
ASTM : American Society for Testing andMaterials
F. Reference standards and specifications are quoted in the specification to establish minimum
standards. Works of quality or of performance characteristics that exceed these minimum
standards will be considered toconfirm.
Should regulatory requirements or the contract conflict with specified reference standards or
specifications, the more stringent in each case shall govern.
Page 67 of 202
G. Where reference is made to manufacturer's directions, instructions or specifications they

shall include full information on storing, handling, preparing, mixing, installing, erection,
applying or other matters concerning the materials pertinent to their use in the works and
their relationship to materials with which they areincorporated.
H. Obtain copies of codes applying to the Work, manufacturer‘s directions and reference
standards referred to in the contract within 90 days of signing thecontract.
I. Submit a copy of each code, reference standard and specification, and manufacturer's
directions, instructions and specifications, to which reference is made in the
specification to the Owner's AuthorizedRepresentative's.
J. LIST OF CODES (INDIAN STANDARDCODES)
Standards, specifications, associations, and regulatory bodies are generally referred to

throughout the specifications by their abbreviated designations. The materials workmanship
shall be in accordance with the requirement of the appropriate CP, I.S code wherever
applicable together with any building regulations or bye-laws governing the works.
The following list is included for guidance only and the omission of any CP, I.S. codes
from the list does not relieve the contractor from compliancetherewith:
The more important Codes, Standards and Publications applicable to this section are listed
hereinafter:
1. General
SP : 6 (1) Structural SteelSections
IS:27 PigLead
IS:325 Three Phase InductionMotors
IS:554 Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints arerequired
on thethreads.
IS:694 PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto& including1100 V.
IS:779 Specification for water meters (domestictype).
IS:782 Specification for caulking lead
IS:800 Code of practice for general construction insteel
IS:1068 Electroplated coatings of nickel plus chromium and copper plusnickel

pluschromium.
IS:1172 Code of Basic requirements for water supply drainage andsanitation.

introduction and generalinformation.

product grades andtolerances.
IS : 1554(Part1) PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 1 for working
voltages upto and including 1100 V.
IS : 1554(Part2) PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 2 for working
voltages from 3.3 KV upto and including 11KV.
IS:1726 Specification for cast iron manhole covers andframes.
Page 68 of 202
IS:1742 Code of practice for buildingdrainage.
IS:2064 Selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliance codeof

practice.
IS:2065 Code of practice for water supply inbuildings.
IS:2104 Specification for water meter for boxes(domestictype)
IS:2373 Specification for eater meter (bulktype)
IS:2379 Colour code for identification of pipelines.
IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing on ironandSteel.
IS:3114 Code of practice for laying of cast ironpipes
IS : 4111(Part1) Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system : Part1

manholes.
IS:4127 Code of practice for laying glazed stonewarepipes.

IS:4853 Recommended practice for radiographic inspection of fusionwelded
butt joints in steelpipes.
IS:5329 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above groundforbuildings.
IS:5455 Cast iron steps formanholes.
IS:6159 Recommended practice for design and fabrication of material,priorto

galvanizing.
IS:7558 Code of practice for domestic hotwaterinstallations.
IS:8321 Glossary of terms applicable to plumbingwork.
IS : 8419(Part1) Requirements for water filtration equipment: Part 1 Filtrationmedium

sand andgravel.
IS : 8419(Part2) Requirements for water filtration equipment: Part 2underdrainage

system.
IS:9668 Code of practice for provision and maintenance of watersuppliesand

firefighting.
IS:9842 Preformed fibrous pipeinsulation.
IS:9912 Coal tar based coating materials and suitable primers forprotecting
iron and steel pipelines.
IS :10221 Code of practice for coating and wrapping of underground mildsteel

pipelines.
IS :10446 Glossary of terms relating to water supplyandsanitation.
IS :11790 Code of practice for preparation of butt-welding ends for pipes,

valves, flanges andfittings.
Page 69 of 202
IS : 12183(Part1) Code of practice for plumbing in multistoried buildings : Part 1water

supply.
IS :12251 Code of practice for drainage ofbuildingbasements.
IS:5572 Code of practice for sanitary pipework.
BS :6700 Specification for design, installation, testing and maintenance of

services supplying water for domestic use within buildings and their
cartilages.
BS :8301 Code of practice for buildingdrainage.
BSEN :274 Sanitary tap were, waste fittings for basins, bidets andbaths.General
technicalspecifications.
2. Pipes andFittings
IS:458 Specification for precast concrete pipes (with and without

reinforcement)
IS:651 Salt glazed stone ware pipes andfittings.
IS : 1239(Part1) Mild steel, tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings : Part 1Mild
Steeltubes.
IS : 1239(Part2) Mild Steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings: Part 2Mild
Steel tubular and other wrought steel pipefittings.
IS:1536 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and
sewage.
IS:1537 Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gasand

sewage.IS:1538 Cast Iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas andsewage.
IS:1729 Sand Cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste andventilatingpipes,
fittings andaccessories.
IS:1879 Malleable cast iron pipefittings.
IS:1978 Linepipe
IS:1979 High test linepipe.
IS:2501 Copper tubes for general engineeringpurposes
IS : 2643(Part1) Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part1Basic

profile anddimensions.
IS : 2643(Part2) Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part 2

Tolerances.
IS : 2643(Part3) Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part 3 Limitsof
sizes.
IS:3468 Pipenuts.
IS:3589 Seamless or electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and
sewage (168.3 mm to 2032 mm outsidediameter).
IS:3989 Centrifugally cast (sun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and
Page 70 of 202
IS:6418 Cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges forgeneralengineering

purposes.
IS:7181 Specification for horizontally cast iron double flanged pipe forwater,
gas andsewage.
3. Valves
IS:778 Specification for copper alloy gage, globe and check valves forwater
workspurposes.
300 mmsize).
IS:1703 Specification copper alloy float valves (horizontal plunger type)for

water supplyfittings.
1200 mm size)
IS:3950 Specification for surface boxes for sluicevalves.
IS : 5312(Part1) Specification for swing check type reflux (non return) valves : part2
Multi doorpattern.
IS : 5312(Part2) Specification for swing check type reflux (non return) valves : part2
Multi doorpattern.
IS : 12992(Part1) Safety relief valves, spring loaded:Design
IS :13095 Butterfly valves for generalpurposes.
4. Pumps & Vessels
IS:1520 Specification for horizontal centrifugal pumps for clear coldfresh

water.
IS:2002 Steel plates for pressure vessels for intermediate and high
temperature service includingboilers.
IS:2825 Code for unfired pressure vessels.
IS : 4648(Part1) Code of practice for lining of vessels and equipment forchemical

processes Part 1 : Rubberlining.
IS:5600 Specification for sewage and drainagepumps
IS:8034 Specification for submersible pump sets for clear, cold, fresh
water.
IS:8418 Specification for horizontal centrifugal self primingpumps.
Page 71 of 202
5 Fire FightingEquipment
SP:7 Amendment No. III to NBC Part-IV Fire Protection Jan1997
TAC Tariff Advisory Committee fire protection manualPart-I.
TAC Rules of Tariff Advisory Committee forautomatic sprinkler

system.
NFPA : 12,1993 Standards on Carbon DioxideExtinguishingSystem
IS:636 Non-percolating flexible fire fighting deliveryhose.
IS:884 Specification for first aid hose reel for firefighting.
IS:901 Specification for couplings, double male and double female,

instantaneous pattern for firefighting.
IS:902 Suction hose couplings for fire fightingpurposes.
IS:903 Specification for fire hose delivery couplings, branch pipe,

nozzles and nozzlespanner.
IS:904 Specification for 2-way and 3-way suction collecting heads for fire
fightingpurposes.
IS:907 Specification for suction strainers, cylindrical type for firefighting

purposes.
IS:908 Specification for fire hydrant, stand post type.
IS:909 Specification for underground fire hydrant, sluice valvetype.
IS:910 Specification for portable chemical foam fireextinguisher.
IS: 933 Specification for portable chemical foam fireextinguisher.
IS:1648 Code of practice for fire safety of building (general) : Firefighting

equipment and itsmaintenance.
IS:2171 Specification for portable fire extinguishers dry powder(cartridge

type)
IS:2190 Selection, installation and maintenance of first aid fire

extinguishers – Code ofpractice.
IS:2871 Specification for branch pipe, universal, for fire fightingpurposes.
IS:2878 Specification for fire extinguishers, carbon dioxide type(portable

and trolleymounted).
IS:3844 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of internalfire

hydrants and hose reel onpremises.
IS:5290 Specification for landingvalves.
IS 5714 Specification for coupling, branch pipe, nozzle, used in hosereel

tubing for firefighting.
IS:8423 Specification for controlled percolation type hose for firefighting.
Page 72 of 202
IS :10658 Specification for higher capacity dry powder fire extinguisher

(trolleymounted).
IS :11460 Code of practice for fire safety of libraries and archivesbuildings.
IS:1309 External hydrant systems – Provision and maintenance –Codeof

practice.
IS : 5514 (Parts 1to 7) Reciprocating internal combustion engines :Performance.
IS:3589 Seamless or electrically welded steel pipes for water, gasand

sewage (168.3 mm to 2032 mm outsidediameter).
IS:3989 Centrifugally cast (sun) iron spigot and socket soil,wasteand

IS:6418 Cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for generalengineering
purposes.
IS:7181 Specification for horizontally cast iron double flangedpipefor
water, gas andsewage.
IS :10221 Code of practice for coating and wrapping of undergroundmild

steelpipelines.
IS :11790 Code of practice for preparation of butt-welding ends forpipes,

valves, flanges andfittings..
Page 73 of 202
HVAC WORKS
Section 1 Split System

(VRV Type)
1. General
1.1 Unit shall be air cooled, variable refrigerant volume air conditioner consisting of outdoor
units and multiple indoor units, each suitable to cool in summer and heat in winter as per
the requirements.
1.2 The refrigerant piping shall be extendable up to 100m with 50m level difference without
any oil traps.
2. Outdoor Unit
2.1 The outdoor unit shall be a factory assembled unit housed in a sturdy weather proof casing
constructed form rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish.
2.1.1 The outdoor unit shall have multiple scroll compressors and be able to operate even in
case of breakdown of one of compressors.
2.1.2 The connectable range of indoor units shall be from 0.8 HP to 10HP with outdoor unit.
2.1.3 The noise level shall not be more than 62 dB(A)at normal operation measured horizontally
1m away and 1.5m above ground.
2.2 The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and shall be allowed for side by side
installation.
2.3 The unit shall be suitable for refrigerant R 410a.
3. Compressor
3.1 The compressor shall be of highly efficient hermetic scroll type and equipped with 100%
inverter control capable of changing the speed in accordance to the cooling load
requirement.
3.2 The inverter shall be IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor) type to be efficient and quiet.
3.3 The outdoor unit shall have the multi-step of capacity control to meet cooling load
fluctuation.
4. Heat Exchanger
4.1 The heat exchanger shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically bonded to
aluminum fins to form a cross fin coil. The aluminum fins shall be covered by anti-corrosion
resin film.
5. Refrigerant Circuit
Page 74 of 202
5.1 The refrigerant circuit shall include an accumulator, liquid and gas shut off valves and a
solenoid valves.
5.2 All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safety operation of the
system.
6. Safety Devices
* The following safety devices shall be part of the outdoor unit;

* High Pressure Switch, Low Pressure Switch, Fan Motor Safety Thermostat, Inverter
Overload Protector, Over Current Relay, Fusible Plugs, Fuses.
7. Oil Recovery System
7.1 Each unit shall be equipped, with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation with
long refrigerant piping.
Indoor Unit
8.1 Ductable type:
8.1.1 Each Indoor unit shall be ceiling mounted ducted type, as specified in scope of
work. It shall have electronic control valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to load
variations of the room. The fan shall be of the dual suction multi blade type and statically and
dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation.
8.1.2 The address of the indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of individual and
group control. In case of centralized control, it shall be set by liquid crystal remote controller.
8.2 Ceiling mounted Cassette type and high wall type:
8.3 Units shall be suitable for ceiling or high wall mounted arrangement. The unit shall be with
pre-filter, fan section & DX coil section. The housing of unit shall be light weight powder
coated galvanized steel. The unit shall be perfectly concealed in overhead boxing. Noise
level should not be more then 35 dB at low speed.
8.4 The cooling coil shall be of seamless copper tubes, and shall have continuous aluminum
fins. The tubes shall be staggered in the direction of airflow. The fins shall be uniformly
bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion of the tubes. The coils shall be tested
against leaks.
8.5 Unit shall have cleanable type filter of resin net (with mold resistant) fixed to an integrally
moulded plastic frame. The filter should be slide away type but neatly inserted.
8.6 Each unit shall have fresh air intake provision, low gas level detection system etc.
8.7 The above indoor unit shall have an electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant flow
rate in response to load variations of room. Each unit shall also have a pressure sensor.
8.7 The computerized PID control shall be used to maintain a correct room temperature. Each
unit to be provided with microprocessor thermostat for cooling & heating.
8.8 Each unit shall be with cordless remote controller LCD type. The LCD remote controller
shall memorize the latest malfunction code for easy maintenance.
8.9 The cassette type unit shall be provided with an automatic drain pump.
Page 75 of 202
9. Control Unit
9.1 Computerized PID control shall be used to maintain room temperature
9.2 Unit shall be equipped with a self-diagnosis for easy and quick maintenance and service.
9.3 The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) remote controller shall memorize the latest malfunction
code for easy maintenance.
9.4 It shall be able to control up to 16 indoor units and change fan speed individually in the
group.
10. Refrigerant Piping
10.1 All refrigerant piping for the air conditioning system shall be constructed from hard drawn
seamless copper refrigerant pipes with copper fittings and silver-soldered joints. The
refrigerant piping arrangements shall be in accordance with good practice within the air
conditioning industry, and are to include expansion valves, charging connections, suction
line insulation and all other items normally forming part of proper refrigerant circuits.
10.2 The suction line pipe size and the liquid line pipe size shall be selected according to the
manufacturer‘s specified outside diameter. All refrigerant pipes shall be properly supported
and anchored to the building structure using steel hangers, slotted angle tray, anchors,
brackets and supports which shall be fixed to the building structure by means of inserts or
expansion shields of adequate size and number to support the load imposed
thereon.
The OD & wall thickness of copper refrigerant piping shall be as follows:
Outside Dia (mm) Wall Thickness (mm)
a) 41.3, 34.0 1.3
b) 31.8, 28.6, 25.4, 22.2 1.2
c) 19.1, 15.9 1.0
d) 12.7, 9.5, 6.4 0.8
11. Drain Piping
11.1 The indoor units shall be connected to drain pipe made of heavy duty Poloplast pipes of
25mm & 32mm dia.
The pipes shall be laid in proper slope for efficient drainage of condensate water.
11.2 The joints shall be properly sealed with synthetic glue to ensure proper
bonding of the ends.
12. Pipe Insulation
12.1 Refrigerant Pipe Insulation
12.1.1 The whole of the liquid and suction refrigerant lines including all fittings, valves and strainer
bodies, etc. shall be insulated with 19mm/13mm thick Nitrile close cell rubber.
Page 76 of 202
12.1.2 The joints shall be properly sealed with synthetic glue to ensure proper
bonding of the ends.
12.2 Installation
12.2.1 The pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush and rendered free from all rust and
grease.
12.2.2 Two coats of synthetic glue shall be applied on the cleaned pipe surface.
12.2.3 The performed sections of insulation shall be fixed tightly to the surface to
take care to seal all joints.
12.2.4 All longitudinal joints and circumferential joints shall be sealed with synthetic
glue.
**********
Page 77 of 202
Section-2 DOUBLE SKIN AIR HANDLING UNITS FOR COMFORT AIRCONDITIONING
SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning double skin
construction air handling units, conforming of these specifications and in accordance with
Drawings and of the Schedule of Quantities.
TYPE
The Air Handling Unit shall be double skin construction, draw – thru type comprising of various
section such as mixing plenum, filter section. Coil section, fan section, filter plenum as per details
given in Drawings and Schedule of Quantity.
CAPACITY
The air handling capacities, maximum motor H.P., Static pressure shall be as shown on Drawing
and in Schedule of Quantity.
HOUSING / CASING
The housing/casing of the Air Handling Unit shall be of double skin construction. The framework
shall be of Extruded Aluminum hollow sections. All the frame shall be assembled using pressure
die cast nylon plastic joints to make a sturdy, strong and self-supporting framework for various
section.
23+2 mm thick Double Skin Panels shall be made of 0.8 / 0.6 mm Pre-coated GSS on outside and
0.6 mm Plain GSS sheet inside with CFC free Poly Urethane Foam of 40 +2 kg/cum. in-house
injected in between. These panels shall be screwed from inside on to the framework with soft
rubber gasket in between to make the joints air tight.
Frame work for each section shall be joined together with soft rubber gasket in between to make
the joints air tight. Suitable airtight access doors/panels with Aluminium hinges and Nylon locks
shall be provided for access to various sections for maintenance. The entire housing shall be
mounted on heavy-duty aluminium channel base.
All AHUs, which are exposed to atmosphere, shall be with 43 + 2 mm thick PUF with thermal
break profile with thermal barrier.
FAN
The fan shall be forward curved, double inlet, double width type. The fan shall be AMCA Certified
for air and sound imported, factory tested and assembled by the original manufacturer. The Wheel
& housing shall be fabricated from heavy gauge galvanized steel. The fan impeller shall be
mounted on EN8 or C-40 carbon steel solid shaft supported to housing and heavy duty ball
bearings. The impeller & fan shaft shall be statically and dynamically trim balanced to ISO 1940
quality grade after assembly. A computer printout with vibration spectrum analysis shall be
submitted. The fan outlet velocity shall not be more than 10.2 M/SEC. Fan housing with Motor
shall be mounted on a common extruded aluminium base mounted inside the air handling housing
on anti-vibration mounts. The fan outlet shall be connected to casing with the help of fire retardant
fabric, mounted on aluminium-extruded channels, acting as a flexible connection for anti-vibration.
COOLING/HEATING COILS
The multi rows deep cooling or heating coil shall be seamless imported copper tubes shall have
12.5 mm to 15 mm dia and 0.41 mm thickness. The coil shall have continuous anti-corrosive blue-
coated 0.15 mm thick Aluminium plate fins. The fins shall be spaced by collars forming integral
part of the fins and the fins should be firmly bonded to copper tubes assembled in 1.2 mm thick
stainless steel frame. The tubes shall be staggered in the direction of airflow. Face and surface
areas shall be such as to ensure rated capacity from each unit and such that air velocity across
Page 78 of 202
coil shall not exceed 150 meters per minutes. Fins spacing shall be 11 to 13 fins per inch (4 to 5
fins per cm.) Tubes shall be mechanically expanded for minimum thermal contact resistance with
fins. The coil circuit should be sized for adequate fluid velocity but not exceeding 1.8 m/s (6 FPS).
Each coil shall be factory tested at 21 kg. per sq. cm. air pressure under water. The coil shall be
pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. The condensate drain tray complete with drain
connection for proper drainage shall be constructed out of 1.2 mm stainless steel with welded
joints. The computerized selection and test certificates for the cooling coil shall be submitted by
the manufacturer.
FILTERS
1. Pre filter - Each unit shall have filter section with pre filters of the following technical
specifications.
a. Frame –Aluminum anodized.
b. Type - Box type.
c. Media - Non woven synthetic supported by HDPE mesh on one
Side and aluminium mesh on the other side.
d. Sealing of Media – By means of epoxy (CIBA make)
e. Efficiency – 90% down to 10-micron particle size.
MIXING BOX
Wherever return air is ducted, double skin mixing plenum shall be provided having construction
similar to air handling unit with provisions of flanged connections for return air and fresh air and
factory fitted, manually operated extruded aluminium volume control dampers. Filter plenum
wherever required shall be of the same construction as of casing and shall be factory fabricated by
the AHU manufacturer only.
MOTOR AND DRIVE

Fan motors shall be 415 + 10% volts, 50 cycles, 3 phase, squirrel – cage, totally enclosed fan
cooled with class F Insulation and IP – 55 protection. Motor shall be especially designed for quiet
operation and motor speed shall not exceed 1440 RPM. Drive to fan shall be provided through v-
belt – drive arrangement. Belts shall be of the oil-resistant type. The motor rating shall be at least
20% more than shaft load (kw) of fan.
SAFETY FEATURES
Each unit must have safety features as under:
a) The fan access door shall be equipped with porthole window and micro-switch inter locked with
fan motor to enable switching off the fan motor automatically in the event of door opening.
b) The air-handling units shall be equipped with weatherproof light for proper illumination inside
fan section.
c) The Access Door shall further have wire mesh screen as on added safety feature bolted on to
the unit frame.
d) Fan and motor base shall be properly earthed from the factory.
e) All screws used for panel fixing and projecting inside the unit shall be covered with PVC caps
to avoid human injury.
ACCESSORIES
Each air-handling unit shall be provided with manual air vent at high point in the cooling/heating
coil and drain plug in the bottom of the coil. In addition, the following accessories may be required
Page 79 of 202
at air handling units, their detailed specifications are given in individual sections, and quantities
separately identified in Schedule of Quantities.
a) Motorized three way mixing valves in chilled/hot water lines connecting to the coil. This valve
shall be operated by the cooling/heating thermostat & shall control the flow of chilled/hot water.
See the section ―Automatic Controls and Instruments‖ for detailed Specifications.
b) Cooling/heating thermostats as per section ― Automatic Controls Instruments‖ shall be located

in return air stream.
c) Insulated butterfly valves/balancing valves ―Y‖ strainer, union & condensate drain piping upto
sump or floor drain in air handling unit room, as described in section ―Piping‖.
d) Thermometers in the thermometer wells & pressure gauge (with cocks) within gauge ports in
chilled/hot water supply and return lines as per the section‖ Automatic Controls and
Instruments‖.
PERFORMANCE DATA
The Air Handling Unit shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level of the equipment. Fan
performance rating and d power consumption data, with operation points clearly indicating shall be
submitted and verified at the time of testing commissioning of the installation.
TESTING
Cooling/heating capacity of various air handling unit models shall be computed from the
measurements of airflow and dry and wet bulb temperatures of air entering and leaving the coil.
Flow measurements shall be by an anemometer and temperature measurements by accurately
calibrated mercury in glass thermometers. Computed results shall conform to the specified
capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be computed from measurements of
incoming voltage and input current.
SUBMITTALS
After assembly of air handlers at site the manufacturers shall submit three complete sets of AHU
drawings, test certificates of coil, test certificate of fan, test certificate of AHU and operation &
maintenance manual.
LIMITATIONS
1. The filter velocity at face of filter shall be not more than 500 FPM.
2. The coil velocity at face shall be not more than 500 FPM.
3. The fan velocity at fan outlet shall be not more than 10.2 m/s
**************
Page 80 of 202
Section 3Duct Work and Outlets(Manual Fabrication/Factory fabricated of Duct)
1. General
1.1 The work under this part shall consist of furnishing labour materials, equipment and
appliances as specified necessary and required to install all sheet metal and other allied
work to make the air conditioning supply, ventilating, and exhaust system ready for operation
as per drawings.
1.2 Except as otherwise specified all duct work and related items shall be in accordance with
these specifications.
1.3 Duct work shall mean all ducts, casings, dampers, access doors, joints, stiffners and
hangers.
2 Duct Materials
2.1 The ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized (120 gm/cm 2) steel sheets class VIII
conforming to ISS:277-1962 (revised) or aluminium sheets conforming to ISS:737-1955
(wherever aluminium ducts are specified).
2.2 All duct work, sheet metal thickness and fabrication unless otherwise directed, shall strictly
meet requirements, as described in IS:655-1963 with amendment-I (1971 edition)
2.3 All ducts wherever specified, shall be factory fabricated either from G.I. sheets or coils with
all suitable joints, supports, sealing arrangement etc.
The thickness of the sheet shall be as follows:-
Size of Duct Sheet Type of Joints Bracing if any Supports

Thickness
2.3.1 Upto 750 mm 0.63 mm G.I. Flange
2.3.2 751 mm to 0.80 mm 25x25x3 mm 25x25x3 mm at 25x25x3

1000 mm Angle iron frame the rate of 1 M
with 8 mm dia from joints
nuts & bolts

1500 mm Angle iron frame the rate of 1 M
nuts & bolts

2250 mm Angle iron frame the rate of 1.2 M
with 10 mm dia to be Braced
nuts & bolts at Diagonally
125 mm centre.
2.3.5 2251 mm and 1.25 mm 50x50x6 mm 40x40x3 mm at 50x50x6

above Angle iron frame the rate of 1.6 M
nuts & bolts at
125 mm centre.
2.4 The gauges, joints and bracings for sheet metal duct work shall further conform to the
Page 81 of 202
provisions as shown on the drawings.
2.5 Ducts larger than 600 MM shall be cross broken, duct sections upto 1200 MM length may
be used with bracing angles omitted.
2.6 Changes in section of duct work shall be affected by tapering the ducts with as long a taper
as possible. All branches shall be taken off at not more than 45 DEG. Angle from the axis of
the main duct unless otherwise approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
2.7 All ducts shall be supported from the ceiling/slab by means of M.S. Rods of 8/10 MM
(3/8")DIA with M.S. Angle/g.i channel at the bottom. The rods shall be anchored to R.C.
Slab using metallic expansion fasteners.
3. Installations
3.1 During the construction, the contractor shall temporarily close duct openings with sheet
metal covers to prevent debris entering ducts and to maintain opening straight and square,
as per direction of Engineer-In-Charge.
3.2 Great care should be taken to ensure that the duct work does not extend outside and
beyond height limits as noted on the drawings.
3.3 All duct work shall be of high quality approved galvanized sheet steel guaranteed not to
crack or peel on bending or fabrication of ducts. All joints shall be air tight and shall be
made in the direction of air flow.
The ducts shall be re-inforced with structured members where necessary, and must be
secured in place so as to avoid vibration of the duct on its support.
3.4 All air turns of 45 degrees or more shall include curved metal blades or vanes arranged so
as to permit the air to make the abrupt turns without an appreciable turbulence. Turning
vanes shall be securely fastened to prevent noise or vibration.
3.5 The duct work shall be varied in shape and position to fit actual conditions at building site. All
changes shall be subjected to the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. The contractor shall
verify all measurements at site and shall notify the Engineer-In-Charge of any difficulty in
carrying out his work before fabrication.
3.6 Self adhesive sponge rubber gaskets of 6 MM maximum thickness shall be installed
between duct flanges as well as between all connections of sheet metal ducts to walls,
floor columns, heater casings and filter casings. Sheet metal connections shall be made to
walls and floors by means of wooden member anchored to the building structure with
anchor bolts and with the sheet screwed to them.
3.7 Flanges, bracings and supports are to be black, mild steel and are to be painted with
rust proof primer on all surfaces before erection. Accessories such as damper blades and
access panels are to be of materials of appropriate thickness and the finish similar to the
adjacent ducting, as specified.
3.8 Joints, seams, sleeves, splitters, branches, takeoffs and supports are to be as per duct
details as specified, or as decided by Engineer-In-Charge.
3.9 Joints requiring bolting or rivetting may be fixed by Hexagon nuts and bolts, stove bolts or
buck bolts, rivets or closed centre top rivets or spot welding. Self tapping screws must not
be used. All jointing material must have a finish such as cadmium plating or Galvanized as
appropriate.
Page 82 of 202
3.10 Fire retarding non-porous, vermin proof flexible joints are to be fitted to the suction and
delivery of all fans. The material is to be normally double heavy canvass or as directed by
Engineer-In-Charge. On all circular spigots the flexible materials are to be screwed or clip
band with adjustable screws or toggle fitting. For rectangular ducts the material is to be
flanged and bolted with a backing flat or bolted to mating flange with backing flat.
3.11 The flexible joints are to be not less than 75 MM and not more than 250 MM between
faces.
3.12 The duct work should be carried out in a manner and at such time as not to hinder or delay
the work of the other agencies especially the boxing or false ceiling contractors.
3.13 Duct passing through brick or masonary, wooden frame work shall be provided within the
opening. Crossing duct shall have heavy flanges, collars on each side of wooden frame to
make the duct leak proof.
4. Testing
4.1 After completion, all duct system shall be tested by injecting fumes for air leakage.
4.2 The entire air distribution system shall be balanced to supply the air quantity as required in
various areas and the final tabulation of air quantity through each outlet shall be submitted
to the Engineer-In-Charge for approval.
Page 83 of 202
Section 4Duct Accessories
1. Dampers
1.1 Splitter Dampers
1.1.1 At the junction of each branch duct with main duct and split of main duct, volume dampers
must be provided. Dampers shall be two gauges heavier than the gauge of the large duct and
shall be rigid in construction.
1.1.2 The dampers shall be of an approved type, lever operated and complete with locking devices
which will permit the dampers to be adjusted and locked in any positions and clearly
indicating the damper position.
1.1.3 The dampers shall be of splitter, butterfly or louver type. The damper blade shall not be less
than 1.25 MM (18) Gauge, reinforced with 25 MM angles 3 MM thick along any
unsupported side longer than 250 MM. Angles shall not interfere with the operation of
dampers, nor cause any turbulence.
2. Opposed Blade Dampers (Duct)
2.1 Automatic and manual volume opposed blade dampers shall be complete with frames and
nylon bush as per drawings. Dampers and frames shall be constructed of 1.6 MM steel
sheets and blades shall be of extruded aluminium of aerofoil design. The dampers for fresh
air inlet shall additionally be provided with fly mesh screen, on the outside, of 0.8 MM
thickness with fine mesh.
2.2 Wherever required for system balancing, a balancing opposed blade damper with quadrant
and thumb screw lock shall be provided.
2.3 After completion of the duct work, dampers are to be adjusted and set to deliver air flow as
specified on the drawings.
3. Fire Damper (Motorized)
3.1 All supply and return air ducts shall be provided with approved make fire and smoke dampers
of at least 90 minutes fire rating certified by CBRI Roorkee as per UL 555 : 1973.
3.2 Fire Damper blades & outer frame shall be formed of 1.5 mm galvanized sheet steel. The
damper blade shall be pivoted on both ends using chrome plated spindles of self lubricated
bronze bushes. Stop seals will be provided on top and bottom of the damper housing made of
16 G galvanized sheet steel. For preventing smoke leakage side seals will be provided.
In normal position damper blade shall be held in open position with the help of a 220V
operated motorized actuators thereby providing maximum air passage without creating any
noise or chatter.
3.3 The damper shall be actuated through electric Rubberize actuator. The actuator shall be
Rubberize with the help of a signal from smoke detector. Smoke detector shall also be either
provided by A/C contractor or Fire Fighting agencies. The Fire Damper shall be provided with
micro switches with bakelite base to stop fan motor in the event of damper closure. The
reopening of damper shall be manual.
3.4 The Fire Dampers shall be mounted in fire rated wall with a duct sleeve 600 MM long. The
sleeve shall be factory fitted on fire damper. The joints at sleeve end shall be Slip on type
minimum thickness of GI sheet shall be 18 G.
Page 84 of 202
3.5 The damper shall be installed in accordance with the installation method recommended by the
manufacturer.
4. Flexible Ducts
4.1 The flexible ducts shall be machine made of spiral design with aluminium sheets.
4.2 The duct shall be factory insulated.
4.3 The connections shall be complete with adjustable clip bands of G.I.
5. Access panel
5.1 A hinged and gasketed double skin, factory fabricated access panel measuring at least 450
MM x 450 MM shall be provided on duct work before each fire damper and at each control
device that may be located inside the duct work.
6. Miscellaneous
6.1 All duct work joints are to be true right angle and with all sharp edges removed.
6.2 Sponge rubber gaskets also to be provided behind the flange of all grilles.
6.3 Each chute from the duct, leading to a grille, shall be provided with an air deflector to divert
the air into the grille through the shoot.
6.4 Diverting vanes must be provided at the bends exceeding 600 MM and at branches
connected into the main duct without a neck.
6.5 Proper hangers and supports should be provided to hold the duct rigidly, to keep them straight
and to avoid vibrations. Additional supports are to be provided where required for rigidity or
as directed by Engineer-In-Charge.
6.6 The ducts should be routed directly with a minimum of directional change.
6.7 All angle iron flanges to be welded electrically and holes to be drilled.
6.8 All the angle iron flanges to be connected to the GSS ducts by rivets at 100 MM centres.
6.9 The G.S.S. ducts should be lapped 6 MM across the flanges.
6.10 The ducts should be supported by approved type supports at a distance not exceeding 2.0
Metres.
7. Standard Grilles
7.1 The supply and return air grilles shall be fabricated from extruded aluminium sections. The
supply air grilles shall have single/double louvers. The front horizontal louvers shall be of
extruded section, fixed/adjustable type. The rear vertical louvers where required shall of
aluminium extruded sections and adjustable type. The return air grille shall have single
horizontal extruded section fixed louvers. The grilles shall have an outer frame on all four
sides.
7.2 The damper blades shall also be of extruded aluminium sections. The grill flange shall be
fabricated out of aluminium extruded section. Grilles longer than 450 MM shall have
intermediate supports for the horizontal louvers.
Page 85 of 202
8. Diffusers
8.1 The ceiling type square diffusers shall be of aluminium extruded sections with flush face
with fixed pattern and neck. The diffusers shall be provided with blank plate suitable of grid
ceiling (T-Bar) of size 600 mm x 600 mm.
8.2 All supply diffusers shall be provided with extruded aluminium dampers, with arrangement
for adjustment from the bottom, acoustically lined G.I. plenum, perforated diffusion plate and
circular spigot.
8.3 The slot diffusers shall be of aluminium extruded sections with diffusion plate and sliding
damper. It shall be provided with acoustically lined G.I. plenum box with circular spigot.
8.4 The acoustic lining shall be done with 12mm thick glasswool of 32 Kg/cu.m. density with
86ubberized lining on one face. The acoustic lining shall be fixed with armasol.
9. Linear Diffusers/Grilles
9.1 The linear diffusers/grilles shall be fabricated from Aluminium extruded sections.
9.2 The diffusion blades shall be extruded, flush mounted type with single or double direction air
flow.
9.3 The frame shall be of aluminium extruded section and shall hold the louvers tightly in fixed
position. The frame shall be provided on all four sides.
9.4 The dampers as described under grilles shall be provided wherever specified.
10. Perforated Diffusers
10.1 The perforated diffusers shall be fabricated from aluminium sheet.
10.2 The sheet shall have uniform perforations to allow minimum 50% free area.
10.3 The supply air diffusers shall be provided with fully adjustable air pattern deflectors.
10.4 The frame shall be of extruded aluminium sections with blanking plate bonded to frame for
grid ceiling (T-bar) application.
11. Exhaust Grilles
11.1 The exhaust grilles shall be fabricated from aluminium extruded sections.
11.2 The exhaust grilles shall be horizontal fixed bar grilles with 150 blade inclination.
12. Exhaust / Fresh Air Louvres
12.1 The louvres shall be fabricated from aluminium extruded sections.
12.2 The blades shall be extruded flush mounted type with single horizontal throw.
12.3 The frame shall be of aluminium extruded section and shall hold the louvers tightly in fixed
position.
Page 86 of 202
13. Painting and Vision Barrier
13.1 All grilles, and diffusers shall be powder coated, before installation, in approved colour.
13.2 All ducts immediately behind the grilles/diffusers etc. are to be given two coats of black
paint in matt finish.
13.3 The return air and dummy portion of all linear grilles shall be provided with a vision barrier
made of 24 gauge galvanized sheets. The vision barrier shall be fixed to the false ceiling
frame with self tapping screws and shall be given two coats of black paint in matt finish. Care
shall be taken to ensure that the return air path is not obstructed.
-o.o.o.o.o.o.o.o-
Page 87 of 202
Section 5 Electric Cabling
1. General
The electric cable connections of motors and earthing of all equipments shall be carried out,
as per specifications, given hereunder.
2. Cabling
2.1 The cabling of various equipment shall be carried using PVC Insulated and armoured FRLS
cables.
2.2 The PVC armoured FRLS power cable for use on 415 volts system shall be 3 or 3.5 Core with
aluminium conductors and be of 660/1100 volts grade, as per IS 1554 (Part I) 1964. The
cross section of the cable shall be to suit the load and rating of the equipment. The cables
shall be of aluminium conductor, PVC insulated, strip armoured with overall PVC sheathing.
2.2.1 The cables shall be laid as per IS-1255/1967, Indian standard code of practice.
2.2.2 The cables shall be laid, as per drawings in the ducts/pipes/trays etc. along a short and
convenient route between switch board and the equipment, (either in trenches, on wall or on
hangers, supported from the slab). Cable routing shall be checked at the site of work to avoid
interference with structure, equipment etc. Where more than one cables are running close to
each other, proper spacing should be provided between them.
2.2.3 The radius of bends of the cable should not be less than 12 times the overall dia. of cable
in order to prevent undue stress and damage at the bends, the cables should be supported
with wooden cleats on M.S. Supports, when laid in trenches, or wall/ceiling suspended
hangers. When laid under ground the cables should be covered with fine soft earth and
protected with 2nd Class bricks. Suitable G.I. Pipe shall be used wherever cables are laid
under the roads etc.
2.2.4 Wooden bushes shall be provided at the ends of pipes through which cables are connected
through.
3. Surface Wiring
3.1 The surface wiring shall be cased in conduits which shall be of 1100 volts grade and conform
to IS 9587-1987 (revised to date)
3.1.1 The conduits used shall be of high quality & all joints shall be made with sockets. The bends
and elbows shall have inspection covers fixed with grease free screws. The joints shall be
water tight. Approved metal saddles shall be used to secure the exposed conduits at a space
of 1 meter or less. The connection of the conduits to switches etc., shall be secured by
check nuts and ebonite bushes provided at the ends of conduits.
3.1.2 The G.I conduits shall be heavy duty and rigid type-ISI marked/conforming to IS
specifications. The wall thickness shall not be less than 2 mm. For conduits above 32 mm dia.
Metallic conduits of 20 mm dia. and below shall not be used. Conduit accessories (Boxes etc.)
shall conform to IS-5133-1968 and IS-2667-64 (amended-revised to date). Conduit pipes shall
be jointed, wherever necessary by means of screwed couples and screwed accessories only.
Page 88 of 202
In Long distance straight, run of conduits inspection type couplers at suitable intervals shall be
provided.
3.1.3 Threads on conduit pipes shall be between 13 mm to 19 mm long.
3.1.4 The wiring shall be carried-out as per IS 732-1989 (Amended and revised to date).
3.2 Flush inspection covers shall be provided in case of Concealed, recessed conduits. The
staples for the conduits shall not be spaced more than 0.60 meters apart. Before filling up the
chase with concrete the conduits should be given a coat of rust proof paint.
3.3 The wires shall be drawn only after all the conduits have been properly fixed in position. Fish
wires (steel wire : 16 SWG) shall be laid in conduits for drawing of wires subsequently.
4. Control Cabling/wiring
4.1 FRLS Control cables shall be1100 volts grade, as per IS 1554, made from copper conductor
of 1.5 Sq mm PVC insulated single Core, strip armoured with an overall PVC sheathing.
4.2 The cables and conduits wiring shall be carried out as per details given under 2.2 and 2.3
above.
5. Earthing
5.1 All equipment connected with electric supply shall also be provided with double earthing
continuity conductors. The size of Thinned copper . earthing conductors shall be :-
Size of phase wire sq.mm Size of Thinned Copper conductor

Aluminium Tape/Wire (Swg)
185 25 mm x 6 mm (strip)
95 4 Swg
70 4 Swg
50 6 Swg
35 6 Swg
25-6 6 Swg
4 6 Swg
Note :- Aluminium earthing conductors of equivalent Size may be used in lieu of GSS conductors
mentioned above.
6. Miscellaneous
6.1 The final connections to the equipment shall be through Flexible connections in case of
conduit wiring and also where the equipment is likely to be moved back and forth, such as on
slide rails.
6.2 An isolator switch shall be provided at any motor which is separated from the main switch
panel by a wall or partition or other barrier or is more than 15 metres away from the main
panel.
Page 89 of 202
6.3 Two separate and distinct earthing conductors shall be Connected from the equipment upto
the main switch board panel.
6.4 The branch lines from the main panel to each equipment shall be separated and should not
criss cross other lines.
6.5 The entire installation shall be tested as per Electricity rules and I.S.S. 732-1973 with
amendments 1,2&3 prior to the commissioning of the plant and a suitable test report
furnished by a competent and authorised person. The test report will be obtain by contractor
himself at his own expenses.
6.6 All exposed switch board panels, conduits, hangers etc. shall be given 2 coats of suitable
paint of approved colour, when all work has been completed.
-o.o.o.o.o.o.o.o-
Page 90 of 202
Section 6 Insulation
1. General
The Insulation of refrigerant piping, drain piping, etc. shall be carried out as per
specifications given below:
2. Materials
The materials to be used for insulation shall be as follows, unless some other material is
specifically mentioned elsewhere. The detailed specifications of the materials are listed
under respective sub heads.
2.1 Drain Pipe Insulation : nitrile rubber (6 mm)

2.4 Duct Insulation : Nitrile Rubber (12MM)
2.5 Acoustic Treatment : Open cell Elastomeric (Nitrile Foam)
3.1 Drain Pipe Insulation
3.1.1 The material for insulation of drain pipes shall be pipe section of closed cell elastomeric
insulation/nitrite rubber having a ‗K‘ valve of 0.027 W/mK at a mean temperature of 10C
and a minimum density of 55 Kg. /cubm.
3.1.2 The thickness of insulation shall be a section of 6 mm thick.
3.2 Duct Insulation
3.2.1 The materials for duct insulation shall be Nitrile Rubber (12 MM), as described earlier .The
density of insulation shall not be less than 24 kg/cubm and material shall be in the form of
blankets/rolls of uniform thickness. The ‗K‘ value at 10o C. Shall not be less than 0.031 W/mK.
3.2.2 The thickness of duct insulation shall be as follows:
a. Duct in False ceiling space - 13 mm thick

b. Duct Exposed space - 25 mm thick
3.3 Acoustic Treatment
3.3.1 The material for acoustic treatment of ducts, rooms, roofs etc. shall be open cell elastomeric
(nitrile foam) insulation, as described earlier, conforming to I.S. standard. The density shall be
140 kg/cub.m and the material shall be in the form of boards of uniform density. The ‗k‘ value
at 10oC shall not be less than 0.03 W/mK.
3.3.2 The thickness of insulation shall be as follow unless otherwise specified elsewhere:
a. Duct Acoustic : 10 MM
b. Room Acoustic : 25 MM
4. Installation
4.1 Duct Insulation
4.1.1 Clean the surface with a wire brush and make it free from rust and oil.
4.1.2 Apply two coats of cold adhesive compound to the surface.
Page 91 of 202
4.1.3 The joints shall be sealed with 50 mm thick self adhesive aluminium tape.
4.1.4 The Ducts in areas exposed to the weather shall be additionally covered with 26
gauge aluminium sheet.
4.2 Duct Acoustic Lining
4.2.1 The duct surface shall first be cleaned from inside.
4.2.2 Then 10 mm square section made of 18 Ga (1.2 mm) thick G.I. sheet should be fixed on
both ends of the duct piece.
4.2.3 The insulation slabs of 10 mm thickness shall be fixed between these sections with self
adhesive stick pins.
4.3 Room Acoustic
4.3.1 Fix 32 mm x 25 mm x 32 mm G.I. channels at 0.5 MTR intervals longitudinally then fix
cross battens at1.0 MTR centre using suitable gutties, and screws.
4.3.2 Fill each rectangle with 10 mm opencell elestomaric (nitriler rubber).
4.3.3 Tie with 24 gauge G.I. Wires at 300 mm intervals.
4.3.4 All corners joints shall be covered with 25 x 25 x 2 mm thick aluminium angles.
-o.o.o.o.o.o.o.o-
Page 92 of 202
Section 7Testing and Commissioning
1. General
1. 1 The contractor must perform all inspection and tests of the system as a whole and of
components individually as required, under the supervision of the architect, in accordance
with the provisions of the applicable ASHRAE standards or approved equal in addition to
furnish necessary test certificates from manufacturers.
1.2 The system shall then be commissioned, tested and balanced to fulfill the intent and
purpose for which it is designed.
1.3 In addition continuous Run Tests shall be carried out during peak weather condition.
2. Compressors Condensers/Out Door Units/Evaporators
2.1 Hydraulic test for various components and assembled equipments at 1.5 times design
pressure or double the operating pressure, whichever is higher.
2.2 Pneumatic leak test after assemblies at design pressure
2.3 Static and dynamic balancing on electronic precision machine for rotating parts, links,
impeller/ crank shaft assemblies etc.
2.4 Testing of oil passages in compressor at 1.5 times pump discharge pressure.
2.5 Pressure drop test for condenser, chiller and evaporator.
2.6 For compressor assembly, electronic leak, air running test, pneumatic test with dry
nitrogen and leak test in water.
3. Indoor Units
3.1.2 Performance test as per applicable codes.
3.2 Coils
3.2.1 Pneumatic test.
3.3 Filters
3.3.1 Test of filter elements as per B.S. 2831 B.S. 1701 as applicable. This is to ascertain
filtration efficiency by weight at inlet and outlet.
3.3.2 Manufacturer‘s test certificates also to be produced for the assembled unit. Final
dimensional check will be done. Inspection may be done during assembly of components
for quality of workmanship, painting etc.
3.4 Piping
Materials check for specifications and size.
3.5 Instruments and Controls
Visual examination.
Page 93 of 202
3.6 Special Note
Vendor to note that above procedure is to be followed in addition to the specifications

attached with the tender.
4. Associated Works at Site.
4.1 All electrical items will be subjected to inspection at any stage during manufacturing
activity. Routine electrical test as per relevant codes. Inspection of manufacturer‘s test
certificates.
4.2 Inspection of raw materials to be used for fabrication and assembly and inspection of
manufacturer‘s certificates.
4.3 Inspection of welding including welders qualification as desired by inspection engineers.

Inspection of fabricated items.
4.4 Pressure testing of pipe fittings used for the refrigerant and water and other services.
4.5 Checking of electrical circuits (power & controls) and checking functioning of controls of
refrigerant systems and other circuits of air conditioning plant.
4.6 Checking of calibration of controls and instrumentation
4.7. Checking of assemblies or electrical control panel, instruments panels, local panels
(dimensional and functional) annunciator panels etc.
4.8 Inspection of complete electrical installation at site.
4.9 Performance testing of completes VRV system as per specifications.
5. Vendor Responsibility
5.1 The above inspection procedure is given for general guidance and information of vendors.
The inspection of purchaser/consultant is strictly not limited to these.
5.2 The inspection engineer of purchaser/consultant will have full right, to have detailed
inspection at any stage right from placement of order to completion of project, as and
when desired by inspection engineer.
5.3 Co-ordination of inspection agency of purchaser/consultant with his factory/sub-vendor‘s

factory/erection site will be the sole responsibility of successful vendor, subsequent to
placement of order for complete air conditioning plant, covered under these technical
specifications.
6. Piping System
6.1 In general pressure tests shall be applied to piping only before connection of equipment
and appliances. In no case shall piping, equipment or appliances be subjected to pressure
exceeding their test ratings.
6.2 Tests shall be completed and approved before any insulation is applied.
6.3 After tests have been completed, the system shall be drained and cleaned of all dust and
foreign matter. All strainers, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of all dirt, fittings, and
debris.
Page 94 of 202
7. Electrical Equipment
7.1 All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and adjusted on site before application of power.
7 The following tests shall be carried out :
7.2.1 Cables and Wires continuity tests.
7.2.2 Insulation resistance tests, phase to phase and phase to earth, on all circuits and
equipment, using a 500 Volts meggar. The meggar reading shall be not less than one
megaohm.
7.2.3 Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must not exceed half (1/2) CMH.
7.2.4 Phasing out and phase rotation tests.
7.2.5 Operating tests on all protective relays to prove their correct operation before enerzising the
main equipment.
7.2.6 Operating tests on all starters, circuit breakers etc.
8. Commissioning of the System
The system shall be commissioned by adopting the following procedure.
8.1 The installation as a whole shall be balanced and tested upon completion, and all
relevant information, including the following shall be submitted to the architects.
8.1.1 Air volume passing through each unit, aperatures.
8.1.2 Differential pressure readings across each filter, fan and coil, and through each pump.
8.1.3 Electrical current readings, in amperes of full and average load running and starting,
together with name plate current of each electrical motor.
8.1.4 Continuous recording over a specified period, of ambient wet and dry bulb
temperatures under varying degrees of internal heat loads and use and occupation, in
each zone of each part of the building.
8.2 Daily records should be maintained of hourly readings, taken under varying degrees of
internal heat load and use and occupation, of wet and dry bulb temperatures, upstream
―On-Coil‖ of each cooling coil. Also suction temperatures and pressures for each
refrigerating unit. The current and voltage drawn by each machine.
8.3 Any other readings shall be taken which may subsequently be specified by the
architect.
8.4 If these air quantities cannot be delivered without exceeding the speed range of the pulley
or the available horse power, the architect shall be notify, before proceeding with the
balancing of air distribution system.
8.5 A proper record shall be maintained as per Test Performa given else where.
9. Miscellaneous
9.1 The above tests and procedures are mentioned herein, for general guidance and
information only, but not by way of limitation to the provisions of conditions of contract
Page 95 of 202
and specification.
9.2 The date of commencement of all tests listed above, shall be subject to the approval of
the architect and In accordance with the requirements of this specification.
9.3 The contractor shall supply the skilled staff and all necessary instruments and carry
out any test of any kind on a piece of equipment, apparatus, part of system or on a
complete system, if the architect requests such a test for determining specified or
guaranted data, as given in the specification or on the drawings.
9.4 Any damage resulting from the tests shall be repaired and/or damaged material replaced,
to the satisfaction of the architect.
9.5 In the event of any repair or any adjustment having to be made, other than normal
running adjustment, the tests shall be void and shall be recommenced after the
adjustment or repairs have been completed.
9.6 The contractor must inform the architect when such tests are to be made, giving sufficient
notice, in order that the architect or his nominated representative may be present.
9.7 Complete records of all tests must be kept and 3 copies of these and location drawings
must be furnished to the architect.
9.8 The contractor may be required to repeat the test as required, should the Ambient
conditions at the time, do not give, in the opinion of the architect, sufficient and suitable
indication of the effect and performance of the installation as a whole or of any part,
as required.
******************
Page 96 of 202
Section 8 Mode of Measurement
1. Unit Prices in the Schedule of Quantities
1.1 The item description in the schedule of quantities is in the form of a condensed resume.
The unit price shall be held to include every thing necessary to complete the work covered
by this item in accordance with the specifications and drawings. The sum total of all the
individual unit prices shall represent the total price of the installation ready to be handed
over.
1.2 The unit price of the various items shall include the Following :
1.2.1 All equipment, machinery, apparatus and materials required as well as the cost of any
tests which the Consultant/ Engineer-In-Charge may require, in addition to the tests
generally required to prove quality and performance of equipment.
1.2.2 All the labour required to supply and install the Complete installation in accordance with the
specifications.
1.2.3 Use of any tools, equipment, machinery, lifting tackle, Scaffolding, ladders etc. required by
the contractor to carry out his work.
1.2.4 All the necessary measures to prevent the transmission of vibration.
1.2.5 The necessary material to isolate equipment foundations from the building structure,
wherever necessary.
1.2.6 Storage, watch-and-ward and insurance of all equipment apparatus and Materials.
1.3 The contractor‘s unit price shall include all equipment, apparatus, material and labour
indicated in the drawings and/or specifications in conjunction with the item in question, as
well as all additional equipment, apparatus, material and labour usual and necessary
(within the system as a whole) to complete the work, even though not specifically shown,
described or otherwise referred to.
2. Measurements of Sheet Metal Ducts, Grilles etc.
2.1 Sheet metal ducts :
2.1.1 All duct measurements shall be taken as per actual Outer duct surface area including
bends, tees, reducers, collars, vanes & other fittings. Gaskets, nuts, bolts, vibration
rotation pads are included in the basic duct items of the BOQ.
2.1.2 The unit of measurements shall be the finished sheet metal surface area in metres
squares. No extra shall be allowed for wastages.
2.1.3 All the guide vanes, deflecters in duct elbows, branches, grille collars quadrant dampers
etc. shall be measured for actual sheet metal surface and paid for at the same rate as duct
of same thickness.
2.1.4 The unit duct price shall include all the duct hangers and supports, from concrete
reinforcement and making good of the same as well as any materials and labour required
to complete the duct frame.
2.2 Grilles
All grilles/diffusers as per tender requirements shall be measure as follows :

Page 97 of 202
2.2.1 All measurements of grilles shall be the actual outlet size excluding the outer flanges.
2.2.2 The square or rectangular grilles shall be measured in plain sq.m.
3. Accoustic duct Lining
3.1 In case of accoustic lining of air ducts, measurements of the bare inside duct surface in
square metres, shall be final for billing purposes.
3.2 The insulation/accoustic panels shall include cost of Battens, supports, adhesives, vapour
proofing, finished tile boards/sheets as well as additional labour and materials required for
completing the work.
4. Wall Insulation & Accoustic Treatment
4.1 The unit of measurement for all wall insulation, wall accoustic panel shall be the
uninsulated area of walls, to be treated, in square metres.
4.2 The insulation, accoustic panels shall include cost of battens, supports, adhesives, vapour
proofing, finished tiles/boards/sheets as well as additional labour and materials required for
completion of the work.
…ooo…
Page 98 of 202
Section 9 Technical Data
Contractor should furnish technical data as mentioned below, of the equipment and accessories
offered by him as per scheme given in schedule of equipment and bill of quantities.
S.No. Description Unit Condition of Services

Variable Refrigerant Volume System
1. Outdoor Units
1.1 Make --
1.2 Model --
1.3 Cooling Capacity --
1.3.1 Nominal TR
1.3.2 Actual TR
1.4 Compressor Motor KW
1.5 Sound level at distance of 3m DB(A)
1.6 No. of Compressor --
1.6.1 Fixed Speed Type Nos.
1.6.2 Variable Speed Type Nos.
1.6.3 Total No. of compressor Nos.
1.7 Power Supply requirement 3Ph/1Ph
1.8 Power consumption at rated capacity KW
2. Indoor Units
2.1 Make --
2.2 Model --
2.3 Cooling Capacity --
2.3.1 Nominal TR
2.3.2 Actual TR
2.4 Air Quantity CMH
2.5 Sound level at a distance of 1m DB(A)
2.6 Power supply requirement 3Ph/1Ph
2.7 Power consumption at rated capacity KW
3. Pipe insulation (Type - I) Manf.
4. Insulation Details Refrigerant Piping

4.1 Manufacturer --
4.2 Materials --
4.3 Density KG/Cum.
4.4 Mean ‘K’ value at 10o c --
********
Page 99 of 202
DESIGN PARAMETERS
Location: - VIJAYAWADA.
1.5 Out side conditions Summer: 43.30 CDB; 28.30CWB ;32%(RH)
Monsoon: 34.40CDB; 27.80 CWB ;60%(RH)
Winter : 12.80 CDB; 9.40 CWB ;65%(RH)
1.5.1 Inside conditions Public area : 22.20C+/-1 CDB

(Summer & Monsoon) RH not exceeding 60%
Common area & Lift Lobby : 23.90C+/-1 CDB

RH not exceeding 60%
Auditorium : 22.20C+/-1 CDB

Workshop : 22.20C+/-1 CDB

Other areas : 23.90C+/-1 CDB

1.5.2 Winter All areas : 21.10C+/-1 CDB

1.5.3 Light All areas : As per ECBC 2005
1.5.4 Equipment Other areas : As per ASHRAE

Fundamental 2005
1.5.5 Fresh air : As per ASHRAE

170 : 2008
1.5.6 Roof insulation : All the under deck insulation

to be carried out By
HVAC
Contractor
2. Codes & Standards :
Following codes and standards shall be used.
2.1 ASHRAE Standard – 170 (2008) Ventilation of Health Care Facilities.
2.2 ECBC – 2007 – Energy conservation building code .
Page 100 of 202

2.3 ARI – Airconditioning and Refrigerant institute.
2.4 NBC – National Building Code 2005.
2.5 IS – Relevant IS Codes.
3. Energy efficient Building :
3.1 High COP VRF system(s) are considered.
3.2 AHUs with VFD are considered.
3.3 CFC & HCFC free refrigerants will be used.
3.4 All motors will be IE -2 rated.
4 Heat Transfer Co- Efficient (BTU / Hr. x FT2 x OF)
4.1.1 Glass : 0.32
4.1.2 Wall : 0.08
4.1.3 Insulated exposed slab : 0.05
4.2 Shading coefficient : 0.29
4.3 Respiration Heat (BTU / Hr.) of People
4.3.1 Sensible heat : 250 BTU/Hr
4.3.2 Latent heat : 200 BTU/Hr
4.4 Other Factors
4.4.1 1 kwh : 3410 BTU / hr.
4.4.2 Sensible heat safety : 5%
4.4.3 Latent heat safety : 5%
Page 101 of 202

ELECTRICAL WORKS
1. The work in general shall be carried out as per the latest CPWD specifications with up to
date correction slips, unless otherwise specified in the nomenclature of the individual item or
as specifications shall be carried out as per approved specifications. In case any item is not
covered in any of these documents, the same shall be carried out as per the latest BIS codes
in practice or as per approval of Engineer in Charge of NBCC. Where any portion of special
conditions of contact is repugnant to or at variance with any provision of the with Instruction
to Tender and General Conditions of contract and/or the other documents forming part of the
contract then unless a different intention appears the provisions of the general conditions of
Contract shall the other documents forming part of the contract only to the extent such
repugnant/variations in the special conditions of contract as are not possible of being
reconciled with the provision with Instruction to Tender of General Conditions of Contract
and/or the other forming part of thecontract.
2. The work in general shall be carried out as per the latest CPWD specifications 2009 Vol.
1&2.
3. The Electrical works shall be carried out as per CPWD Specifications for Electrical works
(Part-I) Internal, 2005 (Part-II) External, 1994 with up to date corrections slips, General
specifications for Electrical works Part-VII (DG Sets), 2006 General Specifications for
Electrical works Part-IV (Substation), 2007; General specifications for Electrical works – Part-
V (Wet Riser & Sprinkler Systems) 2006 and General specifications for Electrical works (Lifts
& Escalators) Part-III,2003.
4. For items not covered under any of the specifications mentioned in tender documents, the
works shall be carried out as per BIS code/manufactures specifications/ General Engineering
practice and/or as per direction ofEngineer-in-Charge.
5. For Non DSR Items, Technical specifications specified in tender documents may be
followed.
6. GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee the entire works & services, installation as per specifications
both for components and for system as a whole. All equipment shall be guaranteed for One
year from the date of handed over to the Department against unsatisfactory performance or
breakdown due to defective design, manufacture and/or installation. The installation shall be
covered by the conditions that the whole installation or any part thereof found defective
within one year from the date of completion shall be replaced or repaired by the contractor
free of charge as decided by theEngineer-in-Charge.
Page 102 of 202

ELECTRICAL WORKS
1. INTRODUCTION:
It is proposed to Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning Electrical Work D.G. Set,
Exhaust Piping, Exhaust Piping Insulation, D.G. Set neutral & body earthing, Synchronizing
Panel, 11KV/0.415KV Substation, Main L.T. Panel, Floor Distribution Panel & Distribution Board,
Main & Sub main Cables, Point Wiring, Light Fixture, Telephone System, Data Cabling Network,
Addressable Fire Detection System, Public Address System, CCTV System, Lightning Protection
System, UPS System, Earthing& External Lighting System etc. as per Schedule of Quantities
given in the tender. The Electrical Work shall comprise offollowing.
a) SIT&C of D.G.Set
b) SIT&C of 11KV/0.415KVSubstation
c) Main L.T. Panel Cum SynchronizingPanels
d) Floor DistributionPanel
e) DistributionBoards
f) Main & Sub mainCables
g) Point Wiring
h) LightFixtures
i) TelephoneSystem
j) Data cablingNetwork
k) Addressable Fire DetectionSystem
l) Public AddressSystem
m) Lightning ProtectionSystem
n) ExternalLighting
o) All other item as detailed in Schedule ofQuantities.
1.1 General:
A) This specification covers manufacturer, testing as may be necessary before dispatch,

delivery at site, all preparatory work, assembly and installation, final testing, commissioning,
putting into operation including one year guarantee period for the followingWork.
B) The work shall be executed as per CPWD General Specifications as amended up to date,
relevant IE rules, relevant IS and as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge. These additional
specifications & conditions are to be read in conjunction with above and in case of variations;
specifications given in the Additional Specifications & Conditions shall apply. However,
nothing extra shall be paid on account of these as the same are to be read along with
schedule of quantities for thework.
Page 103 of 202

2. BASIS OFDESIGN
2.1 INTRODUCTION
A centralised electrical system shall be designed, installed & commissioned to provide the
electrical power for NID at Vijayawada.
2.2 OUTSIDEDESIGNCONDITION °C
MinimumTemperature -5
Maximum Temperature 50
2.3 LOCATION OF D.G.SET:
D.G. Set shall be on solid ground level near building.
2.4 STARTING METHOD FOR D.G.SET:
D.G. set shall be suitable for Manual / Auto start through D.G. Set Controller and shall be
compatible for synchronizing through Synchronizing relay.
2.5 D.G. COOLINGMETHOD:
D.G. Set shall be radiator cooled.
2.6 Main L.T.PANEL:
Main L.T. Panel to be installed in Substation Room for changeover the power and power
distribution for entire building.
2.7 CAPACITORPANEL:
Capacitor Panel to be installed in Substation Room for improve the power factor as per norms of
MSEB.
2.8 EARTHINGSYSTEM:
The earthing system to be provided for the D.G. set system as required as per IS: 3048.
2.9 ELECTRICAL LOADCALCULATION:
GRID SUPPLY DG SUPPLY

S. AREA
DESCRIPTION DEMAND DEMAND
No. (SFT) C.L. C.L.
D.F. LOAD D.F. LOAD
(KW) (KW)
(KW) (KW)
COMMERICAL BUILDING
1 TYPE-II&III 27 1.0 27 0 1.0 0
2 TYPE-IV&V 74 1.0 74 0 1.0 0
3 ADMIN BLOCK 102 1.0 102 86 1.0 86
4 LIBRARY BLOCK 117 1.0 117 100 1.0 100
5 ACEDMIC BLOCK 227 1.0 227 181 1.0 181
6 GUEST HOUSE 132 1.0 132 11 1.0 11
7 BOYS HOSTEL 114 1.0 114 50 1.0 50
Page 104 of 202

GRID SUPPLY DG SUPPLY

S. AREA
DESCRIPTION DEMAND DEMAND
No. (SFT) C.L. C.L.
D.F. LOAD D.F. LOAD
(KW) (KW)
(KW) (KW)
8 GIRLS HOSTEL 128 1.0 128 54 1.0 54

9 MESS BLOCK 128 1.0 128 108 1.0 108
10 COMMUNITY 48 1.0 48 48 1.0 48
11 AUDI BLOCK 107 1.0 107 107 1.0 107
MARRIED ACCOMADATION
12 11 1.0 11 11 1.0 11
BLOCK
13 WORKSHOP BLOCK 140 1.0 140 9 1.0 9
14 PLUMBING SYSTEM LOAD 30 1.0 30 30 1.0 30
15 EXTERNAL LIGHTING LOAD 15 1.0 15 15 1.0 15
16 FIRE FIGHTING 10 1.0 10 10 1.0 10
TOTAL 1409 1409 820
OVERALL DIVERSITY 0.65 0.65
DEMAND LOAD KW 916 533
POWER FACTOR 0.80 0.80
DEMAND LOAD IN KVA KVA 1145 666
TRANSFORMER CAPACITY
DEMAND LOAD KVA 1145
LOADING FACTOR 0.80
TRANSFORMER CAPACITY 1431
2x750 KVA, 11KV/0.415 KV, OIL TYPE
TRANSFORMER CAPACITY
TRANSFORMER WITH ON LOAD TAP CHANGER
D.G. SET CAPACITY

DEMAND LOAD 666
LOADING FACTOR 0.85
D.G. SET CAPACITY 784
2x320 KVA + 1 x 125 KVA RADIATOR COOLED
D.G. SET CAPACITY
DG
3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OFEQUIPMENTS
3.1 D.G.SET
3.1.1 INTENT OFSPECIFICATION:
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, shop testing, packing, dispatch,
transportation supply, erection, testing, commissioning, performance and guarantee testing of
Diesel Gen-Sets, complete in all respects with all equipment, fitting and accessories for efficient
and trouble free operation as specified here under.
Page 105 of 202

3.1.2 CODES ANDSTANDARDS:
The equipment furnish under this specification shall conform to the following latest standard,
except where modified or supplemented by this specification:
BS:5514 : Specification for reciprocating internal combustionengine.
BS:5000 : Rotating electrical machines of particular type or forparticularapplications.
IS:1239 (Part -I&II): Mild steel tubes andfittings.
IS:1651 : Stationary cells and batteries lead acid type (with tubularpositiveplates).
IS:9224 : Specification of low voltage fuses, GeneralPurpose.
IS:4540 : Mono-crystalline semi-conductor rectifier assembliesandequipment.
IS:5 : Colours for ready mixedpaints.
IS:4722 : Rotating electricalmachines
IS:1248 : Specification for electricalindicatinginstruments.
IS:10000 : Methods of tests for internal combustionengines.
IS:10002 : Specifications for performance requirements for constantspeed

compression ignition (Diesel) engine for general purposes (above 20KW).
IS:2147 : Degree of protection provided by enclosure for low voltageswitchgear
and controlgear.
IS:1600 : Code for type testing of constant speed IC engines forgeneralpurposes.
IS:1601 : Performance of constant speed IC engines for generalpurposes.
ASMEPower : Internalcombustionengines.
Test Code PTC-17
3.1.3 ENGINE:
Diesel Engine shall be stationary, compression, ignition, totally enclosed, water cooled, stroke
cycle, cold battery starting, turbo charged and after cooled heat exchanger cooled 1500 RPM in
accordance to BS and IS specification complete with all accessories
3.1.4 COOLINGSYSTEM:
Cooling system shall be radiator cooled.
3.1.5 FUELSYSTEM:
Fuel System shall have PT Fuel Pump, Injectors, Fuel filters, Self contained piping & houses,
Complete piping.
3.1.6 LUBRICATINGSYSTEM:
Lubricating system shall have Oil pump, Strainer, Lube oil cooler, Oil filter, Bypass filter, Self
contained piping, Lube oil priming pump.
Page 106 of 202

3.17 AIR INTAKESYSTEM:
Air intake system shall have dry type filter, Air intake manifold with necessary connections,
Turbocharger with after cooler.
3.1.8 EXHAUSTSYSTEM:
Exhaust system shall have Exhaust Manifold, Flexible piping, Hospital silencer to limit the noise
level and extending silencer outside the canopy.
3.1.9 STARTING SYSTEM:
Starting system shall have Starter 24V / 12V with suitable ampere capacity, Charging Alternator
with inbuilt regulator 24V / 12V minimum 30 AMP DC or as per battery capacity, Connecting links
between battery & alternator. The engine shall be suitable for black start.
3.1.10 MAIN AND BIG ENDBEARING:
The mail and big end bearing shall be detachable shells of high grade bearing material, and shall
be pre finished. The dimensions of big end bearings shall be such that the connecting rods can be
withdrawn through the cylinder liners.
3.1.11 COUPLINGARRANGEMENT:
Coupling arrangement shall have Flexible coupling, Flywheel, Flywheel Housing, Coupling Guard
3.1.12 INSTRUMENTPANEL:
Instrument Panel shall have-

- Lube oil pressuregauge
- Water temperaturegauge
- RMP Indicator & HourMeter.
- Battery chargerammeter.
- Starting switch withkey
3.1.12 SAFETY CONTROLTRIP:
- Low Lube oilpressure

- High Watertemperature
- Engine overspeed.
- Lub oiltemperature.
3.1.14 ALTERNATOR:
MANUFACTURER : STAMFORD / LEROY SOMER IS: 4722/BS2613
Output : 320/125 KVA self excited, self regulatedfootmounted fitted

with ball and roller bearings and having PMG, droop CT AREP
for paralleling. This shall give full output of 320/125 KVA at 40
deg. C.
Powerfactor : 0.8
Rated Generating
Voltage : 415 Volts, 3 phase 4 wiresystem
Voltageregulation : +/-1.0%allloadbetweennoloadtofullload&powerfactor0.8
to unity. AVR shall be mounted in alternator.
Frequency : 50HZ
Page 107 of 202

Speed : 1500RPM
Overload Capacity : 10% for one hour in any 12 hours of operation without exceeding
temperature rise limits specified in BS: 2613 when corrected to
ambient temperature at site
Class of Insulation : H and temp. rise limited to class H
SpaceHeater : To beprovided
Windingconnection : Star connection (all six leads will be brought out of statorframe).
Termination : Termination box shall be amended to connect the busduct.
The alternator shall be self-excited, self regulated, self ventilated in brush less for suitable
automatic voltage regulator and shall conform to BS: 2613 or equivalent standard and shall give
rated output at NTP conditions. The alternator shall have space heater which shall be connected
with breaker NO/NC contacts and this should be able to cut off with thermostat.
3.1.15 OTHERACCESSORIES:
FUEL TANK:
Day service fuel tank shall be made of 3mm thick MS sheet of 990 litres capacity for each set with
all accessories such as oil level indicator, inlet pipe connection, outlet pipe connection, trough to
collect split oil, air vent pipe with air filter, manhole with cover, low level and full level float valve
arrangements with all fittings interconnections between tanks. The tank shall be provided with
suitable calibration scale.
BASE FRAME:
M.S. Fabricated adequately machined base frame complete with lifting, facilities pre-drilled
foundation holes suitable for permanent installation on foundation shall also be supplied. The base
frame shall be manufactured with steel and shall be stress relieved. Manufacturer shall specify
what measures are taken to reduce the stresses.
BATTERIES
For electrical control ckt of 24V D.C. of suitable ampere hour complete with battery charger, leads
and wooden base plate and shall be placed inside canopy.
FUEL SYSTEM:
The engine shall be capable of running on High Speed Diesel fuel oil. The fuel consumption of the
engine at full, three quarters and half of its rated power output shall be indicated by the Contractor
in the bid. A fuel service buffer tank, common for two DG set with 990 litres capacity shall be
provided on a suitably fabricated steel platform. The tank shall be complete with level indicator
marked in litres, filling inlet with removable screen, an outlet, a drain plug, an air vent and
necessary piping. The fuel tank shall be painted with oil resistant paint. Service tank level switches
(2 Nos. per tank) for alarm & trip shall also be provided by the bidder. All pipe joints should be
brazed/welded. A hand pump for pumping the fuel into the fuel service tank together with
necessary pipes or tubing shall be provided.
SILENCER:
Exhaust silencer shall be residential type to reduce the noise level.
3.1.16 COOLING:
The diesel engine shall be radiator cooled.
Page 108 of 202

3.1.14 ENGINEGOVERNER:
The governor shall be Electronic type suitable for class A-1. This shall control the generator
frequency, and shall be suitable for operation as per the selected battery voltage ( 24 V DC. ). The
governor shall be provided with a manually adjustable over speed trip mechanism to automatically
shut-off the engine or the fuel supply if the set reached 120 % of rated speed. Governor shall be
capable to maintain zero speed rate or regulation and shall be Al type as per BS:5514 in order to
take care of heavy motor starting. It shall have necessary characteristics to maintain the speed
substantially constant even with sudden variation in load. However, a tripping shall be provided if
speed exceeds maximum permissible limit.
3.1.15 TURBOCHARGER:
It shall be of a robust construction, suitable of being driven by engine exhaust having a common
shaft for the turbine and blower. It shall draw air from filter of adequate capacity to suit the
requirements of the engine.
3.1.16 STARTERBATTERY:
The battery shall conform to the requirement of IS: 1651. Starting battery sets of 24 V, heavy duty
high performance approved make/quality shall be provided to enable crank & start the engine
even in cold/winter morning conditions. Type/voltage/AH capacity of same on 20 hour rated
discharge period shall be indicated in the offer. The battery shall be capable of performing at least
(6) six normal starts without recharging.
The battery shall be provided with 2 Nos. cables, minimum 1.5m long heavy duty PVC insulated
cabling with brazed tinned lug at one end and with brazed tinned brass terminal lug at battery
end - for connecting batteries to cranking system - with 0.25 m long inter battery connecting
cable.
The lugs shall be clearly stamped (+) or (-) and positive cable also red sleeved for easy
identification.
3.1.17 ENGINESAFEGAURD:
Safeguards shall be provided and arranged when necessary to stop the engine automatically by
the following:
Energising a solenoid coupled to the stop lever on the fuel injection pump rack.
De-energising the ―fuel on‖ solenoid
Energising the ―fuel - cut off‖ solenoid.
If any of the door opens.
The operation of the safeguard shall at the same time give individual warning of the failure by
illuminating an appropriate local visual indicator and remote alarm at generator panel.
The contactors, relays and other devices necessary for signal and control, for above purposes
shall be provided at Generator panel.
At the set at a easily accessible place an ―EMERGENCY STOP‖ mushroom head stay put type
P.B shall provided to stop the set in emergency mode.
The safe guard to ―STOP THE SET‖ shall stop the set irrespective of mode selection of the set viz
Auto, Manual or test for following cases, with simultaneous isolation of alternator ckt.
Emergency stop P.B‘s operation

Over speed.
Low lube oil pressure.
Page 109 of 202

3.1.14 SOUND ATTENUATING ACOUSTICENCLOSURE:
Sound Attenuating Acoustic Enclosure should have pleasant and aesthetical looks and should be
able to bring down the noise to 75 decibels when measured at a distance of 1 meter away from
theset.
The DG set should be supported on a base frame in an MS Sheet enclosure with suitable ducting
for air inlet and outlet. The door and enclosure should be given corrosion resistant treatment and
painted to be weatherproof and long lasting. Resin bonded Glass / Mineral / Rock wool of high
density (greater than 45 Kg / Cu. M) with minimum thickness of 75 mm covered with perforated
MS Sheet should be provided and covered with tissue paper. Enclosures should be provided with
durable locking system with doors duly gasketed with neoprene rubber.
Exhaust gases should be taken out from the DG Set by means of MS Pipe and a noise
suppressor.
Proper care should be taken for engine heat rejection in order to have safe working temperature
inside the enclosure by provision of fans etc, as required. The design aspect should ensure free
and uninterrupted flow of suction and exhaust air in order that the temperature rise of the
enclosure with respect to the ambient is less than 7C.
Radiator hot air shall be throughout on top instead of front. The arrangement to be made
accordingly in acoustic enclosure.
3.1.15 ERECTION, TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE OF DGTESTS:
The entire work of erection, testing and commissioning of equipment supplied under this package
shall be carried out by contractor and performance and guarantee tests to be conducted at site
are also included under the scope of this specification. For this purpose the contractor shall
depute suitable qualified technical supervisor to site on advance intimation to the Owner along
with all special testing equipment required for testing and performance and guarantee tests. The
supervisor(s) shall be responsible for the installation, testing, commissioning checks and
performance & guarantee tests mentioned in relevant clauses of this volume and the checks
recommend by thecontractor.
The successful contractor shall submit sufficiently in advance the bio-data of the supervisor giving
details of his experience for Owner‘s approval.
The contractor shall ensure that the equipment supplied by him are installed in a neat workman
like manner such that they are leveled, properly aligned and well oriented. The tolerances shall be
established in Contractors drawings and/or as stipulated by theOwner.
All special tools and tackles and spares required for erection, testing and commissioning of
equipment shall be supplied by the contractor. The bid shall include a list of these special tools,
tackles and spares along with their item wise prices. The total cost for these tools, tackles and
spares shall be included in the bid price.
Erection, testing and commissioning manuals and procedures shall be supplied, prior to dispatch
of theequipment.
The contractor shall ensure that the drawings, instruction and recommendations are correctly
followed while handling, setting, testing and commissioning the equipment.
COMMISSIONING CHECK TESTS / PERFORMANCE AND GAURANTEE TEST:
In addition to the checks and test recommended by the manufacturer, the contractor shall
supervise the following acceptance tests to be carried out on each test.
Page 110 of 202

LOAD TEST:
The engine shall be given test run for a period of at least 6 hours depending upon the actual
power factor of the load and set shall be subjected to the maximum achievable load without
exceeding the engine or alternatorcapacity.
This full load test is to be followed immediately by a 10% overload run for one hour. The
performance of the engine, alternator and exciter shall be satisfactory at the end of this overload
run.
At the end of the full-load run, and again at the end of the over-load run, tests for temperature rise
and insulation resistance of the alternator as specified shall be taken.
Full load test can be performed at site or at manufacturer‘s works before dispatch and shall be
monitored by the Client/Consultants/Representative.
During the load test half hourly records of the following shall be taken:
Ambient temperature
Exhaust temp when exhaust thermometer is fitted.
Cooling water temp at a convenient point adjacent to the water output from the engine
jacket.Lubricating oil temperature when an oil cooler is fitted.
Lubricating oil pressure.
Speed
Voltage, wattage and current output.
Oil tank level
Colourof exhaust gas Stored
diesel oiltemperature
INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST FOR ALTERNATOR:
Insulation resistance in mega-ohms between the coils and the frame of the alternator
whentested with a 500 Volts megger shall not be lessthan
IR = 2 x (rated voltage in KV) + 1
REGULATION TEST:
The automatic and manual regulation of the alternator load at half and full rated load shall be
tested for a nominal volts of 240 Volts, between phase to neutral and at 0.8 p. f. to verify the
requirements of voltage and frequency variation as per IS:4722.
SPEED AND GOVERNING:
The speed of the engine shall be verified to ensure that it conforms to the requirement of
BS:5514.
VIBRATION:
The vibrations shall be measured during full load test as well as during the overload test and the
limit shall be as per IS.
CHECK FOR FUEL CONSUMPTION:
A check of the fuel consumption shall be made through out the test run of full load and overload.
The D.G. Set shall generate 4 unit / litre under 40% to 100% load condition.
NOISE LEVEL :
Page 111 of 202

The equivalent À‘ weighted sound level measured at a distance of 1 meter horizontally from the
base of any equipment furnished and installed under these specifications expressed in decibels to
a reference of 0.0002 microbar, shall not exceed 75 DB.
3.2 CABLEWORK
3.2.1 DESCRIPTION OFWORK
Supply, laying, testing and commissioning of cables as per specifications, schedule of quantities
and drawings.
3.2.2 APPLICABLE CODES &STANDARDS
IS: 10242 (Part-3,Section-12) : Installation of cables for lowvoltage

System
IS: 7098 (Part-1&2)/IS: 5831/

IEC:60502/BS:6746/BS:5467 : Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC
sheathed cables.
Part-I : For working voltages up to&including

1100Volts.
Part-II: For working voltage from 3.3 KV upto &
including 11KV.
IS:10810 : Method of test forcables
IS:1255 : Code of practice for installation&

maintenance of power cables up to &
including 11 KVrating.
IS:8130/IEC:60228 : Conductors forcables
IS:10418 : Drums for electriccables.
IS: 2062, IS: 800,IS:816 : Structural weddingsteel
3.2.3 SUBMITTALS
Cable schedule as per site conditions & good for construction drawings.
Layout of various cables on cable tray / trench along with sections showing no. of cables, distance
between cables etc, size of cable trays etc.
Cable tray layout, as per site condition, duly coordinated with other services.
3.2.4 TESTREPORTS
Routine test certificates for each drum of cable brought to site.
3.2.5 SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Cable shall be supplied inspected, laid, tested and commissioned in accordance with drawings,
specifications, relevant Indian Standards Specifications and cable manufacturer's instructions.
The cable shall be delivered at site in original drums with manufacturer's name clearly written on
the drum.
Page 112 of 202

MATERIAL
The MV power cable of 1100 V. grade shall be FRLS Aluminium conductor armoured cable as per
relevant IS.
The MV control cables shall be PVC insulated copper conductor armoured cable.
The HT power cable of 11 KV grade shall be XLPE insulated Aluminium conductor armoured
cable.
3.2.6 INSTALLATION
GENERAL
The cable installation including necessary joints shall be carried out in accordance with the
specifications given herein. For details not covered in these specifications, I.S. 1255 shall be
followed. No straight through joint shall be permitted in the system. The cables shall be supplied
as per cable schedule submitted by the contractor & approved byEngineer-in-Charge.
3.2.7 PROXIMITY TO COMUNICATIONCABLES
Power and communication cables shall as far as possible cross at right angles. Where power
cables are laid in proximity to communication cables the horizontal and vertical clearances shall
not normally be less than 30 cm.
3.2.8 CABLE LAYING DIRECT INGROUND
GENERAL
This method shall be adopted where the cable route is through open country along roads/lanes
etc. and where no frequent excavation are encountered and where excavation is easily possible
without affecting otherservices.
TRENCHING
WIDTH OF TRENCH: - The width of trench shall be determined on the following basis:
a) The minimum width of trench for laying single cable shall be 35cm.
b) Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench in horizontal formation, the
width of trench shall be increased such that the inter-axial spacing between the cables,
except where otherwise specified shall be at least 20cm.
c) There shall be a clearance of at least 15 cm between axis of the end cables and the sides
of thetrench.
DEPTH OF TRENCH:-The depth of trench shall be determined on the following basis:
a) Where cables are laid in single tier formation, the total depth of trench shall not be less
than 75 cm. for cables up to 1.1 KV and 1.20 m for cables above 11KV.
b) When more than one tier of cables is unavoidable and vertical formation of laying is
adopted, depth of trench in a (i) above shall be increased by 30 cm. for each additional
tier to beformed.
EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES
a) The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines. Wherever there is a change
in direction, suitable curvature shall be provided complying with therequirements.
b) Where gradients and changes in depth are unavoidable, these shall begradual.
Page 113 of 202

c) Excavation shall be done by any suitable means-manual or mechanical. The excavated

soil shall be stacked firmly by the side of the trench such that it may not fall back into the
trench.
d) Adequate precautions shall be taken not to damage any existing cables, pipes or other
such installations in the proposed route during excavation. Wherever bricks, tiles or
protective covers or bare cables are encountered, further excavation shall not be carried
without the approval of theEngineer-in-Charge.
e) Existing property exposed during trenching shall be temporarily supported or propped

adequately as directed by the Engineer in charge. The trenching in such cases shall be
done in short lengths, necessary pipes laid for passing cables therein and the trench
refilled.
f) If there is any danger of a trench collapsing and endangering adjacent structures, the
sides should be well shored up with timbering and/or sheeting as the excavation
proceeds. Where necessary, these may even be left in places when back filling the
trench.
g) Excavation through lawns shall be done in consultation with the staff of the
department/Ownerconcerned.
h) The bottom of the trench shall be level and free from stone, brick bats etc. The trench
shall then be provided with a layer of clean, dry sand cushion of not less than 8 cm. in
depth.
LAYING OF CABLE IN TRENCH
a) At the time of issue of cable for laying, the cores shall be tested for continuity and
insulationresistance.
b) The cable drum shall be properly mounted on jacks or on a cable wheel, at a suitable
location, making sure that the spindle, jack etc. are strong enough to carry the weight of
the drum without failure and that the spindle is horizontal in the bearings so as to prevent
the drum creeping to one side whilerotating.
c) The cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and uniformly without jerks and
strains. The entire cable length shall as far as possible be pulled ofin one stretch.
However, where this is not possible the remainder of the cable may be removed by
'Flaking' i.e. by making one long loop in the reversedirection.
d) i) After the cable has been uncoiled and laid into the trench over the rollers, the cable
shallbeliftedslightlyovertherollersbeginningfromoneendbyhelpersstandingabout
10 m apart and drawn straight. The cable should then be taken off the rollers by
additional helpers lifting the cable and then laid in a reasonably straight line.
ii)For short runs and sizes up to 50 Sq. mm of cables up to 1.1 KV grade, any other
suitable method of direct handling and laying can be adopted with the prior approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
e) When the cable has been properly straightened, the cores shall be tested for continuity
and insulation resistance. In case of PVC cables, suitable moisture seal tape shall be
usedfor thispurpose.
f) i) Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation shall have a covering of clean, dry sand
of not less than 17 cm above the base cushion of sand before the protective cover islaid.
ii) In the case of vertical multi-tier formation after the first cable has been laid, a sand
cushion of 30 cm shall be provided over the initial bed before the second tier is laid. If
additional tiers are formed, each of the subsequent tiers also shall have a sand cushion of
30 cm. as stated above. The top most cable shall have a final sand covering not less than
17 cm. before the protective cover is laid.
Page 114 of 202

g) At the time of original installation, approximately 3 m of surplus cable shall be left on each
end the cable and on each side of underground joints (Straight through/Tee/Termination)
and at entries and places as may be decided by the Engineer-in-Charge. The surplus
cable shall be left in the form of a loop. Where there are long runs of cable length loose
cable may be left at suitable intervals as specified by theEngineer-in-Charge.
h) A final protection to cables shall be laid in accordance with Clause j to provide warning to
future excavators of the presence of the cable and also to protect the cable against
accidental mechanical damage by pick-axe blowsetc.
i) Unless otherwise specified, the cables shall be protected by second class bricks of not
less than 20 cm x 10 cm x 10 cm (nominal size) as per CPWD Building Specification or
protection covers placed on top of the sand, (bricks to be laid breadth wise) for the full
length of the cable to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. Where more than one
cable is to be laid in the same trench, this protective covering shall cover all the cables
and project at least 5 cm. over the sides of the endcables.
BACK FILLING
a) The trenches shall be back-filled with excavated earth free from stones or other sharp
edged debris and shall be rammed and watered, if necessary, in successive layers not
exceeding 30 cm. Unless otherwise specified, a crown of earth not less than 50 mm. in
thecentre and tapering towards the sides of the trench shall be left to allow for subsidence.
The crown of earth however should not exceed 10 cm. so as not to be a hazard to
vehicular traffic. The temporary re-instatements of roadways should be inspected at
regular intervals, particularly during the wet weather, and any settlement should be made
good. Further trenches cut through roadways or other paved areas shall be restored to the
same density and material as the surrounding area and repaved in accordance with the
relevant Specifications to the satisfaction of theEngineer-in-Charge.
a) Where road berm or lawns have been cut or kerb stones displaced, the same shall be
repaired and made good except turfing/asphalting to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-
Charge and all surplus earth or rock removed to places asspecified.
ROUTE MARKERS:
a) Route markers shall be provided along straight runs of the cables at locations approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge and generally at intervals not exceeding 100 m. Markers
shallalsobe provided to identify change in the direction of the cable route and also for
location of every undergroundjoint.
b) Route markers shall be made out of 100 mm x 100 mm x 5 mm GI/Aluminium plate,

welded or bolted on to 35 mm x 35 mm x 6 mm angle iron 60 cm. long. Such plate
markers shall be mounted parallel to and 0.5 m or so away from the edge of thetrench.
Alternatively cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate
of 20 mm nominal size) marker 60 cm x 60 cm 10 cm in size shall be laid flat and centred
over the cable. The concrete markers unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer-in-
Charge shall project over the surrounding surface so as to make the cable route easily
identifiable.
c) The work 'cable' and other details such as voltage grading, size etc. as furnished by the
Engineer-in-Charge shall be inscribed on themarker.
LAYING IN PIPES/CLOSED DUCTS:
In location such as road crossing, entry to building, on poles, in paved areas etc. cables shall be
laid in pipes or closed ducts.
Page 115 of 202

GI or Hume Pipes (spun reinforced concrete pipes) shall be used for such purposes. In the case
of new construction, pipes as required shall be laid along with the Civil works and jointed
according to the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge as the case may be. The size of pipe shall
be as indicated in the electrical drawings. GI pipe shall be laid directly in ground without any
special bed. Hume pipe (Spun reinforced concrete pipe) shall be laid over 10 cm. thick cement
concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand: 10 graded stone aggregate of 40mm nominal size)
bed, after which it shall be completely embedded in concrete. No sand cushioning or tiles need be
used in such situations. Unless otherwise specified, the top surface of pipes shall be at a minimum
depth of 1mtr. from the ground level when laid under roads, pavementetc.
Where steel pipes are employed for protection of single core cables feeding AC load, the pipe
should be large enough to contain both cables in the case of single phase system and all cables in
the case of poly phase system.
The pipes on road crossing shall preferably be on the skew to reduce the angle of bends as the
cable enters and leaves the crossings. This is particularly important for high voltage cables.
Manholes of adequate size as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be provided to facilitate

feeding/drawing in of cables and to provide working space for persons. They shall be covered by
suitable manhole covers with frame of proper design. The construction of manholes and providing
the cover is not in the scope of this Contract and shall be got executed and paid for by the
Engineer-in-Charge through another agency.
Pipes shall be continuous and clear of debris or concrete before cable is drawn. Sharp edges at
ends shall be smoothened to prevent injury to cable insulation or sheathing.
Pipes for cable entries to the building shall slope downwards from the building and suitably sealed
to prevent entry of water inside the building. Further the mouth of the pipes at the building end
shall be suitably sealed to avoid entry of water. This seal in addition to being waterproof shall also
befireproof.
All chases and passages necessary for layingof service cable connections to buildings shall be cut
as required and made good to the original finish and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in- Charge.
Cable grips/draw wires and winches etc. may be employed for drawing cables through
pipes/closed ducts etc.
3.2.9 LAYING ON CABLETRAY
Cables, where indicated in approved shop drawings, shall be laid on overhead cable trays which
are suspended from ceiling or supported from wall, by anchor fasteners as required.
The Contractor shall provide for all accessories for the installation of the cable trays, such as
bends, tees, reducers coupler plates, and structural steel members (comprising of channels,
angles, flats, rods) for structural supports for cable trays etc.
CABLE TRAY MOUNTING
Unless otherwise specifically noted on the relevant layout drawing, all cable tray mounting works
to be carried out ensuring thefollowing:
a) Cable tray mounting arrangement type to be as marked on layoutdrawing.
b) Assembly of tray mounting structure shall be supplied, fabricated, erected & painted by the
contractor.
c) Cable tray running along the wall should be supported at intervals not exceeding 1.5 m. In
case of branching, there should be a support on all branches at a distance of 30 cm from the point
of branching. Support should not be less than 40 mm x 40 mm x 5 mm MS angle-secured in an
approved manner whereruns are along the walls. In case of ceiling suspended cabletray
Page 116 of 202

horizontal supports made of 40 mm x 40 mm 5 mm MS angle iron shall be provided. The

horizontal interval between two such supports shall be 1.0 meter. These supports shall be
suspended from C.I. boxes or suitable approved suspension devices such as dash fastener of
suitable sizes in the ceiling by means of 10 mm diameter GI threaded rods. All above mounting
accessories form part of installation of cabletrays.
TESTING & COMMISSIONING
INSPECTION
All cables shall be inspected upon receipt at site and checked by the Engineer-in-Charge for any
damage during transit.
TESTING
i. All 650/1100 Volt grade cables before layingshall be tested with a 500 V megger or with a
2,500/5,000 V megger for cables of higher voltages. The cable cores shall be tested for continuity,
absence of cross phasing, insulation resistance to earth/sheath/amour and insulation resistance
betweenconductors.
ii. All cables shall be subject to above mentioned tests during laying, before covering the cables by
protective covers and back filling and also before the jointingoperations.
COMPLETION PLAN AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
a) After completion of the work the Contractor shall draw completion plans to a suitable scale and
shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge. The completion plans shall, inter-alia, give the following
details
i ) Layout of cable work

ii) Length, size, type and grade of cables.
Iii) Method of laying i.e. direct in ground, in pipes etc.
iv) Location of each joint with jointing methodfollowed.
v) Route marker and joint maker with respect to permanent land marks available atsite.
vi) Wherever the previously laid cable is cut and additional joints are introduced etc., the cable
records shall suitably beamended.
TESTING OF CABLES
The cables shall be tested before and after laying. The Megger value in normal dry weather shall
be 50 Mega ohm for 1.1 KV grade cable. This value shall be 100 Mega ohm for 11 KV grade
cable.
CABLE TAGS
Cable tags shall be made out of 2mm thick aluminium sheets. Each tag shall be 2‖ in dia or 3‖ x 3‖
square with one hole of 2.5mm dia, 6 mm below the periphery, or as approved by Consultant.
Cable designations are to be punched with letters / number punches and the tags are to be tied to
cables with piano wires of approve quality & size. Tags shall be tied inside the panels beyond the
glanding as well as above the glands at cable entries. Along trays tags are to be tied at all bends.
On straight lengths, tags shall be provided at every 5 meters.
Cables shall be secured to cable trays with 3mm thick x 25mm wide aluminium strips/suitable GI
clamp, or as approved by Consultant, at 1000 mm intervals and screwed by means of rust proof
screws and washers, of adequate but not excessive lengths. Cable trays for horizontal runs
suspended from the ceiling will be supported with mild steel straps or brackets, at 1000 mm
intervals and the overall tray arrangement shall be of a rigid construction. External cabling route
marker with C.I. plate marked with ―DANGER 1.1 KV CABLE‖ with 0.6 meter long GI angle iron
grouting bracket including 1:3:6 ratio cement concrete base block of minimum size 200 x 200 x
350 mm to be provided or as approved by Elect. SupplyCompany.
Page 117 of 202

3.3 CABLETRAY
All cables trays shall be made of M.S. sheet.
Cable trays shall be complete with bends, joints, coupler plates and accessories as may be
required for joining the cable trays. The bends, Tee joint, Cross joint for all sizes of cable tray shall
be factory fabricated.
Cable trays shall be either perforated or ladder type as called for in the schedule of quantities.
3.3.1 PERFORATED CABLETRAY
Standard dimensions of perforated cable trays shall be as follows:
1. Width : 100 mm to 1200mm

2. Length : 2500mm
3. Thickness : 2mm up to 750 mm widthand
3mm from 900mm to 1200 mm
4. Collarheight : 50 mm up to 600 mm and 75 mm from 750 mmto
1200mm
3.3.2 LADDER TYPE CABLETRAY
Standard dimensions of ladder type cable trays shall be as follows:
SIZEOFTRAY SIZE OFMAINCHANNEL SIZE OF RUNG/SPACING

BETWEEN RUNGS
900mm to 1200mm 25 x100 x 25 x 3mm 20 x 50 x 20 x 2 @ 200C/C

Up to 750mm 25 x 75 x 25 x 2mm 20 x 50 x 20 x 2 @ 200C/C
Sizes of angle for cable tray supports shall be minimum 40 x 40 x 5 mm up to 600mm & 50 x 50 x
5mm minimum as specified in the drawings/schedule of quantities for sizes above 600 mm.
Hangers shall be of minimum 10 mm dia steel round bars up to 600 mm & 12 mm dia steel from
750 mm to 1200 mm as specified in the drawings/schedule of quantities. All the support shall be
G.I.
Fixing arrangement shall be as approved by the Consultant.
Hardware to be used in cable tray system shall be galvanized or zinc passivated.
The testing on galvanized material if required shall be carried out as per IS: 2633, amended to
date.
3.4 RACEWAY
All raceway shall be of 1.6mm/2.0mm thick G.P. sheet as specified in BOQ. The raceway shall
have Z- section, hole with thread for cover screw, coupler plate, cover, junction box, fly cover etc
as required. The screw for cover fixing shall be counter sunk type. The size of raceway shall be as
follow.
WIDTH HEIGHT THICKNESS COVERTHICKNESS

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
50 40 1.6 1.6
75 40 1.6 1.6
100 40 1.6 2.0
150 40 2.0 2.0
200 40 2.0 2.0
300 40 2.0 2.0
Page 118 of 202

3.5 SAFETYMATERIALS
3..5.1DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. InsulationMats
B. First Aid charts and First AidBox
C. DangerPlate
D. FireExtinguishers
E. FireBuckets
F. ToolBox
G. CautionBoard
H. KeyBoard
3.5.2 APPLICABLE CODES &STANDARDS
A. IS : 15652 Insulationmats
B. IS : 2878 Portable C02 FireExtinguisher
C. IS : 2546 : FireBuckets
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National ElectricalCode.
3.5.3 SUBMITTALS
A. ProductCatalogues.
3.5.4 SPECIFICATION
3.5.5 INSULATIONMATS
A. Insulation mats conforming to IS: 15652 shall be provided in front of main switch boards and
other control equipment asspecified.
3.5.6 FIRST AID CHART AND FIRST AIDBOX
A. Charts (one in English, one in Hindi, one in Regional Language), displaying methods of giving
artificial respiration to a recipient of electrical shock shall be prominantly provided at appropriate
places. Standard First Aid Boxes containing materials as prescribed by St. John Ambulance
brigade or Indian Red Cross should be provided insub-station.
3.5.7 DANGERPLATE
A. Danger plates shall be provided on HV and LV equipments. LV danger notice plate shall be 200
mm x 200 mm made of mild steel atleast 2 mm thick vitreous enamelled white on both sides and
with inscriptions in signal red colour on front side asrequired.
B. Size of the HV Danger Notice plate shall be 250 mm x 200 mm and 2 mmthick.
3.5.8 FIREEXTINGUISHERS
A. Portable CO2 conforming to IS: 2878-1976 dry chemical (conforming to IS 2171-1976)

extinguishers shall be installed in the sub-station at suitable places (like HT/LT panel rooms) as
specified.
B. Foam type fire extinguisher shall be installed in TransformerRoom.
3.5.9 FIREBUCKETS
A. Fire buckets conforming to IS: 2546-1974 shall be installed with the suitable stand for storage of
water andsand.
Page 119 of 202

3.5.10 TOOLBOX
A. A standard tool box containing necessary tools required for operation and maintenance shall be
provided insub-station.
3.5.11 CAUTIONBOARD
A. Necessary number of caution boards such as "Man on Line" "Don't switch on" etc. shall be
available in thesub-station.
B. The Caution Board shall be of size 300 mm x 200mm made of mild steel, 2mm thick, vitreous
enamelled white on both sides and with inscriptions in original red colour on front side asrequired.
KEY BOARD
A. A key board of required size shall be provided at a proper place containing castel keys, and all
other keys of sub-station and alliedareas.
B. The Key board shall be made of 12mm thick first class teak wood shall be of size 400 mm x
300m and with adequate depth to hold the keys. It shall be provided with a lockable type hinged
glass door made of 12 mm. thick first class teakwood frame with 3 mm thick sheet glass fixed with
piano hinges. The key board shall enough number of hooks for hanging the castle keys and all
other keys of the sub-station and allied areas. It shall be painted with one coat of wood primer and
two coats of white enamelpaint.
3.6 PIPING WORK (D.G. FLUE GAS EXHAUSTSYSTEM)
3.6.1 SCOPE OFWORK
The scope of this section comprises supply, installation, testing & commissioning of D.G. Flue
Gas Exhaust System pipes & pipe fittings etc. as detailed below in specifications. All pipes and
fittings etc. shall conform to relevant Indianstandards.
3.6.2 D.G. FLUE GAS EXHAUSTPIPING
D.G. Exhaust pipes shall be M.S. Black pipes up to 150 mm and MS ERW Black Pipes above
150 mm and it shall conform to IS:1239 (Part 1) -1991 & IS:3589 – 1991 Grade 330 with latest
amendments.
All piping and their steel supports shall be thoroughly cleaned and primer coated before
installation.
3.6.3 PIPEFITTINGS
The pipe fittings for screwed piping shall be malleable iron and for piping with welded joints shall
of weldable quality. Also the fittings shall be suitable for same pressure ratings as for the piping
system.
All bends up to sizes 150 mm dia shall be ready made of heavy duty wrought steel of appropriate
class.
All bends in sizes 200 mm and above shall be fabricated from the same dia and thickness of pipe
in at least four sections and having a center in radius of at least 1.5 times diameter of pipes.
Fittings such as tees, reducers etc. shall be fabricated from the same pipe and its length shall be
at least twice the diameter of the pipe.
The dead ends shall be formed with flanged joints & shall have 6mm thick blank between flange
pair for 150 mm and over.
Page 120 of 202

3.6.4 FLANGES
All flanges shall be of mild steel as per IS : 6392 / 71 (with latest amendments) & shall be slip on
type welded to the pipes. Flanged thickness shall be to suit Class II pressure.
Flanged pair shall be used on all such equipments which are required to be isolated or removed
for service.
3.6.5 PIPINGINSTALLATION
The drawings attached with this tender indicate schematically the sizes, location of pipes &
vertical shafts. The contractor, on award of the work, shall prepare detailed shop drawings based
on tender drawings, showing the cross-section, longitudinal sections, details of fittings and all
pipesupports.
Piping shall be properly supported on, or suspended from, stands, clamps, springs, hangers as
specified and as required at site. The contractor shall adequately design all the brackets, saddles,
anchors, clamps and hangers and shall be responsible for their structural sufficiency. A set of
piping support calculations shall be submitted for structural engineer review and approval before
site installation wherever critical & required.
Pipe supports shall be of steel, adjustable for height and primer coated with rust preventive paint
and finish coated black. Where pipe and clamps are of dissimilar materials, a gasket shall be
provided in between. Spacing of pipe supports shall not exceed the following:
Pipe Sizes Spacing Between Supports Rod Size

Up to 12 mm 1.2 Meter 8 mm
15 to 25 mm 1.8 Meter 8 mm
32 to 150 mm 2.4 Meter 10 mm
Above 150 mm ---------As Per Approved Shop Drawing------
Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be plumb and parallel to wall. Pipes shall be supported
on all floors. MS cleats shall be welded on pipes and rest on MS channel placed on the floor with
15 mm thick resistoflex pads between the cleat and channel. U clamps with resistoflex sheet shall
be provided to keep the pipe in position.
T heading in exhaust piping shall be avoided.
Pipe sleeves at least 3 mm thick, 50 mm / 100 mm larger in diameter than exhaust pipes
respectively shall be provided wherever pipes pass through retaining wall and slab. Annular
space shall be filled with fibreglass and finished with retainer rings welded on the ends of the
sleeve. All pipes passing through the retaining wall shall be provided with suitable water proofing
compound.
Wherever pipes pass through the brick or masonry / slab openings, the gaps shall be sealed with
fire sealant.
The Contractor shall make sure that the clamps, brackets, clamp saddles and hangers provided
for pipe supports are adequate. Piping layout shall take due care for expansion and contraction in
pipes and include expansion joints where required.
All pipes shall be accurately cut to the required size in accordance with relevant BIS Codes,edges
beveled and burrs removed before laying. Open ends of the piping shall be closed as the pipe is
installed to avoid entrance of foreign matter. Where reducers are to be made in horizontal runs,
eccentric reducers shall be used for the piping to drain freely. In other locations, concentric
reducers may beused.
Page 121 of 202

3.7 PIPE INSULATION (D.G. FLUE GAS EXHAUST PIPINGSYSTEM)
3.7.1 SCOPE OFWORK
The scope of this section comprises supply, installation, testing & commissioning of D.G. Flue
Gas Exhaust Pipe Insulation and Aluminium Cladding as detailed in BOQ. All insulation material
and aluminium cladding shall conform to relevant Indianstandards.
3.8 11KV VACUUMCIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL BOARD (INDOOR TYPE)
3.8.1 GENERAL
Vacuum Circuit Breaker shall be incorporated in H.T. Panel wherever specified. VCB‘s shall be
suitable for operation on 11KV, 3 phase, 50Hz, AC supply.
3.8.2 CODES ANDSTANDARDS
The 11 KV VCB Panel shall comply with the following standards as amended up to date.
IS: 2516 (Part I –Set3) :Indian Electricity Supplyandregulations.

IEC 60298& IEC60694
IS: 3427 &IS 12729 : Vacuum CircuitBreakers
IS:2544 : Bus BarSupports
IS: 2705 / IEC– 185 : CurrentTransformer
IS: 3516 / IEC– 186 : PotentialTransformer
3.8.3 RATING
The rating of the vacuum circuit breaker shall be as per the drawings and schedule of quantities.
The rated/breaking capacity of the breaker shall be 350 MVA (18.4 KA RMS) at 11 KV. The rated
making capacity shall be as per the relevant standards.
3.8.4 ACCESSORIES
Circuit Breakers shall be provided with the following accessories.
i. Auxiliary Switch with minimum 6 NO+ 6 NC auxiliarycontacts.
ii. Shunt TripCoil
iii. Mechanical OperationCounter
iv. Spring Charging motor and handle for manualcharging
3.8.5 SUBMITTALS
SHOP DRAWING AND TECHNICAL DATA
The tenderer shall furnish relevant technical data on breakers and associated equipment along
with the offer.
The Contractorshallfurnish relevant descriptive and illustrativeliteratureon breakersand

associated equipment and the following for approval before manufacture of thepanel.
a) Complete assembly drawings of the panel showing plan, elevation and typical section views
and locations of cable boxes, bus bar chamber, metering and relay compartment and
terminal blocks for external wiringconnections.
Page 122 of 202

b) Typical and recommended schematic diagrams for control and supervision of circuitbreakers.
c) Foundation plan showing location of foundation channels, anchor bolts and anchors, floor
plans and openings for cablesetc.
d) Type test certificates along with oscillograms for breakers of identicaldesign.
e) All drawings and data shall be inEnglish.
3.8.6 TYPE ANDCONSTRUCTION
The metal clad panel shall be made out of CRCA sheet steel. The steel work should have
undergone a rigorous rust proofing process comprising alkaline degreasing, descaling in dilute
sulphuric acid and recognized phosphating process and shall then be given powder coating
(Electrostatic) paint of manufacturer‘s standard shade. The Switch Board Shall be fully extensible
with following compartment.
a. Circuit BreakerCompartment
b. Bus barCompartment
c. CT and Cable TerminationCompartment
The compartments shall be dust & vermin proof and safe to touch. A separate metering chamber
for fixing the necessary instrumentation metering and protective equipment shall be mounted on
the top / bottom of the panel at the front. The VCB shall consist of three air insulated poles
incorporating mechanism of interrupters and suitable clearance between phases. The body of
interrupters shall be made of nickel chromium steel supported on insulators made out of
metalizedaluminumoxide. The contacts shall be of chromium copper and butt shaped. Vacuum
circuit breaker shall be mounted on truck or a carriage mechanism. The drawoutcarriage shall
have two position for the circuit breaker viz isolated/test & service position. Bus bars shall be
insulated type made of high conductivity copper supported on cast epoxy mono block designed
to withstand full short circuit currents and shall be provided all along the length of the H.T.board.
It shall be horizontal draw out & isolation type, fully interlocked, with dust and vermin proof
construction, suitable for outdoor installation. The panel shall be supplied with the manufacturer‘s
test certificates. Certificates with date of manufacture and shall be complete in all respects as per
details given in the bill of quantities. The switchgear constructions shall be such that the
operating personnel are not endangered by breaker operation and internal explosions, and the
front of the panel shall be specially designed to withstand these. Pressure relief flaps shall be
provided for safely venting out gases produced inside the high voltage compartment, bus bar
compartment and termination compartment. These flaps shall be vented upwards and cannot be
opened from outside. These relief flaps shall be of such construction as not to permit ingress of
dust/water in harmful quantities under normal working conditions. Enclosure shall be constructed
with sheet steel of at least 2.0mm thickness. It shall have a rigid, smooth, leveled, flawlessfinish.
Total height of the H.T. Panel board shall be 2750mm approximately and width 650mm –
800MM. (approx.). On the incoming breaker panel, a 100VA burden and Class I accuracy
potential
transformer 11KV/3 /110V/3 with LT fuses shall be provided. These shall be three single phase
PTs cast resin insulated type. Adequate space at the rear of the panel shall be provided for
termination of power & control cables. The panel shall be provided with suitable terminating
arrangement for termination of cables. The making contact arms (upper & lower) of the circuit
breaker shall be encased in polypropylene tubes. Penetration type bushings shall be provided in
the bus bars & cable compartment for the fixed contacts. Safety shutters shall be provided to
cover up the fixed high voltage contacts on bus bar and cable sides when the carriage is moved
to Isolated/Disconnected position. The shutters shall move automatically with the movement of
the draw out carriage. It shall, however, be possible to open the shutters of bus bars side and
cable sideindividually.
Page 123 of 202

Mechanically operated circuit breaker auxiliary switches of minimum 6 NO + 6 NC ways, shall be

provided for control and indication purposes. Control wiring shall be done by using 1.5 sq. mm,
1.1KV grade stranded copper PVC insulated cable. All control fuses shall be HRC link type.
L.T. Terminal blocks for control wiring shall be clamp type suitable for connection of only 2 wires
per terminal and shall be 650 V grade. The L.T. control circuit shall be routine tested to withstand
2.0KV for one minute. Bus bar compartment shall be provided at the rear. Electrolytic copper bus
bars shall be of rectangular cross section and insulated. Bus bars shall be supported properly by
cast epoxy resin insulators so as to withstand thermal and dynamic stresses during system
short circuits. Bus bars shall be provided with necessary color coding for phases indication. The
bus bars shall be designed to withstand a temperature rise of 60 deg. C above and ambient
temperature of 45 deg. C. The standard clearance between phase bus bars to bemaintained.
3.8.7 BUS BAR ANDINSULATORS

Bus bars and connections shall be of high conductivity electrolytic copper conforming to relevant
IS standards. They shall be adequately supported on epoxy insulators to withstand electrical and
mechanical stresses due to specified short circuit currents. Bus bar cross section shall be uniform
throughout the length of switch board. Contact surface at all joints shall be properly cleaned and
No-oxide grease applied to ensure an efficient and trouble free connections. All bolted joints shall
have necessary washers for maintaining adequate contact pressure. All connection hardware
shall have high corrosion resistance. Bus bar insulators shall be of track-resistance, high
strength, non-hygroscopic, non-combustible type & shall be suitable to withstand stresses due to
over voltages and short circuit current. Bus bar shall be supported on the insulator such that the
conductor expansion and contraction are allowed without straining the insulators. The
temperatures of the bus bars and all other equipments, when carrying the rated of relevant Indian
Standards, duly considering the specified ambienttemperature.
3.8.8 EARTHING AND PROTECTIVEEARTHING
Copper earthing bus shall be provided. It shall be bolted/ welded to the frame work of each panel.
The earth bus shall have sufficient cross time fault currents to earth without exceeding the
allowable temperature rise. Suitable arrangement shall be provided at each end of the earth for
bolting Owner‘s earthing conductors and earth bus shall run inside at the back of the panel for
entire length. Facilities shall be provided for integral earthing of bus bars & feeder circuit.
3.8.9 METERING ANDPROTECTION
The VCB Panel Board shall be provided with cast resin current transformers for metering and
protection. The CT‘s shall conform in all respects to IS 2705-1964 Part-I, II and III. These shall
have accuracy class of 1.0 for metering of 5P10 for protection. Potential transformers shall be
epoxy cast resin type & conform to specifications of IS: 3156-1965 Part-I, II & III and shall be
class-1. Electronic digital type Ammeter and voltmeter to be installed on panel.Electronic type
digital energy analyzer having parameter of KW, KWH power factor, frequency etc. with 30 days
memory shall be provided. All meters shall be tested for 2000V for 1 minute and shall be 96mm
square pattern, flush mounting type with necessary selector switches. Necessary indicating lamps
of low voltage type with built in resistors shall be provided (maximum wattage 2.5W). The
electronic digital types IDMT relay (2 O/C + 1 E/F) with high set element to be provided as per
B.O.Q. description.
3.8.10 INTERLOCKING, SAFETY AND OPERATINGMECHANISM
Vacuum Circuit Breaker shall have electrically operated mechanism for spring charging. These
operating mechanisms shall be of the stored energy type. In the closed state of the breaker, the
energy stored in the springs shall be suitable for O-C-O duty. The draw out carriage cannot be
moved from either test/disconnected to service position or vice versa, when the circuit breaker is
‗On‘. The circuit breaker cannot be switched ‗ON‘ when the carriage is in any position between
test & service position. The front door of the panel cannot be opened when the breaker is in
service position or in an intermediate position. The low voltage plug & socket cannot be
disconnected in any position except test/isolated position. The door cannot be closed unless the
LV plug has been fitted. It shall be possible to mechanically close and trip the circuit breaker
throughpushbuttonswiththecircuitbreakerinservicepositionandthedoorclosed.Individual
Page 124 of 202
explosion vents shall be provided for breaker, bus bar, cable chambers on the top of the panel to
let out the gases under pressure generated during an unlikely event of a fault inside the panel.
Circuit Breaker & sheet metal enclosure shall be fully earthed. Self locking shutters shall be
provided which close automatically and shall be interlocked with the movement of the drawout
carriage mechanism.
3.8.11 ADDITIONALACCESSORIES
The loose items to be supplied with the 11KV VCB Panel Board shall comprise of the following:
a. MaintenanceManual.
b. Racking in/outhandle.
c. Foundationbolts.
d. One number EarthingTrolley.
3.8.12 CONTROLSUPPLY
a. The closing circuit, indication circuit, space heater & other auxiliary supply shall be at
tripping circuit shall be at 230 Volt A.C. through 11000 / 230 Volt cast resintransformer.
b. The tripping circuit shall be at 24 Volt D.C. through a powerpack.
3.8.13 INSTALLATION
a. 11 KV switch board shall be installed and leveled on the foundation as per

manufacturer's drawing. Bus bar connections shall be checked after installation. Cable
end boxes shall be sealed after the cable work is completed to prevent absorption of
moisture.
b. 15 mm thick rubber matting of an approved make shall be provided in front of the full
length of the switch board to cover the operating areas and to avoid danger of electric
shock during operation of switch board. The width of the matting shall be 914.4 mm. The
rubber mat shall withstand 11000 volts for 1minute.
3.8.14 TESTS
FACTORY TESTS
The circuit breakers panel shall be subjected to routine tests at manufacturers works in
accordance with the details specified in the relevant IS specifications.
The vendor shall submit the type test certificate for following along with the offer.
a. Temperature risetest.
b. Impulse &power frequency voltagetest
c. Short time current test on circuitbreaker.
SITE TEST
GENERAL
1. Verification for completion of equipment, physical damage/deformities.
2. Alignment of panel, interconnection of bus bars & tightness of bolts & connection etc.
3. Interconnection of panel earth bus bar with plant earthinggrid.
4. Inter panel wiring between transportsections.
5. Cleanliness of insulators and general Cleanliness of panel to remove traces of dust,

wateretc.
6. Control wiring verification after interconnecting ofpanel.
Page 125 of 202

7. Check for free movement of circuit breaker, lubrication of moving part & other Parts as
per manufacturersmanual.
8. Manual/Electrical operations of the breaker and Functional test as perdrawings.
9. Meggar before the Hi Pottest.
10. H.T. Test - Hi Pot test (Power frequency withstand test for one minute at 28KV RMS). At
site Hi Pot test is carried out at 80% of 28KV RMSvalue.
11. Meggar after the Hi Pottest.
12. CT/PT ratio/polarity primary injectiontest.
13. Secondary injection test on relays to practicalcharacteristics.
These tests as per the clauses above will be witnessed by the owner/consultant at the
works for which necessary information has to be given in advance to the owner/
consultant.
3.9 11KV DISTRIBUTIONTRANSFORMER-
GENERAL
The transformer shall comply with the latest edition of the relevant Indian Standards / Manual.
The transformer shall be copper double wound core type, oil natural air natural cooled suitable for
indoor installation. The transformer shall be designed and manufactured as per IS – 2026 & 9815
with up to date amendments. Transformer shall be suitable for continuous rating as stated in
BOQ and on drawings. The transformer winding shall be of electrolytic copper conductors
covered with a special material having high tensile and dielectric strength. The Core shall be
made up of high grade low loss cold rolled grain oriented steel sheets (CRGO). Core shall be
treated with high temperature resistant paint to prevent corrosion at edges of the core plates.
Distribution Transformer with on load tap changer, Balanced supply and unbalancedload.
INPUT : 11 KV, 3 Ph, 3 Wire, 50Hz.
OUTPUT : 415 V, 3 Ph. 4 Wire, 50Hz.
RATING : 750KVA
VECTORGROUP : Dyn-11
OLTC : +5.0% TO -15.0% IN STEP OF1.25%
AMBIENTTEMP : -5 TO + 50 degreecentigrade
OILTEMPRISE : 40 deg. C. over a maximum ambient of 50deg.C. WINDING
TEMPRISE : 50 deg. C. over a maximum ambient of 50deg.C. WINDINGTEMP
: Winding temp. indicator with NO/NC contact tobeprovided.
OILTEMP : Oil temp. indicator with NO/NC contact to beprovided.
BUCHOLLZRELAY : Buchholz Relay with NO/NC contact tobeprovided.
IMPEDANCE : 5.0%
LOADLOSSES : AS per ECBC 2007(Revised)
Page 126 of 202

TANKS & RADIATORS
Tanks shall be of MS. plates and structures, electrically welded. The construction shall be robust
and substantial, suitable for road/rail transport and to withstand vibration. Radiator tubes shall be
electrical resistance welded type, round or elliptical or rectangular. They may be welded to the
transformer tank or in case of very large sizes to separate detachable radiator banks connected
through intermediate leak proof valves. Detachable radiator banks shall have top and bottom
headers with flanged connections, with drain and vent fittings. Tanks shall be provided with lifting
lugs and jacking lugs. Inspection hole with cover should also be provided for large transformers.
Oil conservators shall be mounted on brackets attached to the top cover on tank. Dimensions of
the conservator shall be such as to allow change in volume of oil due to change in temperature
from 0oC to 100oC.
Tanks shall be thoroughly cleaned, degreased and sand blasted inside and outside. A coat of
rust resisting primer shall immediately be given on outside surface. Inside surface shall be
painted with oil resistance enamel paint. Tank and radiators shall be hydraulically pressure
tested. Tanks shall also be tested for fullvacuum.
CORES
Cores shall be built from cold rolled grain oriented silicone steel laminations. The core
laminations shall be insulated from each other by suitable high temperature resistant, oil proof,
adherent coating materials. Core clamps and clamping bolts shall be heavily insulated from the
corelaminations.
The insulations of core bolt shall be minimum of class 'A'. The bottom and top frames shall be
connected with the tie rods to make a complete structure rigid for carrying the weight of core-coil
assembly without unduly stressing the laminations or windings. Lifting eyes shall be provided on
the frame for removal of core assembly from the tank. Completed core shall be flash tested for
insulation with 2500 Volts between the core and each of the clamps or core bolts (core being
connected to earth).
All the core frames shall be bonded together with two metallic strips and connected to the tank for
earthing to ensure earth return and operation of protective gear in the event of a fault. Lifting
eyes (or any other provision) for lifting the core from the tank shall beprovided.
WINDING & INSULATION

Winding shall be three phase with minimum class 'A' insulation. High conductivity electrolytic
quality copper shall be used for winding. Windings shall be suitably braced to withstand the
dynamic forces due to short circuit. Winding insulation shall be uniform and windings shall have
full insulation. Windings shall be individually vacuum dried before assembly as well as after
assembly.
INSULATION OIL
Insulation oil shall conform to IS: 335. Transformers shall be supplied with initial fill of filtered oil.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The transformer shall be outdoor type as specified. Unless otherwise specified the transformer in
addition shall have thermal and dynamic ability to withstand external short circuit as per Clause 9
of IS: 2026 (Part I) 1977.
COOLING
Unless otherwise specified, the transformer shall be oil immersed natural air-cooled type (ONAN).
RTCC PANEL
RTCC Panel shall be microprocessor based Integrated RTCC Panel and shall be suitable for
outdoor installation.
ACCESSORIES
Page 127 of 202

The transformer shall be single tank type with 11 KV HV cable box as specified on HV side. LT
side shall be suitable to receive cables. Extension of bus bar shall be made accordingly.
EXPLOSION VENT
Explosion vent or pressure relief device shall be provided of sufficient size for rapid release of any
pressure that may be generated within the tank and which might result in damage to the
equipment. The device shall operate at a static pressure less than the hydraulic test pressure for
transformer tank. Means shall be provided to prevent the ingress of moisture and gas
accumulation.
RATING AND DIAGRAM PLATES
The following plates shall be fixed to transformer tank in a visible position.
a. A rating plate of weather proof material bearing the data specified in the appropriate
clauses IS:2026.
b. A diagram plate showing the internal connections and also the voltage vector relationship
of the several windings in accordance with IS: 2026 and a plan view of the transformer
giving the correct physical relationship of theterminals.
JOINTS AND GASKETS
All gaskets used for making cil tight joints shall be of proven material such as granulated cork
bonded with synthetic rubber gaskets or synthetic rubber.
TESTS
The transformer shall be subjected to the following routine tests at the manufacturer's works
before dispatch.
a) Measurement of winding resistance.

b) Voltage ratio, polarity and phaserelationship.
c) Measurement of impedancevoltage.
d) Loadlosses.
e) No load losses and no loadcurrent.
f) Induced over voltagewithstand.
g) Separate source voltagewithstands.
i) Vectorgroup.
j) DV/DFTest.
k) Magnetic BalanceTest.
l) High VoltageTest.
m) Insulation ResistanceTest
n) All other test as specified in relevant ISCode.
The quoted rate for the transformer shall include all routine tests to be carried out at the
manufacturer's works and all routine tests to be carried out at site as per specifications. The
contractor shall quote separately for type tests, which shall be carried out only on the written
instructions of Owner. The supplier shall give sufficient advance information about the test
schedule to enable the owner to appoint his representative.
Page 128 of 202

TESTING AT SITE
Prior to commissioning of the transformer the following tests shall be performed.

a) Insulation resistance of the winding between phases and earth of H.V and M.V.Side.
b) Voltage ratio test at principal tap, minimum tap & maximum tapposition.
c) Magnetic BalanceTest.
d) Performance/Settings of winding Temperature Indicator, Oil TemperatureIndicator.
a) Insulation ResistanceTest
CONTROL SUPPLY (SHALL BE PART OF H.T. PANEL)
a. The tripping circuit shall be at 24 Volt D.C. through a power pack unit.
3.10 MAIN L.T.PANEL-
GENERAL
This section covers the detail requirements for Design, Manufacturing, Testing at works. Main
L.T. Panel shall be made out of CRCA sheet steel indoor type, floor mounted, free standing,
totally enclosed, extensible type, air insulated type for use on 415 Volts, 3 phase with neutral, 50
cycles/sec system. D.G. Panel shall have PLC and required Hardware and Software (as per the
BOQ) to achieve the AMF, Synchronizing and Interlocking.
The equipment shall be designed to conform to the requirements of:
i. IS: 8623- Factory Built Assemblies of switchgear and controlgear.
ii IS: 4237- General requirements for switchgear and control gear for voltages not
exceeding 1000volts.
iii. IS: 2147- Degree ofprotection.
iv. IS: 375- Marking and arrangement of busbar.
Individual equipment housed in the Main L.T. Panels shall conform to the following IS
Specification.
i. Air circuit breakers / moulded case circuit breaker IS: 60947 (Part-II) & IEC60947(2)
ii. Fuse switch and switch fuse units - IS: 13947 (Part-3) & IEC 947(3).
iii. HRC fuse links - IS:13703
iv. Current Transformers - IS:2705
v. Voltage Transformers - IS:3156
vi. Indicating Instruments - IS:1248
vii. Integrating Instruments - IS :722
viii. Control Switches & Push Buttons - IS :6875
ix. Auxiliary Contactors - IS : 13947 (Part-4/Sec.-I) & IEC 947(4/1)
x. Relays - IS:3231
Page 129 of 202

SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWING AND TECHNICAL DATA
The Contractor shall furnish relevant descriptive and illustrative literature on breakers and
associated equipment and the following for approval before manufacture of the panel.
a) Complete assembly drawings of the panel showing plan, elevation and typical section
views and locations of cable boxes, bus bar chamber, metering and relay compartment
and terminal blocks for external wiringconnections.
b) Typical and recommended schematic diagrams for control and supervision of circuit
breakers.
c) Foundation plan showing location of foundation channels, anchor bolts and anchors, floor
plans and openings for cablesetc.
b) Type testcertificates.
CONSTRUCTION
Panel shall be
1. Made out of the requisite vertical sections, which when coupled together shall form
continuous dead frontswitchboards.
2. The degree of protection being not less than IP 52 to IS: 2147.
3. Suitable for extensible on both sides by the addition of vertical sections after removal of
the endcovers.
4. Shall be suitable for cable entry from top / bottom both except wherever indicated through
removable cable gland plate of 3 mm thick. Compression gland shall be staggered in
alleys so as to maintain necessary clearance betweencables.
5. Fire retardant polycarbonate sheet shall be provided for viewing panels housing MCB‘s
at eye level. Cable channels are to be used wherever possible for aestheticlook.
Lifting hooks / angles to be provided on the panel.Panel shall have 20% free space for future
use.
Panel shall be provided with louvers having wire mesh inside for ventilation.
Each vertical section shall comprise of:
i. A minimum 2 mm thickness front framed structure of rolled/folded sheet steel channel

section rigidly bolted together. This structure shall house the components contributing to
the major weight of the equipment, such as circuit breaker cassettes, fuse switch units,
main horizontal bus bars, vertical risers and other front mounted accessories. The
structure shall be mounted on a rigid base frame of folded sheet steel of minimum 3 mm
thickness and 100 mm height. The design shall ensure that the weight of the components
is adequately supported without deformation or loss of alignment during transit or during
operation.
ii. Cable chamber housing (In rear of panel) the cable end connections, and power/control
cable terminations. The design shall ensure generous availability of space for ease of
installation and maintenance of cabling, and adequate safety for working in one vertical
section without coming into accidental contact with live parts in an adjacentsection.
iii. Front and rear doors fitted with dust including neoprene gaskets with fasteners designed
to ensure proper compression of the gaskets. When covers are provided in place
ofdoors, generous overlap shall be assured between sheet steel surfaces with closely
spaced fasteners to preclude the entry of dust. All door shall be lockable mountedlock.
Page 130 of 202

The height of the panels should not be more than 2400 mm. The total depth of the panel should
be adequate to cater to proper cabling space and should not be more than 1500mm. Operating
handle not higher than 1800mm.The minimum height for operating handle shall be 300 mm from
floorlevel.
Doors and covers shall be of minimum 2mm thick sheet steel. Sheet steel shrouds and partitions
shall be of minimum 2mm thickness. All sheet panels shall be smoothly finished, leveled and free
from flaws. The corners should be rounded.
The apparatus and circuits in the power control centers shall be so arranged as to facilitate their
operation and maintenance and at the same time to ensure the necessary degree of safety.
Apparatus forming part of the Main L.T. Panel shall have the following minimum clearances.
i. Betweenphases - 32mm
ii. Between phasesandneutral - 26mm
iii. Between phasesandearth - 26mm
iv. Between neutralandearth - 26mm
For any reason, the above clearances are not available, suitable insulation shall be provided.
Clearances shall be maintained during normal service conditions. Creepage distances shall
comply to those specified in relevant standards. All insulating material used in the construction of
the equipment shall be of non-hygroscopic material, duly treated to withstand the effects of the
high humidity, high temperature tropical ambient service conditions.
Circuit breakers and fuse switches shall be arranged in multi-tier formation, except that not more
than two air circuit breakers shall be housed in a single vertical section. Cable entry for various
feeders shall be from the rear. Panel shall be suitable for termination of bus duct for incoming
breakers.
Metallic/insulated barriers shall be provided within vertical sections and between adjacent
sections to ensure prevention of accidental contactwith:
i. Main bus bars and vertical risers during operation, inspection or maintenance of
functional units and front mountedaccessories.
ii. Cable termination of one functional unit, when working on those of adjacent unit/units.
All doors/covers providing access to live power equipment/ circuits shall be provided with
tool operated fasteners to prevent unauthorized access.
Provision shall also be made for permanently earthing the frames and other metal parts
of the switchgear by two independentconnections.
METAL TREATMENT AND FINISH

All steel work used in the construction of the L.T. cubicle panels should have undergone a
rigorous metal treatment process asfollows:
i. Effective cleaning by hot alkaline degreasingsolution followed by cold water rinsingto
remove traces of alkalinesolution.
ii. Pickling in dilute sulphuric acid to remove oxide scales & rust formation, if any, followed
by cold water rinsing to remove traces of acidicsolution.
iii. A recognized phosphating process to facilitate durable coating of the paint on the metal
surfaces and also to prevent the spread of rusting in the event of the paint film being
mechanically damaged. This again, shall be followed by hot water rinsing to remove
traces of phosphatesolution.
iv. Passivating in de-oxalite solution to retain and augment the effects ofphosphating.
v. Drying with compressed air in a dust freeatmosphere.
vi. Powder Coating paint of colour approved by Architect/Consultant/Engineer-in-charge.
Page 131 of 202

BUS BAR
The bus bars shall made of high conductivity, high strength aluminum alloy complying with the
requirement of grade E-9IE of IS-5082 and air insulated. The bus bars shall be suitable braced
with non-hygroscopic SMC supports to provide a through fault withstand capacity of 50KA RMS
symmetrical for one second and a peak short circuit withstand capacity of 105KA. The neutral as
well as the earth bar should be capable of withstanding the above level. Ridges shall be provided
on the SMC supports to prevent tracking between adjacent bus bars. Large clearances and creep
age distances shall be provided on the bus bar system to minimize possibilities of fault.
The Panel shall be designed that the cables are not directly terminated on the terminals of
breaker/switch fuse/fuse switch etc. but on cable termination links. Capacity of aluminium bus
bars shall be considered as 0.8 Amp/sq.mm of cross section area of the bus bar. The main bus
bars shall have continuous current rating throughout the length of L.T. Panel. The cross section of
neutral bus bars shall be same as that of phase bus bar for bus bars of capacity up to 200Amp;
for higher capacity the neutral bus bar shall not be less than half (50%)the cross section of that
the phase bus bars. The bus bar system shall consists of main horizontal bus bar and auxiliary
vertical bus bars run in bus bar alley/chamber on either side in which the circuit could be
arranged/connected with front access. The minimum size of vertical bus bar shall be as per fault
level of panel i.e 50KA.
In case of copper bus bars, high conductivity electrolytic grade copper with current density not
less than 1.4 Amp/ sq. mm shall be used. Bus Bar shall betinned.
Connections from the main bus bars to functional circuit shall be arranged and supported to
withstand without any damage or deformation the thermal and dynamic stresses due to short
circuit currents. Bus bars to be colour coded with PVC sleeves.
Cadmium plated G.I. nuts and bolts shall be used for making bus bar to bus bar connections in
aluminium bus bars.
Whenever copper bus bar and aluminium bus bar are connected to each other, bimetallic strip
shall be used. In case of copper bus bar, tinning shall be done.
Bus bar calculation shall be submitted along with manufacturing drawing of panel for approval
with bus bar manufacturer datasheet.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
TYPE AND CONSTRUCTION
The ACB shall confirm to the requirements of IEC 60947-2 / IS 60947-2 and shall be type tested
& certified for compliance to standards from–CPRI, ERDA / any accredited international lab. The
circuit breaker shall be suitable for 415 V + 10%, 50 Hz supply system. Air Circuit Breakers shall
be with moulded housing flush front, draw out type and shall be provided with a trip free manual
operating mechanism or as indicated in drawings and bill of quantities with mechanical "ON"
"OFF" ―TRIP‖indications.
Air circuit breakers shall have a rated operational voltage of 415V AC (50Hz) & impulse voltage of
12 kV.
The construction of circuit breakers shall be as per pollution degree 4 requirements to sustain
harsh environments
The tests shall be carried out with a breaking performance during operation (Ics) and admissible
short time withstand (Icw) equal to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu). i.e. Icu = Ics = Icw = 50KA
for 1 Sec.
The Circuit Breaker shall have minimum mechanical life of 10000 operations without
maintenance.
Page 132 of 202

The breakers shall deliver an electrical life of 6000 operations up to 2000A & 5000 operations for
ratings 2500A and above under rated voltage of 440V AC, without maintenance.
All 4 Pole ACBs shall have fully rated neutral equal to rating of the breaker & shall be protected
against over-load & short-circuit with provisions for settings at:
› 4P 3d - neutral unprotected,
› 4P 3d + N/2 - neutral protection at 0.5In,
› 4P 4d - neutral protection at In to ensure precise neutral protection.
Shunt trip and closing coil shall be of continuous rated design and both should be accessible from
the front of ACB after opening the cover, without disturbing any other part/release.
The Circuit Breaker shall have minimum 4 changeover auxiliary contacts rated at 10 A 240/380V
volts 50 Hz. There should exist, facility to add one more set of 4 contacts as required.
Ready-to-close contact shall exist for indicating that all safety parameters are checked & enabling
closure of breaker, ensuring at-most safety for the user.
The withdraw able circuit breaker shall have the following three distinct and separate positions,
which shall be indicated on the face of the panel.
› "Service" -- Both main and auxiliary circuits are connected.

› "Test" – All auxiliary circuits are connected & main circuits are disconnected.
› "Isolated" -- Both main and auxiliary circuits are disconnected.
There should be a positive locking at these positions while racking out or racking in for clear &
confirmative indications as the position is reached. A release push button shall be available to
release the lock.
A door interlock shall be provided so that it shall not be possible to open the door until the air
circuit breaker moving part is in the disconnected position.
The racking handle shall be stored on the air circuit breaker in such a manner as to be accessible
without defeating the door interlocking.
The Circuit breaker protection shall be through intelligent ET range of electronic trip system
suitable to protect the distribution network, against LI (Over load, Instantaneous), LSI (Overload,
Short-Circuit & Instantaneous) & LSIG (Overload, Short-Circuit, Instantaneous & Ground fault).
The circuit breaker control unit shall be with display. The trip units with display shall be suitable to
measure current and voltage parameters.
Control unit shall have fault history data & store last 10 trip causes.
The trip unit shall have following protection settings, based on the type of trip unit.
› Adjustable over load current (Ir) settings from 40% to 100% of rating of ACB (In).
› Over load time setting (tr) from 0.5s, 1s, 2s, 4s…….24s as field selectable curves
› Short circuit setting (Isd) from 1.5 to 10 times of Ir setting.
› Short circuit time delay adjustable from 0 to 400 msec.
› Instantaneous (Ii) protection with an adjustable pick-up and an OFF position.
› Earth fault setting adjustable in absolute Ampere with time delay settings from 0 to 400 ms.
PROTECTION
The protection release shall have following features and settings:
(i) TRUE RMSSENSING
Page 133 of 202

The release shall sample the current at the rate of 16 times per cycle to monitor the actual load
current waveform flowing in the system and shall monitor the true RMS value of the load current.
It shall take into account the effect of harmonicsalso.
(ii) THERMAL MEMORY
When the breaker shall reclose after tripping on overload, then the thermal stresses caused by
the overload if not dissipated completely, shall get stored in the memory of the release and this
thermal memory shall ensure reduced tripping time in case of subsequent overloads. Realistic
Hot/Cold curves shall take into account the integrated heating effects to offer closer protection to
thesystem.
(iii) DEFINED TIME – CURRENTCHARACTERISTIC
A variety of pick-up and time delay settings shall be available to define the current thresholds and
the delays to be set independently for different protection zones thereby achieving a close-to-
ideal protection curve.
(iv) TRIPINDICATION
Individual fault indication for each type of fault should be provided by LEDs for faster fault
diagnosis.
SAFETY FEATURES
(i) The safety shutter shall prevent inadvertent contact with isolating contacts when
breaker is withdrawn from theCradle.
(ii) It shall not be possible to interchange two circuit breakers of two different thermal
ratings. For Draw-out breakers, an arrangement shall be provided to prevent rating
mismatch between breaker andcradle.
(iii) There shall be provision of positive earth connection between fixed and moving
portion of the ACB either thru connector plug or sliding solid earth mechanism.
Earthing bolts shall be provided on the cradle or body of fixedACB.
(iv) The incoming panel accommodating ACB shall be provided with indicating lamps for
ON-OFF positions, digital voltmeter and ammeter of size not less than 96 mm x 96
mm, selector switches, MCB for protection circuit and measuring instrumentcircuits.
(v) It shall be possible to bolt the draw out frame not only in connected position but also
in TEST and DISCONNECTED position to prevent dislocation due to vibration and
shocks.
(vi) Draw out breakers should not close unless in distinct Service/Test/Isolated
positions.
(vii) The insulation material used shall conform to Glow wire test as perIEC60695.
(viii) The ACB shall provide in built electrical and mechanicalanti-pumping.
TESTING
Testing of each circuit breaker shall be carried out at the works as per relevant IS Code of
Practice and the original test certificate shall be furnished in triplicate. The tests shall
incorporate at least the following.
i. Impulse withstandtest.
ii. Power frequency withstandtest.
iii. Short circuittest.
iv. Temperature - rise test under ratedconditions.
Page 134 of 202

MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
GENERAL-
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall be incorporated in sub distribution boards wherever
specified. MCCB‘s shall conform to IS 13947-2 and / or IEC 947-2 in all respects. MCCB‘s shall
be suitable either for single phase AC 230 volts or three phase 415 volts. All MCCB shall be
provided with rotary operating mechanism.
All MCCBs shall be suitable for 3 Phase 415 Volts AC 50 HZ supply.
All MCCBs shall have rated service breaking capacity (Ics) equal to the ultimate breaking
capacity (Icu) at defined operational voltage.
All MCCBs shall clearly indicate the suitability for isolation in the name plate identified by the
symbol .
All MCCBs shall offer class –II front face i.e. main current path of the circuit breaker should be
isolated from auxiliary section
All MCCBs shall have cross bolted termination.
All MCCBs above 250A shall have the following features
›Single frame size with common accessories to reduce inventory
›Microprocessor trip unit
›Adjustable overload settings – 0.5-1 In
›Adjustable Short circuit – 2-10 Ir
›Adjustable neutral for 4P MCCBs – 0-0.5Ir-1Ir
›Thermal memory
›Test connector to check the healthiness of trip unit
›4000 electrical operations
›ON/OFF/Trip/Push to trip indication contacts
All MCCBs up to 250A shall have following features
›Thermal magnetic trip unit
›Fixed short circuit settings
›Fully rated neutral for 4P MCCB
Individual fault trip LED indications shall be available on all types of trip units for easy & faster
identifying the cause of fault.
2 2
I t ON / I t OFF options shall be available for short-circuit & earth fault protections to enhance
discrimination with downstream devices.
The trip unit shall have integral test facility to verify the healthiness and to avoid external
calibration.
The release shall be self diagnostic type with clear LED indication in case of mal functioning.
It shall be possible to change the protection settings on line and the circuit breaker need not be
switched of while adjusting the setting.
Circuit breakers shall conform to Electromagnetic compatibility tests (EMC) as specified in IEC
60947-2, Appendix F.
Manufacturer shall submit the test certificates for the same.

The control unit shall have thermal memory throughout the range to store temperature rise data
in case of repetitive overload or earth fault for protecting the cables and loads.
Page 135 of 202

RUPTURING CAPACITY
The Moulded Case Circuit Breaker shall have a minimum fault breaking capacity (Ics) of not less
than 50KA RMS at 415 volts or as specified in BOQ./ Drawing.
TESTING
Test certificate of the MCCB as per relevant Indian Standards (IS) shall be furnished. Pre-
commissioning tests on the sub distribution boards incorporating the MCCB shall be done as per
standard.
MEASURING INSTRUMENT FOR METERING
GENERAL
The specifications herein-after laid down shall also cover all the meters, instrument and
protective devices required for the electrical works. The ratings, type and quantity of meters,
instruments and protective devices shall be as per the bill of quantities.
DIGITAL AMMETERS
Digital Ammeters shall be confirm to IS: 13875. It shall be digital type 7 segment LED display.
Ammeter shall be suitable for accuracy class 1.0 and burden 0.2 VA approx. The ammeters
shall be capable of carrying sustained overloads during fault conditions without damage or loss
of accuracy. The meter shall be suitable for working in ambient temp 0 degree to 50 degree
and 95% humiditycondition.
DIGITAL VOLTMETERS
Digital Voltmeters shall be confirm to IS: 13875. It shall be digital type 7 segment LED display.
Voltmeter shall be suitable for accuracy class 1.0 and burden 0.2 VA approx. The range for 3
phase voltmeters shall be 0 to 500 volts. The meter shall be suitable for working in ambient
temp 0 degree to 50 degree and 95% humidity condition. The voltmeter shall be provided with
protection MCB of suitablecapacity.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Current transformers shall be in conformity with IS: 2705 (Part I, II & III) in all respects. All
current transformers used for medium voltage applications shall be rated for 1KV Current
transformers shall have rated primary current, rated burden and class of accuracy as required.
However, the rated secondary current shall be 15A unless otherwise specified. The acceptable
minimum class of various applications shall be as given below.
Measuring : Class1.0
Protection : Class 5P10
Current transformers shall be capable of withstanding without damage, magnetic and thermal
stresses due to short circuit fault of 50KA on medium voltage system. Terminals of the current
transformer shall be marked permanently for easy identification of poles. Separate CT shall be
provided for measuring instruments and protection relays. Each C.T. shall be provided with
rating plate.
Current transformers shall be mounted such that they are easily accessible for inspection,
maintenance and replacement. The wiring for CT‘s shall be copper conductor, PVC insulated
wires with proper termination lugs and wiring shall be bunched with cable straps and fixed to
the panel structure in a neatmanner.
Page 136 of 202

CONTROL SWITCHES
Control switches shall be of the heavy duty rotary type with escutcheon plates clearly marked to
show the operating position. They shall be semi-flush mounting with only the front plate and
operating handle projecting.
Indicating lamps shall be of the LED type, and with translucent lamps covers. Bulbs & lenses
shall be easily replaced from the front.
Push buttons shall be on the momentary contact, push to actuate type fitted with self reset
contacts & provided with integral escutcheon plates marked with its functions.
CABLE TERMINATION
Cable entries and terminals shall be provided in the sub distribution boards to suit the number,
type and size of aluminium conductor power cable and copper conductor control cable
specified.
Provision shall be made for top or bottom entry of cables as required. Generous size of cabling
chambers shall be provided, with the position of cable gland and terminals such that cables can
be easily and safely terminated. Cable glands shall be brass compression type, barriers or
shrouds shall be provided to permit safe working at the terminals of one circuit without
accidentally touching that of another live circuit.
Cable risers shall be adequately supported to withstand the effects of rated short circuit
currents without damage and without causing secondary faults.
CONTROL WIRING
All control wirings shall be carried out with 1100V grade single core PVC cable conforming to IS
694/IS 8130 having stranded copper conductors of minimum 1.5 sq. mm for potential circuits
and 2.5 sq. mm for current transformer circuits. Wiring shall be neatly bunched, adequately
supported and properly routed to allow for easy access and maintenance. Wiring shall be
identified by numbering ferrules at each end. All control fuses shall be mounted in front of the
panel and shall be easily accessible.
TERMINAL BLOCK
Terminal blocks shall be 500 Volts grade of the stud type. Insulating barriers shall be provided
between adjacent terminals. Terminals block shall have a minimum current rating of 10 Amps
and shall be shrouded. Provisions shall be made for label inscriptions.
LABELS
Labels shall be of anodized aluminium, with white engraving on black background. They shall be
properly secured withfasteners.
MISCELANEOUS
Push buttons shall be of the momentary contact, push to actuate type fitted with self reset
BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER
A set of 24V DC power supply shall be provided for indication, relay operation etc. for Main L.T.
Panel. DC Power supply shall be sealed maintenance free batteries of suitable capacity.
Suitable battery chargers shall also be provided to charge the battery to perform during mains
failure.
Page 137 of 202

3.11 CAPACITOR BANKPANEL
Medium Voltage Capacitors and Control Panel to be used for improvement of power factor of the
electrical system and shall be connected to Main L.T. Panels through L.T. Cable / L.T. Bus
ducts. Automatic Power Factor Correction Panel shall function to improve power factor of the
system in which it is connected. It shall improve power factor up to 0.99 from existingvalue.
CODES AND STANDARDS-
Unless otherwise specified the capacitor and control panel shall conform to following.
a. IS:2834 - Shunt capacitors for powersystems.
b. IS:2147 - Degree of protection provided by enclosures forlow

voltage switchgear and controlgear.
c. IS:4237 - General requirements for switchgear and controlgear forvoltagesnot

exceeding 1000V.
d. IS:8623 - Specification for factory built assembliesofswitchgear

and control gear (Up to 1000volts).
e. IS:2208 - HRC cartridge fuse links up to 650volts.
f. IS:4064 - Specification for Fuse Switch & Switch Fuse switchgear andcontrol
gear.
g. IS:2959 - AC contactors for voltage not exceeding 1000volts.
SUBMITTALS
SHOP DRAWING AND TECHNICAL DATA
Complete technical data sheet including guarantee details giving the temperature rise, capacitor
losses etc, Capacitor panel GA drawing, indicating mounting of capacitor units shall be furnished
with the shop drawing.
SPECIFICATION
CAPACITORS
i. The capacitor shall be 3 phase MPP Type capacitor 440 Volt, 50Hz.
ii. The temperature rise above the specified ambient (50ºC) of any part of the capacitor and
polyurethane resins associated equipment shall not exceed the permissible temperature as
per IS:2834.
iii. 50/25/10/5 KVAR capacitor units shall be used to form a bank of capacitors of desired
capacity. All these units shall be connected in a parallel by means of solid bus bars of
adequate current carrying capacity. The combination of capacitor unit shall be such as not
to exceed permissible over voltage across the healthy capacitor units in case of failure of
one or more units. Capacitor banks shall be suitable for operation at 110% of rated RMS
voltage and 150% of rates RMS current. Each unit shall satisfactorily operate at 135% of
ratedKVAR.
iv. Construction-
The Capacitor banks shall be floor mounting type using minimum floor space. The
containerofcapacitors shall be hermetically sealed in sturdy containers made out of 2 mm
thick M.S. sheet steel. Dry type or synthetic non-inflammable oil shall be used for insulation.
Each standard unit shall be provided with a built in silveredfuse.
Page 138 of 202

v. DischargeResistance
Each capacitor unit shall be individually protected by MCCB with indication to show when it
is in operation. The capacitors shall be provided with permanently connected discharge
resistors so that residual voltage of the capacitors shall be reduced to 50 Volts or less
within one minute after the capacitor is disconnected from the sources ofsupply.
vi. Earthing
Two separate earthing terminals shall be provided for earth connection for each bank. All
components and frame shall be properly earthed.
CONTROL PANEL
The panel shall be provided with necessary MCCB's, contactors, automatic required steps relays
with associated CT's and power factor meter, indicating lamps, push buttons etc. Capacitors shall
also be housed in the same panel. The panel shall be free standing type, dead front cubicle and
shall be constructed from 2 mm thick sheet steel. The degree of protection shall be IP 54. This
panel shall be integrated with the main L.T. panel unless specified otherwise.
PAINTING
As the capacitor panel is integrated with Main LT panel, it shall be painted as per specification in
relevant Clause above.
3.12 SUB DISTRIBUTIONPANEL
GENERAL
Sub Distribution Board shall be metal clad totally enclosed, rigid, floor mounting, air insulated,
cubicle type for use on 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 cycle system. Equipment shall be designed for
operation in high ambient temperature and high humidity tropical atmospheric conditions.
STANDARDS
The equipment shall be designed to conform to the requirements of:
IS 8623 – Factory Built Assemblies of switchgear and control gear.

IS 4237 – General requirements for switchgear and control gear for voltages not exceeding 1000
volts.
IS 2147 – Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear and control
gear.
IS 375 – Marking and arrangement of bus bars.
Individual equipment housed in the sub distribution boards shall conform to the following IS
specifications:
a) Moulded Case Circuit Breakers - IS: 13947-2/IEC947-2

b) Miniature Circuit Breaker - IEC -60898
c) Contractors - IEC – 947-4-1, IS13947-4-1
d) Current Transformers - IS:2705
e) Indicating Instruments (Analogue) - IS:1248,
f) Indicating Instruments (Digital) - IS:13875
g) Integrating Instruments (Analogue) - IS: 722, IS:13779-1999
h) Integrating Instruments (Digital) - IS: 13779- 1999, IS:14697
i) HRC fuse links - IS: 13703 / IEC269
Page 139 of 202

SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings And Technical Data
The tenderer shall furnish relevant technical data of switchgears and associated equipment along with
theoffer.
The Contractor shall furnish relevant descriptive and illustrative literature on switchgears and associated
equipment and the following for approval before manufacture of the panel.
a) Complete assembly drawings of the panel showing plan, elevation and typical section views and
locations of cable boxes, bus bar chamber, metering compartment and terminal blocks for
external wiringconnections.
b) Typical and recommended schematic diagrams and controlwiring.
c) Foundation plan showing location of foundation channels, anchor bolts and anchors, floor plans
and openings for cablesetc.
d) All drawings and data shall be inEnglish.
CONSTRUCTIONS
Sub Distribution boards shall be metal enclosed, indoor, floor mounted free standing and/or wall mounted
type made up of the required vertical section, which when coupled together shall form continuous dead
front. Sub distribution boards shall be dust and damp protected, the degree of protection being no less
than IP: 52 to IS: 2147. Sub distribution boards shall be fabricated with a framed structure with
rolled/folded sheet steel channel section of Sheet steel shroud and partitions shall be of minimum 2mm
thickness, doors and covers shall also be of 2mm thickness. All panel doors shall be pad lockable type.
All sheet steel work forming the exterior of sub distribution boards shall be smoothly finished, leveled and
free from flaws. The corners to be rounded. Front and rear doors to be fitted with dust proof including
neoprene gasket with fasteners designed to ensure proper compression of the gaskets. When covers are
provided in place of doors, generous overlap shall be ensured between sheet steel surfaces with closely
spaced fasteners to preclude the entry ofdust.
Following minimum clearance to be maintained after taking into account connecting bolts, clamps etc.
i) BetweenPhases - 32mm
ii) Between Phasesandneutral - 26mm
iii) Between Phasesandearth - 26mm
iv) Between Neutral&earth - 26mm
All insulating, materials used in the construction of the equipment shall be of non hygroscopic materials,
duly treated to withstand the effect of high humidity, high temperatures, tropical ambient service
conditions. SMC (Sheet Moulded Compound) supports & shrouds shall be used.
Functional units such as moulded case circuit breakers shall be arranged in multi-tier formation. The
design of the sub distribution boards shall be such that each MCCB unit shall be fully compartmentalized.
Insulated barriers shall be provided with vertical section and between adjacent section to ensure
prevention of accidental contact with main bus bars and vertical risers during operation, inspection or
maintenance of functional units. All doors/covers providing access to live power equipment/circuits shall
be provided with tool operated fastness to prevent unauthorized access. Sub distribution boards shall be
so constructed that the cable alley shall be sufficient enough to accommodate all the outgoing and
incomingcables.
For each cable alley, there shall be separate cable gland plate of detachable type at the bottom and/or
topofthe panel as required. Gland plate shall be 3 mmthick.
A base frame made out of 75mm x 40mm x 5.0mm M.S. Channel to be provided.
Page 140 of 202

METAL TREATMENT AND FINISH
All metal work used in the construction of the sub distribution boards should have under gone a rigorous
metal treatment process as follows:
a) Effective cleaning by hot non alkaline degreasing solution followed by cold water rinsing to remove
traces of alkalinesolution
b) Picking in dilute sulphuric acid to remove oxide scales & rust formation, if any, followed by cold water
rinsing to remove traces of acidicsolution.
c) A recognized phosphating process to facilitate durable coating of the paint on the metal surfaces and
also to prevent the spread of rusting in the event of the paint film being mechanically damaged. This
again, shall be followed by hot water rinsing to remove traces of phosphatesolution.
d) Passivating in de-oxalite solution to retain and augment the effects ofphosphating.
e) Drying with compressed air in a dust freeatmosphere.
f) A finishing coat of powder coating of Siemens grey colour and thickness of powder coating shall not be
less than 50micron.
BUS BARS
The bus bars shall be air insulated and made of high conductivity, high strength Aluminiumcomplying with
the requirement of gradeE-91E.
The bus bars shall be suitably braced with non-hygroscopic SMC supports to provide a through fault
withstand capacity of 35KA RMS symmetrical for one second or as specified in BOQ/Drawing and a peak
short circuit with stand capacity of 105 KA.
The neutral as well as the earth bar should be capable of withstanding the above level. Ridges shall be
provided on the SMC supports to prevent tracking between adjacent bus bars. Large clearances and
creepage distance shall be provided on the bus bar system to minimize the possibility of fault. The main
phase bus bars shall have continues current rating throughout the length of the panel. The cross section
of neutral bus bars shall be same as that of the phase bus bar for bus bars of capacity up to 250 Amp; for
higher capacities, the neutral bus bar shall not be less than half (50%) the cross section of that of the
phase bus bars. Connections from the main bus bars to functional circuits shall be so arranged and
supported to withstand without any damage or deformation the thermal and dynamic stresses due to
short circuit currents. Bus bars shall be colour coded with PVC heat shrinkablesleeves.
The sub distribution boards shall be designed that the cables are not directly terminated on the terminals
of MCCB etc. but are terminated on cable termination links. Capacity of aluminium bus bars shall be
considered as 1.0 Amp per sq. mm of cross section area of the bus bars.
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
GENERAL-
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall be incorporated in sub distribution boards wherever specified.
MCCB‘s shall conform to IS 13947-2 and / or IEC 947-2 in all respects. MCCB‘s shall be suitable either
for single phase AC 230 volts or three phase 415 volts. All MCCB shall be provided with rotary operating
mechanism.
All MCCBs shall be suitable for 3 Phase 415 Volts AC 50 HZ supply.
All MCCBs shall have rated service breaking capacity (Ics) equal to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) at
defined operational voltage.
All MCCBs shall clearly indicate the suitability for isolation in the name plate identified by the symbol
.
All MCCBs shall offer class –II front face i.e. main current path of the circuit breaker should be
isolated from auxiliary section
Page 141 of 202

All MCCBs shall have cross bolted termination.

All MCCBs above 250A shall have the following features
›Microprocessor trip unit
›Adjustable Short circuit – 2-10 Ir
›Adjustable neutral for 4P MCCBs – 0-0.5Ir-1Ir
›Thermal memory
›Test connector to check the healthiness of trip unit
All MCCBs up to 250A shall have following features
›Thermal magnetic trip unit
›Fixed short circuit settings
›Fully rated neutral for 4P MCCB
Individual fault trip LED indications shall be available on all types of trip units for easy & faster
identifying the cause of fault.
2 2
I t ON / I t OFF options shall be available for short-circuit & earth fault protections to enhance
discrimination with downstream devices.
The trip unit shall have integral test facility to verify the healthiness and to avoid external
calibration.
The release shall be self diagnostic type with clear LED indication in case of mal functioning.
It shall be possible to change the protection settings on line and the circuit breaker need not be
switched of while adjusting the setting.
Circuit breakers shall conform to Electromagnetic compatibility tests (EMC) as specified in IEC
60947-2, Appendix F.
Manufacturer shall submit the test certificates for the same.

The control unit shall have thermal memory throughout the range to store temperature rise data
in case of repetitive overload or earth fault for protecting the cables and loads.
RUPTURING CAPACITY
The Moulded Case Circuit Breaker shall have a minimum fault breaking capacity (Ics) of not less
than 50KA RMS at 415 volts or as specified in BOQ./ Drawing.
TESTING
Test certificate of the MCCB as per relevant Indian Standards (IS) shall be furnished. Pre-
commissioning tests on the sub distribution boards incorporating the MCCB shall be done as per
standard.
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS, FOR METERING:-
GENERAL
Direct reading electrical instruments shall be in conform to IS 1248. The accuracy of direct reading shall
be 1.0 for voltmeter and 1.5 for ammeters. Other type of instruments direct reading shall be 1.0 for
voltmeter and 1.5 for ammeters. Other type of instruments shall have accuracy of 1.5. The errors due to
variations in temperature shall be limited to a minimum. The meter shall be of flush mounting type of
96mm square pattern. The meter shall be enclosed in a dust tight housing. The housing shall be of steel
or phenolic mould. The design and manufacture of the meters shall ensure the prevention of fogging of
Page 142 of 202

instruments glass. Instruments meters shall be sealed in such a way that access to the measuring
element and to the accessories with in the case shall not be possible without removal of the seal. The
meters shall be provided with white dials and black scalemarkings.
The pointer shall be black in colour and shall have zero position adjustment device which could be
operated from outside. The direction of deflection shall be from left to right.
Suitable selector switches shall be provided for all ammeters and voltmeters intended to be used on three
phase supply.
The specifications herein-after laid down shall also cover all the meters, instrument and protective
devices required for the electrical works. The ratings, type and quantity of meters, instruments and
protective devices shall be as per the bill of quantities.
DIGITAL AMMETERS
Digital Ammeters shall be confirm to IS: 13875. It shall be digital type 7 segment LED display. Ammeter
shall be suitable for accuracy class 1.0 and burden 0.2 VA approx. The ammeters shall be capable of
carrying sustained overloads during fault conditions without damage or loss of accuracy. The meter shall
be suitable for working in ambient temp 0 degree to 50 degree and 95% humidity condition.
DIGITAL VOLTMETERS
Digital Voltmeters shall be confirm to IS: 13875. It shall be digital type 7 segment LED display. Voltmeter
shall be suitable for accuracy class 1.0 and burden 0.2 VA approx. The range for 3 phase voltmeters
shall be 0 to 500 volts. The meter shall be suitable for working in ambient temp 0 degree to 50 degree
and 95% humidity condition. The voltmeter shall be provided with protection MCB of suitablecapacity.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Current transformers shall be in conformity with IS: 2705 (Part I, II & III) in all respects. All current
transformers used for medium voltage applications shall be rated for 1KV Current transformers shall have
rated primary current, rated burden and class of accuracy as required. However, the rated secondary
current shall be 5A unless otherwise specified. The acceptable minimum class of various applications
shall be as givenbelow.
Measuring : Class1.0
Protection : Class 5P10
Current transformers shall be capable of withstanding without damage, magnetic and thermal stresses
due to short circuit fault of 50KA on medium voltage system. Terminals of the current transformer shall
be marked permanently for easy identification of poles. Separate CT shall be provided for measuring
instruments and protection relays. Each C.T. shall be provided with ratingplate.
Current transformers shall be mounted such that they are easily accessible for inspection, maintenance
and replacement. The wiring for CT‘s shall be copper conductor, PVC insulated wires with proper
termination lugs and wiring shall be bunched with cable straps and fixed to the panel structure in a neat
manner.
CONTROL SWITCHES-
Control switches shall be of the heavy duty rotary type with escutcheon plates clearly marked to show the
operating position. They shall be semi-flush mounting with only the front plate and operating handle
projecting.
Indicating lamps shall be of the LED type, and with translucent lamps covers. Bulbs & lenses shall be
easily replaced from the front.
Push buttons shall be on the momentary contact, push to actuate type fitted with self reset
Page 143 of 202

CABLE TERMINATIONS-
Cable entries and terminals shall be provided in the sub distribution boards to suit the number, type and
size of aluminium conductor power cable and copper conductor control cable specified.
Provision shall be made for top or bottom entry of cables as required. Generous size of cabling
chambers shall be provided, with the position of cable gland and terminals such that cables can be easily
and safely terminated. Cable glands shall be brass compression type, barriers or shrouds shall be
provided to permit safe working at the terminals of one circuit without accidentally touching that of another
live circuit.
Cable risers shall be adequately supported to withstand the effects of rated short circuit currents without
damage and without causing secondary faults.
CONTROL WIRING-
All control wirings shall be carried out with 1100V grade single core ZHFR cable conforming to IS 694/IS
8130 having stranded copper conductors of minimum 1.5 sq. mm for potential circuits and 2.5 sq. mm for
current transformer circuits. Wiring shall be neatly bunched, adequately supported and properly routed to
allow for easy access and maintenance. Wiring shall be identified by numbering ferrules at each end. All
control fuses shall be mounted in front of the panel and shall be easily accessible.
TERMINAL BLOCK-
Terminal blocks shall be 500 Volts grade of the stud type. Insulating barriers shall be provided between
adjacent terminals. Terminals block shall have a minimum current rating of 10 Amps and shall be
shrouded. Provisions shall be made for label inscriptions.
LABELS-
Labels shall be of anodized aluminium, with white engraving on black background. They shall be properly
secured with fasteners.
TESTING AT MANUFACTURING WORK-
All routine tests specified is IS: 8623-1977 shall be carried out and test certificates submitted to the
Engineer – in –Charge.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING-
Commissioning checks and tests shall be included all wiring checks and checking up of connections.
Primary/secondary injection tests for the relays adjustment/setting shall be done before commissioning in
addition to routine meggar test. Checks and tests shall include the following:
a) Operation checks and lubrication of all movingparts.

b) Interlocking functioncheck
c) Insulation test: When measured with 500 V meggar, the insulation resistance shall not be less than 100
megaohms.
d) Trip tests & protection geartest.
3.13 DISTRIBUTIONBOARDS
GENERAL
a) Distribution Board shall be double door type with extended loose wire box & M.S. Junction Box at the
top and suitable for flush installation. All distribution boards shall be of three phases (415 Volts) or single
phase (240 Volts) type with incoming isolator or MCB and/or RCCB as in Bill of Quantities. Distribution
boards shall contain plug in type miniature circuit breaker mounted on bus bars. Miniature circuit
breakers shall be quick make & quick break type with trip free mechanism. MCB shall have thermal &
magnetic short circuit protection. MCB shall conform with IS 8828-1978 & IS 8828 - 1996. Bus bars shall
Page 144 of 202

beofelectrolytic copper. Neutral bus bars shall be provided with the same number of terminals as there are
single ways on the board, in addition to the terminals for incoming mains. An earth bar of similar size as
the neutral bar shall also be provided. Separate neutral & earth bus bar link to be provided for each
phase. Phase barrier shall be fitted and all live parts shall be screened from the front. Ample clearance
shall be provided between all live metal and the earth case and adequate space for all incoming and
outgoing cables. All distribution board enclosures shall have an etched zinc base stove painted followed
by synthetic stove enamel, colour light gray. A circuit identification card in clear plastic cover shall be
provided for each distribution board. IK (Mechanical Stress) rating of distribution board enclosure shall
not be less than IK –07/ 08 /09.
b) Distribution Board with single phase outgoings requirement shall be Horizontal type. Distribution Board
with three phase outgoings requirement shall be Vertical/ Horizontal type. Distribution Board installed in
indoor dry locations shall conform to IP-42. Distribution Board installed in outdoor &wet locations shall
conform to IP-65.
c) Miniature Circuit Breakers for lighting circuits shall be of "B" series where as the circuits feeding
discharge lamps (HPMV or HPSV) halogen lamps, all power outlet points, equipment/ machinery shall be
of "C/D" series (Motor circuit) types. All miniature circuit breakers shall be of not less than 10KA rated
rupturing capacity. All miniature circuit breaker terminal shall have safetyshutter.
d) Distribution board shall be provided with isolator or MCB and/or earth leakage circuit breaker as
mentioned in drawings and BOQ. Earth leakage circuit breaker shall be current operated type and of
30mA sensitivity unless otherwise stated. RCCB shall be mounted within distribution board box for single
phase distribution board while in three phase distribution board RCCB shall be either mounted within
distribution board box or in a separate MS box below distribution board. Width and depth of RCCB box
shall be same as that of distribution board box and of same finish. Height of RCCB box shall be sufficient
to accommodate RCCB & termination of incoming & outgoing wires. Distribution board box, isolator,
MCB'S used shall be of one/same manufacturer. Standard size manufactured by approved manufacturer
shall be used. In case size specified in BOQ is not standard size of manufacturer, in that case next
standard size distribution board box shall be used with incoming & outgoing MCB as specified in BOQ.
Additional cutout/space for outgoing MCB shall be plugged with blank plates. No extra cost shall be paid
for using bigger/higher size distribution board box and blankplates.
3.14 CONDUIT AND WIRINGSYSTEM
PVC CONDUIT
Conduits shall be heavy gauge rigid PVC of minimum thickness of 2mm. Conduits shall be ISI marked
confirming to IS: 9537 (Part-3)-1983. All conduit and conduit accessories shall be of PVC. Conduit shall
be jointed together by a vinyle type cement/solvents. Minimum size of conduit shall be 25mm unless
otherwise mentioned in BOQ or drawing . Conduit shall be fixed on ceiling or wall. All conduits shall be
concealed in wall/ceiling etc. or fixed on surface of wall with clamps at regular interval as called for
elsewhere. For termination of PVC conduits into switch outlet box, PVC female adopters shall be used.
Wherever conduit run exceeds 10 metre, circular junction boxes shall be provided to facilitate pulling &
inspection of wires. Inspection boxes shall be suitably located in co-ordination with the Engineer-in-
charge. Conduits shall be bend using suitable size springs. Long radius bends shall be provided.
Heating shall not be used to bend the conduits. Size of conduit shall depend upon number and size of
wires to bedrawn.
M.S. CONDUIT
All conduit pipes shall be of approved gauge (not less than 16 SWG for conduits of sizes up to
32mm diameter and not less than 14 SWG for conduit of size above 32mm diameter) solid drawn
or reamed by welding finished with stove enameled surface. All conduit accessories shall be of
threaded type and under no circumstances pin grip type accessories shall be used. The maximum
number of PVC insulated 650/1100 volts grade copper conductor cable that can be drawn in
conduit of various sizes shall be as per IS code. No steel conduit less than 20mm in diameter
shall be used unless otherwisestated.
Page 145 of 202

CONDUIT JOINTS
Conduit pipes shall be joined by means of threaded couplers, and threaded accessories only. In long
distance straight run of conduits, inspection type couplers at reasonable intervals shall be provided or
running threads with couplers and jam nuts shall be provided. In the later case the bare threaded portion
shall be treated with anti-corrosive preservative. Threads on conduit pipes in all cases shall be between
13mm to 19mm long sufficient to accommodate pipes to full threaded portion of couplers or accessories.
Cut ends of conduit pipe shall have no sharp edges nor any burrs left to avoid damage to the insulation of
conductor while pulling them through such pipes.
Wherever conduit passes a building expansion joint, galvanized flexible metallic conduit shall be provided
for connecting rigid M.S. Conduit in either slab.
PROTECTION AGAINST CONDENSATION
The layout of conduit should be such that any condensation or sweating inside the conduit is drained out.
Suitable precaution should also be taken to prevent entry of insects inside the conduit.
PROTECTION OF CONDUIT AGAINST RUST
The outer surface of conduit including all bends, unions, tees, junction boxes etc forming part of conduit
system shall be adequately protected against rust when such system is exposed to weather by being
painted with two coats of oxide paint applied before they are fixed. In all cases, no bare threaded portion
of conduit pipe shall be allowed. Unless such bare thread portion of conduit is treated with anticorrosive
preservative or covered with approved plasticcompound.
PAINTING OF CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES
After installation, all accessible surface of conduit pipes, fittings, switch and regulator boxes etc. shall be
painted with two coats of approved enameled paint or aluminium paint as required to match the finish of
surrounding wall, trusses etc.
FIXING OF CONDUITS
SURFACE CONDUIT
Conduit pipes shall be fixed by heavy gauge saddles, secured to suitable wood plugs or other approved
plugs with screws in an approved manner at an interval of not more than one meter but on either side of
the couplers or bends or similar fittings, saddles shall be fixed at a distance of 30cm from the centreof
such fittings. The saddles should not be less than 24 gauge for conduits up to 25mm dia and not less
than 20 gauge for larger diameter conduits. The corresponding widths shall be 19mm & 25mm. Where
conduit pipes are to be laid along the trusses, steel joint etc. the same shall be secured by means of
special clamps made of MS. Where as it is not possible to drill holes in the trusses members suitable
clamps with bolts and nuts shall be used. All fixing arrangement like saddles, special purpose clamps,
nuts, bolts etc. shall deemed to be included in quoted rates ofconduit.
For 25mm diameter conduit width of clip shall be 19mm and of 20 SWG. For conduit of 32mm and
above, width of clip shall be 25mm and of 18SWG.
Where conduit pipes are to be laid above false ceiling, either conduit pipes shall be clamp to false ceiling
frame work or suspended with suitable supports from the soffit of slab. For conduit pipe run along with
wall, the conduit pipe shall be clamped to wall above false ceiling in uniform pattern with special clamps if
required to be approved by the Engineer-In-Charge atsite.
RECESS / CONCEALED CONDUIT
The chase in the wall shall be neatly made and of ample dimensions to permit the conduit to be fixed in
the manner desired. In the case of building under construction, conduit shall be buried in the wall before
plastering and shall be finished neatly after erection of conduit. In case of exposed brick/rubble masonry
work, special care shall be taken to fix the conduit and accessories in position along with the building
work. Entire work ofchasing the wall, fixing the conduit in chases, and during the conduit in mortar
Page 146 of 202

before plastering shall form part of point wiring work. (For chase cutting-chase cutting machine shall be
used and no manual cutting shall be allowed).
The conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of stapples or by means of saddles not more than 60cm apart or
by any other approved means of fixing. Fixing of standard bends and elbows shall be avoided as far as
practicable and all curves maintained by bending the conduit pipe itself with the long radius which shall
permit easy drawing in of conductors. All threaded joint of conduit pipe shall treated with some approved
preservative compound to secure protection against rust. Suitable inspection boxes to the barest
minimum requirements shall be provided to permit periodical inspection and to facilitate replacement of
wires, if necessary. These shall be mounted flush with the wall. Suitable ventilating holes shall be
provided in the inspection box covers. Wherever the length of conduit run is more than 10 metres, then
circular junction box shall be provided to facilitate pulling of wires. The chicken wire mesh shall be
provided by civil agency.
OUTLET BOXES:-
Switch/outlet boxes shall be made of metal on all sides except on the front. Boxes shall be hot dip
galvanized mild steel. Up to 20 x 30cm size M.S. Box shall have wall thickness of 16 SWG and MS
boxes above 20x30cm size shall be of 14 SWG. The metallic boxes shall be painted with anticorrosive
paint before erection. Clear depth of the box shall not be less than 60mm. all fitting shall be fitted in flush
pattern. Switch/outlet boxes shall be suitable to house modular type light andpoweraccessories. Earthing
stud to be provoded for connection of earthing wire in side of box at near any corner. Nakka shall be 3
mmthick.
FAN BOX:-
Fan Box shall be made out of 14 gauge M.S. sheet in hexagonal shape. The diaof box shall be 150 mm
and depth of box shall be 80 mm. A M.S. cover plate size 160 mm x 160mm x 16 gauge to be provided in
the back of fan box. 12 mm dia M.S. Rod to be provided for fan hanging arrangement in the box. A 28
mmdia knockout To be made in all six hexagonal vertical part for conduit entry in the box. The box
shall be painted with 2 coat of primer. A 180 mm dia , 2 mm thick hylem sheet Cover to be provided. (The
sample to be approved before procurement / execution by owner /consultant.)
JUNCTION TEE / DEEP TEE :-
The tee shall be made out of C.I. material. The dia of tee shall be 60 mm and the Depth of tee shall be 70
mm. The thickness of deep tee wall shall be 1.3mm to 1.5mm. (The sample to be approved before
procurement/execution by owner / consultant.)
ERECTION AND EARTHING OF CONDUITS:-
The conduit of each circuit or section shall be completed before conductors are drawn in. The entire
system of conduit after erection shall be tested for mechanical and electrical continuity throughout and
permanently connected to earth conforming to the requirement by means of special approved type of
earthing clamp effectively fastened to conduit pipe in a workmen like manner for a perfect continuity
between the earth and conduit. Gas, water pipe shall not be used as earth medium.
LIGHT & POWER ACCESSORIES:-
GENERAL
All light & power accessories shall be of modular range of plate switch type and shall be of one
manufacturer (brand) and type.
LIGHT SWITCHES
All switches for control of light shall be of 6/10 Amp unless otherwise stated. All switches shall be
modular range of plate switch type. The switches shall be rocker mechanism type with silver
contract. All switches shall be of white finish or as sample approved byowner/consultant.
Page 147 of 202

6/16 AMP SWITCH SOCKET OUTLET.
Switch socket outlet on lighting circuit shall be of 3 pin 6Amp outlet shall have safety shutters. The switch
shall be of rocker mechanism type with silver contact. Socket outlet shall be shutter type and of modular
range of plate type and having white finish. Switch and socket outlet shall be mounted on a suitable size
GI box with suitable size modular cover plate.
Switch socket outlet on power circuit shall be of 6 pin 16/6 Amp outlet (Universal Socket) shall have
safety shutters. The switch shall be of rocker mechanism type with silver contacts. Socket outlet shall be
shutter type and of modular range of plate type and having white finish. Switch and socket outlet shall be
mounted on a suitable size G I box with suitable size modular coverplate.
TELEPHONE OUTLET
Each Telephone outlet location shall be provided with 1 No. telephone Jack type outlet (RJ11). The
telephone outlet shall be of modular range of plate switch type and shall be mounted on a suitable size G
IBoxwith modular range coverplate.
WIRING
All FRLS insulated copper conductor multi-stranded wires shall conform to relevant IS codes. Cable
conductor size and material shall be as specified in BOQ.
All internal wiring shall be carried out with FRLS insulated wires of 1100 volts grade. The circuit wiring for
points shall be carried out in looping in system and no joint shall be allowed in the length of the
conductors. Circuit wiring shall be laid in separate conduit originating from distribution board to switch
board for light/fan. A light/fan switch board may have more than one circuit but shall have to be of same
phase. Looping circuit wiring shall be drawn in same conduit as for point wiring. Each circuit shall have a
separate neutral wire. Neutral looping shall be carried out from point to point or in light/fan switch boards.
A separate earth wire shall be provided along with circuit wiring for each circuit. For point wiring red or
yellow or blue colour wire shall be used for phase and black colour wire for neutral. Circuit wiring shall be
carried out with red, yellow or blue colour FRLS insulated wire for RYB phase wire respectively and black
colour FRLS insulated wire for the neutral wires. FRLS insulated green colour wire shall be used as earth
continuity conductor and shall be drawn along with other wires. No wire shall be drawn into any conduit
until all work of any nature, that may cause injury to wire is completed. Care shall be taken in pulling the
wires so that no damage occurs to the insulation of the wire.
Before the wires are drawn into the conduit, the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned of moisture, dust
and dirt. Drawing & jointing of copper conductor wires & cables shall be as per CPWDspecifications.
JOINTS
All joints shall be made at main switches, distribution board socket and switch boxes only. No joint shall
be made in conduits & junction boxes. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet tooutlet.
SUB MAINS
Sub-main wiring shall be carried out with FRLS Insulated Copper multi-stranded wires/cables in suitable
M.S Conduit unless otherwise specified in BOQ / drawing.
Sub-main cable where called for shall be of the rated capacity and approved make. Every sub-main shall
be drawn into an independent adequate size conduit. Adequate size draw boxes shall be provided at
convenient locations to facilitate easy drawings of the sub-main cables. Cost of junction box/drawn box is
deemed to be included in the rates of sub-main wiring. An independent FRLS insulated copper earth wire
of proper rating shall be provided for every sub-main. Single phase sub-main shall have single earth wire
whereas three phase sub-main shall be provided with two earth wire.
Where sub-mains cables are connected to the switchgear, sufficient extra lengths of sub-main and mains
cable shall be provided to facilitate easy connections and maintenance. For termination ofcables crimping
type cable socket/lugs shall be provided. Same colour code as for circuit wiring shall be followed.
Page 148 of 202

LOAD BALANCING
Balancing of circuits in three phase installation shall be planned before the commencement of wiring and
shall be strictly adhered to.
COLOUR CODE FOR CIRCUIT & SUB-MAIN WIRING
Colour code for circuit & sub-main wiring installation shall be Red, Yellow, Blue for three phases. Black
for neutral and green for earth in case of insulated earthwire.
CLASSIFICATION OF POINTS:-
General
Classification and measurement of Point wiring shall be as follows:
Conduiting& wiring from switch to first point including circuit wiring along with conduits, shall be classified as
―One point (First point) controlled by one number 6Amp one way/two way switch‖.
Conduiting& wiring from first point to next point to be controlled by same switch in same circuit shall be
classified as ―Looping Points‖.
CONDUCTOR SIZE
Wiring shall be carried out with following sizes of ZHFR insulated multi-stranded single core copper
conductor wire/cable.
Lightpoint - 1.5 Sq.mm

Ceiling/Cabin/Exhaust FanPoint - 1.5 Sq.mm
Plug Point (5 ASS outlet) - 1.5 Sq.mm
CircuitWiring - 2.5 Sq.mm
MCB Control Light Point - 2.5 Sq.mm
General Power Point (15A S.S.outlet)-FirstPoint - 2.5 Sq.mm
General Power Point (15A S.S. outlet)-SecondPoint - 2.5 Sq.mm Power
Point for Geyser /A.C.Unit - 4.0 Sq.mm
TELEPHONE WIRE/CABLES:-
Separate conduits shall be provided for internal telephone wiring of telephone system commencing from
tag block. Each telephone outlet shall be wired with 2 pair telephone cable from the tag block. All telephone
wires shall be of 0.61mm dia annealed tinned high conductivity copper conductor PVC insulated & PVC
sheathed grey conforming to ITD specification SWS 113 B&C. Multipair PVC insulated cables laid in
conduit shall be provided for connecting various tag blocks. Telephone cables used for external
connections shall be armoured. These cable shall be laid directly in ground or in pipe etc. as call
forelsewhere.
Following number of 2 pair wires/cables shall be drawn in various sizes of conduits as listed below.
25mmconduit - Up to 6Cables
All telephone cables used in the building shall be PVC insulated PVC sheathed.
TELEPHONE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (TAG BLOCK):-
Tag block shall be mounted in M.S. box fabricated from 1.63 mm thick sheet steel. Box shall undergo a
rigorous metal treatment process i.e. degreasing, pickling, phospating, pasivating in de oxalate solution,
dry with compressed air in dust free atmospheric facility and disconnection module shall be in multiple of
10 pairs. Disconnection unit shall be mounted on back mounting frame.
Maximum number of PVC insulated 650/1100 V grade aluminium / copper conductor cable conforming to
IS: 694 – 1990, that can be drawn into rigid PVC/MS conduit.
Page 149 of 202

Nominal Cross- 20mm 25mm 32mm 38mm 51mm 64mm

sectional Area S B S B S B S B S B S B
of conductor in
Sq. mm
1.50 5 4 10 8 18 12 - - - - - -
2.50 5 3 8 6 12 10 - - - - - -
4 3 2 6 5 10 8 - - - - - -
6 2 - 5 4 8 7 - - - - - -
10 2 - 4 3 6 5 8 6 - - - -
16 - - 2 2 3 3 6 5 10 7 12 8
25 - - - - 3 2 5 3 8 6 9 7
35 - - - - - 3 2 6 5 8 6
50 - - - - - - - - 5 3 6 5
70 - - - - - - - - 4 3 5 4
NOTE:
The above table shows the maximum capacity of conduits for a simultaneous drawing in of cables.
The columns headed ‗S‘ apply to runs of conduits which have distance not exceeding 4.25m between
draw in boxes and which do not deflect from the straight by an angle of more than 15 degrees. The
columns headed ‗B‘ apply to runs of conduit which deflect from the straight by an angle of more than 15
degrees.
Conduit sizes are the nominal external diameters.
SPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF LIGHT FIXTURE:-
SUPPORTS AND FIXINGS
Where fluorescent luminaries 1200 mm or more in length are supported directly by the conduit system
they shall be fixed with light point junction boxes of which shall form an integral part of the conduit
system.
Where the weight of the luminaire is supported by a conduit box or cable trunking the fixing of the conduit
box or trunking shall be adequate for the purpose and approved by Architect/Consultant.
Luminaires fitted with tungsten filament, lamps and having metal back plates shall not be fixed directly to
conduit box in which a thermoplastic material is the principal load-bearing member.
Support of luminaires from cable trunking shall be by means of appropriate clamps or brackets.
Luminaires mounted on or recessed into suspended ceilings shall not be support on the false ceiling
unless specifically shown and approved.
For wall mounted luminaires, the mounting height specified on drawings shall be above finished floor level
measured to the centre of the conduit box, unless otherwise indicated.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
Where luminaires, other than those are fixed direct to circular boxes or supported by pendants or chains,
the final circuit wiring shall terminate at a terminal block in the conduit box.
Where luminaires having fluorescent tubes are fixed direct to circular conduit boxes, the final circuit wiring
may be terminated within the luminaire unless otherwise indicated. The wiring shall enter each luminaire
at the conduit entry nearest to the terminal block and where the loop – in wiring system is used leave by
same entry wiring shall not pass through aluminaire.
Page 150 of 202

Where luminaires are mounted on or recessed into a suspended ceiling connection shall be by flexible
cord from a plug in ceiling rose shall be located not more than 500 mm from the access panel in the ceiling
and shall be firmly supported, unless otherwise approved by theconsultant.
Cables and flexible cords for final connections to luminaires shall be suitable for the operating
temperatureofthe luminaire. Flexible cords for chain suspensions, if any shall have a white sheath unless
otherwiseindicated.
The size of final connection cables or flexible cords shall be as indicated.

Cables and cords passing close to ballast within a luminaire shall be suitable for the operating temperature
of the ballast. Heat resistant sleeves shall beprovided.
A protective conductor shall connect the earthing terminal or earthing contact of each luminaire to an
earthing terminal incorporated in the adjacent conduit box. Where the final connection is by flexible cord
the protective conductor shall form part of the cord.
Where luminaires are recessed in the false ceiling, luminaires shall be suspended with MS conduit with
ball & socket arrangement, check nut etc. Suspension arrangement shall be fixed to steel/RCC structure
with suitable purpose made clamps etc. (Cost of suspension arrangement is deemed to be included in the
rate of installation/erection of luminaires). Contractor shall submit the shop drawing for proposed
suspension arrangement of various types of light fixtures in various type of ceiling and shall obtain
necessary approval from theEngineer-in-Charge.
The light fixtures and fans shall be assembled and installed in position complete and ready for service in
accordance with the detailed drawings, manufacturer‘s instructions and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-
in-Charge. Fixtures shall be suspended true to alignment plumb level and capable of resisting all lateral
and vertical forces and shall be fixed as required. All ceiling fans shall be provided with suspension
arrangement in the concrete slab/roof members. It shall be the duty of the contractor to make these
provisions at the appropriate stage & locations shown on the drawings. Fan boxwith MS hook shall be as
per CPWD specifications. Suspended type fluorescent light fixture shall be fixed to circular junction box
with a metallic ball and socket arrangement. Light fixture in general shall be directly fixed to ceiling slab
with rawlplugs. All switch and outlet boxes shall be bonded to earth through connector blocks. MS pipe
shall be fixed with suitable fixing accessories and metal continuity shall bemaintained.
CONDUITING AND WIRING FOR SAMTV SYSTEM:-
CONDUITING
Conduiting for SMATV system shall be carried out in M.S. Conduit. Conduiting shall be carried out as
specified in point wiring head.
OUTLETS
All SMATV outlets shall be provided with modular range of cover plate, box and coaxial outlet. Cover plate
shall match in shape & finish with other light and poweraccessories.
JUNCTION BOX
Suitable size of metallic junction box shall be provided for termination of conduit for SAMTV system. Box
shall be made of 1.6mm thick MS sheet and shall be treated before painting. Front of the junction box shall
be provided with 3mm thick phenolic laminated sheetcover.
COAXIAL CABLES
The coaxial cable shall be of wideband type (RG-11 for Riser & RG-6 for distribution)
TAP OFF
These shall be of ultra wide bandwidth and of hybrid type. These shall have a flat frequency response over
the entire operating range. These shall have aaluminium cast housing for high frequency radiation
resistance.
The Tap offs shall be in one way, two way and four way configurations.
Page 151 of 202

SPLITTERS
These shall be of ultra wide band width and of hybrid type. These shall have a flat frequency response
over the entire operating range. These shall have aaluminium cast housing for high frequency radiation
resistance.
The splitters shall be in 2 way, 3 way & 4 way configurations
3.15 FIRE DETECTIONSYSTEM
DESCRIPTION:
The work shall consist of furnishing, installation, testing &commssioningof a complete high quality
advanced technology early detection Intelligent Analogue Soft Addressable fire alarm system as shown
on the drawings and specifiedherein.
REFERENCES FOR INSTALLATION:
German Standards VDE (VerbandDeutcherElectrotechniker)

DIN VDE14675 and VDE 0833 Fire Alarm Systems
NFPA 72- National Fire Protection Association
British Standard Institute / European Standards

All Applicable codes and standards including BS EN 54
SUBMITTALS:
A. Product data for fire alamsystem components including dimensionedplans, sections,and

elevations showing minimum clearances, installed features and devices, and list of materials and
data.
B. Shopdrawings.
C. System operation description including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit
and sequence of operations for all manually and automatically initiated system inputs. Description
shall cover this specificproject.
D. Product certification signed by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system components certifying that
their products comply with any one of the referenced standards, completely with specifications and
Vds approval/UL.
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:
A. All the components of fire alarm system shall be provided in manufacturer‘s original new and
unopened packing bearing manufacturer‘s name andlabel.
B. Store materials, not in actual use, in covered and well ventilated area and protect them from dirt,
dust, moisture, direct sunlight and extremetemperatures.
C. For further requirements follow manufacturer‘s written instructions regarding storage and
handling.
WARRANTY
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor, manufacturer and installer of fire alarm system
for the period of 1 year from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the
repair and replacement of material with manufacturing defects and workmanship as directed by
the engineer.
Page 152 of 202

QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer‘s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire alarm systems and
components, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 3
years period, and be subject to approval ofengineer.
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced specialist sub-contractor who is authorized by the system

manufacturer, and subject to approval of theengineer.
C. All the components and installations shall comply with the requirements of DIN VDE 14675 & VDE
0833/NFPA for design &installation.
D. Provide system and components specified in this section that are listed and approved by
Vds&confrom to equivalent DIN/EN/ULstandards.
E. Single source responsibility: All components and accessories shall be product of signle
manufacturer.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. The fire detection and alarm system shall comprise of Automatic Soft Addressable Modular design
main fire alarm control panels, Dual optical smoke & heat MULTI Sensors , Blue LED Optical
Smoke & Heat MULTI Sensors, Optical Smoke / Heat/ CO Gas MULTI sensors, Loop powered
Dual Optical Smoke/Heat sensor with integral Sounder / Flasher / Speech units, manual call points,
electronic wall mounted Alarm sounder/flasher/speech combined devices, Transponder interface
units, each with its own short circuit built-in isolators. All loop cabling and any other components
and accessories deemed necessary for a safe, reliable and satisfactory system shall conform to the
relevant and applicable requirements and recommendations of DIN EN 54. The system shall be
fully programmed to accommodate fire alarm zones. The system shall be configured to allow on site
modifications with the minimum of disruption using the PC based software to facilitate future
changes or alterations to existing buildings/network onsite.
B. The fire alarm and detection system shall provide the following facilities as aminimum:
The system shall be intelligent in operation with advanced decentralised intelligence technology.
Each detector shall have its own procesor with algorithms built in the device to take a fire or fault
decision. System with centarlised intelligence by providing signal levels to the control panel are not
acceptable.
The system will be capable of providing fire, fault disablement and supervisory monitoring facilities
as required by DIN EN 54 Pt 2. All devices on a loop shall have built in SHORT CIRCUIT LINE
ISOLATORS for wiring fault isolation to protect the system. ―Group Circuit Monitors‖ which
isolate/protect sections of a loop circuit, i.e. a group of field devices are not acceptable.
All system components and devices shall be connected to two-wire loop circuits (as shown in the
typical schematics) with each component having its own individual built-in isolator, should have
sensors with integrated sounder in a same unit and no extra cabling should require to power up the
sounder. Removal or disconnection of any component from the loop shall not affect the functioning
and performance of other components and the system. Please note that the group isolators, which
are used to isolate a section of a loop in case of fault, are not acceptable.
System shall be of automatically addressable type i.e. all the devices on the loops of the FACP
shall be allocated addresses automatically from the PC / panel at the time of system power. The
loop devices shall also be able to commission by using PC inteface without the need ofFACP.
And also given an address during commissioning, the value of which shall be stored in non-volatile
memory, within the electronics module of the outstation. This value shall be read during loop
allocation and provided it is valid shall be used to setup the outstations primary address.
Page 153 of 202

Automatic Addressing shall cover the benefits of Soft Addressing and also overcome the limitations
of Hard Addressing. This means that If the devices are inserted or removed all the existing devices
shall keep the same address and programmed activations and use labels remain unchanged. The
panel with PC shall allocate the address to ensure that it is impossible for two devices to have the
same address. Fire Detection and Alarm Systems, which rely only on Coding, Programmer or hard
addressing techniques are not acceptable.
Facilities shall be provided to constantly monitor and check the following circuits and fault
conditions:
- The power supply to the loop /s;

- For open-circuit, short-circuit, earth fault and any other fault condition in the loopwiring;
- For communication failure and errors in all cards andloops
- For faults in keyboard and printercircuits
- All devices, etc. shall be installed on the sameloop.
All devices shall be assigned a maximum of 25 character or 2 lines of max. 30 characters each with
a ¼ VGA Display. In case of fire, fault or warning, the label of device sensing threshold shall appear
on visual display unit of the panel.
Any event i.e. Fire, fault or warning shall be recorded with time, date and place of occurrence in the
memory of FACP. These events can either be displayed on normal or ¼ VGA Dislay of the FACP or
printed, as required. Provision shall be done at the fire alarm control panels to silence the loop
powered alarm sounders but the visual indication shall remain until the system is reset. The
detectors shall have auto learn sensitivity adjustements. The main fire alarm control panels shall be
located as shown on the schematics and the floor drawings.
GENERAL
A. All major component of fire alarm system shall be product of a single manufacturer and shall
conform to the requirement of EN54, Vds,UL approved and be designed acc. to DIN VDE14675
and VDE 0833/NFPA Fire Alarm Systems CODE OF PRACTICE FOR SYSTEM DESIGN,
INSTALLATION ANDSERVICING.
B. The power supply breakers for FDA system shall be marked ― DONOTDISCONNECT. FIRE
ALARMSUPPLY‖
ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
A. In the event of a fire being reported from the smoke/heat Detectors, activation of manual call
points or sprinkler operation the sequence of alarm operation shall be as follows: If a fire
condition is reported from a smoke detector then the evacuation will be done initially by the local
integral sounder. Then after a certain delay (to be agreed at the time of commissioning) the
evacuation message shall be announced on that fire zone only. If after 3 minutes the alarm has
not been acknowledged, the evacuation message shall also be announced on the other adjacent
zones. All other zones shall be given the Alert message. The evacuation of the building shall be
staged in phases to allow orderly movement ofpeople.
B. If a Manual Break Glass Unit is activated or a sprinkler flow switch is operated, then the
evacuation shall be transmitted immediately to the affected fire zone plus the adjacentzones.
C. Activation of the fire alarm system shall directly initiate some or all of the following to be agreed
as a part of the overall engineeringpolicy.
 Signal to all elevator machine rooms indicating fire status (to controllifts)
 Release doors normally locked by magneticdevices.
 Release doors normally held open by magneticdevices
 Shutdown mechanical equipment ventilationplant
 Shutdown general exhaustfans
 Start up smoke extractfans
 Start up exhaust make upfans
 Start up stair vestibule pressurizationfans
 Automatically operate firedampers
Page 154 of 202

 Initiate alert signals to panels in the adjacent officetower.

 Sprinkler valves, flow switches and other monitored valves shall be directly supervised by the
fire alarmsystems.
These shall include but not limited to the following:

 Building automation system via WINMAGOPC
 Emergency lightingsystem
 Security system.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND DEVICES
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL:
A. The panel shall be modular Multifunctional computer controlled using 32 bit processor.De-
centralised control and monitoring functions to be realised on the loop and spur.. The panel shall
be complete with, but not limited to, the followingelements:
1) Visual display unit capable of displaying 8 lines 40 characters backlit display / ¼ VGA display as
optional.
2) Built-in optional 40 character internalprotocol thermal printer orexternal.
3) Built-in full numeric keyboard with functionkeys.
4) 64 Single Zone Indicator expandable upto 192SZI
5) USBPort
6) Ethernetconnection
7) SMART Card mediaslot.
8) Keyswitch to prevent unauthorised operation ofkeypad.
9) Integral sealed lead acid battery and charger, with 24 hour back up in the event of supply mains
failure.
10) Essential controls – Delay, panel reset, Audible alarm off, Disconnect master box, additional
messages, verify/cancel fault buzzer. Fire, Pre-Alarm, Trouble, Disconnection lamps. Each lamp
shall also have appropriate indication (Releasing Systems activated, Master box, Delay , Verify,
CPU failure, Inoperation normal condition & failure of powersupply / battery) Simple menu driven
function keys with password protection shall allow users to an extensive range of software based
features suchas:
- Overview
- Service
- Timefunctions
- Informations
- Last 10000 systemevents
- Current fault and warninglogs.
- Interrogation of sensorcleanliness
- On/Off, Enable/ disable sensors, zones, sounders, interface unitchannels.
- Status ofdetectors
- Alarmcounters
- Printer on, off, line feed and testfacilities.
11) All control buttons and keyboard shall be enclosed behind a lockable cover,Up to 127 device
capacity per 3.5km loop and a TTY/ RS 485 communicationoption.
12) In addition to the above, all other necessary controls, elements and accessories shall be
included to provide a complete and efficient panel conforming to the requirements of DIN EN
54/UL.
13) LOOPPARAMETERS:
Individual loop circuits will be capable of accommodating the following.

 Up to a maximum of 127 addressable devices up to 3.5 kms looplength
 Up to 32 loop powered IQ8 Alarm addressableSounders.
 Up to 32 looppoweredIQ8 Alarm electronicStrobes.
 Up to 32 loop powered combined electronic sounders andstrobes
Page 155 of 202

 Up to 80 sensors with integral alarmsounder

 The detection loop shall have the ability to support both sensors and sounders connected on the
same 2 core loopcircuit.
 Up to 127 looppowered inputmodules.
 Should have the ability to spur off the detection loop without using ‗T‘ breaker devices, without
anydegradation.
CENTRAL GRAPHICS SUPERVISOR COMPUTER:
The graphic visual display shall pictorially represent Fire, Fault and Emergency events on a visual display
unit (VDU). The purpose of this facility shall be to provide the operator with the additional visual
information over and above the text provided. All system events i.e. fire, fault and warning shall
be automatically printed onto the graphics printer. Operation of the graphics terminal shall
normally be by selection of the appropriate pages guided by a navigation system. However, it
shall automatically track to the relevant initiating device for the first occurrence of each type of
the event. The graphics terminal shall provide thefollowing:
 DUAL LANGUAGE ENGLISH /ARABIC.

 Single Station version
 Multi Station Version
 MultiNetworks
 ModemInterface
 Communications shall bebi-directional
 Free programming of alarm programs and alarm condition through SIA programming
Software shall have software interface using driverswith:
 Intruder AlarmPanels
 Fire Alarm Panels
 VideoSystem
 Access ControlSystem
Web Function: PC on Intranet/Internet using a common Web-browser shall be able to access the
software with password.
Notification: Software shall be capable of transmitting text and voice messages to specific
devices like cell phones, pagers etc.
Escalation: Software shall be capable of starting escalation action if within certain/configured

time period the notification is notacknowledged.
Integration of IP telephony shall be possible at least with ALCATEL to have innovative linking of
telephony via IQphone enabling the end-user devices to be used as multifunctional operating
and display terminals with variable adaptation ofapplications.
HTML View: Applications such as Video streaming or BMS programs which have a Web server
availble shall be visualised clearly by Supervisor Software browser window USING Supervisor
Interface.
Events display/status bar giving a clear and concise view of the current events on the fire alarm
system, Intrusion CCTV or ACCESS control.
 Ability to control and change thefollowing:
 Disableactions
 Labels & Auxiliarytext
 User Actionbuttons
 Historic data of all the systemevents
 Access levels/passwords to target specific levels of access to specificusers
 Graphical representation (if required) of the site allowing the exact location of the fire alarm
events, e.g., fires, faultsetc.
 Panel remote buzzercancellation
 Eventacknowledgement
 Clock synchronization with panels with local adjustmentfacility
 Touch screensupport
Page 156 of 202

The terminal shall assign a number of different graphic pages to each fire event – from a site
overview of building layout, through a floor layout, breaking the site down into increasing levels
of detail. Number of graphic pages required shall be finally determined by the client/consultant.
For tender assume 4 pages per floor, based on the drawings produced on AutoCAD by the
Contractor.
The system shall operate on the Windows environment. The platform specification required is an
IBM PC compatible with the following minimum specifications.
Pentium IV Processor , 1GHz speed

256 MB RAM, 1 GB Hard Disk
XGA-graphic card with min. 4 MB video memory
Minimum 14 super VGA color screen
Two serial ports and two parallel ports & Real time clock
3.5 inch 1.44-MB floppy disk
CD RW & Microsoft mouse
The combined text and graphics package shall be provided on the same supervisor. The
supervisor with touch screen is recommended.
SYSTEM EVENT PRINTER
A. Thesystemprintershallbe40characterthermalprinteroptionalin-builtonthemaincontrol panel, and

shall log all events, change of status, alarm and fault messages along with time of the day and
date. An external 80 couloumn dot matrix printer along with system PC is also recommended.
The printer shall provide the following:

- Hard copy of every eventoccurring
- Status read out of every addressablepoint
- Devices tested on a walktest
- Contaminated detectors needingreplacement
- Single point scan printout of analoguevalues
- Hard copy of historiclog.
FIELD DETECTION DEVICES
GENERAL: ANALOGUE DETECTORS & BASES
All analogue detectors and bases shall be provided by the same manufacturer of the
control system. No other make of detectors will be permissible.
All analogue detectors shall have real intelligence itself. This means even without control panel
the detector can make decision, adapt to different environmental condition and diagnose itself.
They shall have decentralized intelligence, automatic function self test, CPU failure mode, alarm
and operating data memory and integrated short circuit line isolators. The detector bases for
interfacing between the loop wiring and the detector head shall be manufactured by means of
injection molded ABS plastic coloured white and shall not contain any electronics for addressing.
The base fixings should be suitable for any industry standard BESA or conduit boxes. All bases
shall include the option to provide a programmable relay output for interfacing, providing a dry
contact for third party. All bases shall be provided with a plastic removable dust cover for
protection during site construction as well as an IP rated sealing gasket to prevent dirt and
moisture from entering through from the fixing surface. Each base shall include a lock and
removal of locked detectors shall be achievable only through the use of the appropriate removal
tools as specified by the manufacturer of the detectors. Detectors removal tools are to be
handed over on completion of the contract as part of the spare parts to theclient.
Removal of a detector from it‘s associated base shall not affect the continuity of the detection
loop.
Page 157 of 202

The Fire alarm manufacturer shall have the complete range of following analogue
ADDRESSABLE detectors with decentralized intelligence as standard so as to meet the specific
applications of the site.
a) Heat Detectors ( fixed & ROR temperature)

b) Optical SmokeDetector
c) Optical Smoke & HeatDetector
d) Dual angle Optical/HeatDetector
e) Blue Light Optical / Heat SmokeDetector
f) Optical Smoke, Heat &CO gasDetector
g) Manual CallPoints
All of the above shall be compatible with the aforementioned base providing inter-
changeability between detector heads, without the requirement for switch settings. All detectors
shall also have an integral short circuit isolator, which in the event of a single cable fault will
isolate the ―culprit‖ piece of cable and retain all devices on the loop operationally.
Each detector shall possess two integral LED giving a red flashing indication for fire and green
for normal operation. For remote locations, each detector shall be capable of connection to a
remote LED unit by means of 2 core wire connection. Detectors shall be white in colour and
manufactured from ABS plastic. All electronics and associated sensing elements will be housed
within this unit, these components being hermitically sealed to prevent their operation from being
impaired by dust, dirt and humidity. The sensitivity off all detectors shall be adjustable from a
software. It shall be possible to programme detector sensor sensitivity directly on the loop using
interface with a laptop PC and appropriate programming software from manufacturer.
For MULTI SENSOR detectors, disablement of each sensor element shall be ossible
individually or for whole loop. Also this disablement feature shall be possible to have
manually or time / event controlled.
All detectors shall be provided with a plastic removable dust cover for protection during site
construction. A semi-flush recessing kit for analogue detectors shall be available for each
detector type incorporating the standard detector base.
HEAT DETECTORS
Install as shown in the drawings. These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 5 and
shall be VdS /UL approved. This shall be a dedicated heat only detector to provide fixed
temperature heat as well as rate of rise sensing. It should be fully compliant with EN54 part 5 to
provide grades of A1.
OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR:
Install as shown in the drawings .Analogue Addressable Optical Smoke Detectors. These shall
be of Automatic addressable Optical type with inbuilt isolator in a single head. The optical
element shall detect visible smoke from slow smoldering fires. Smoke sensing design shall
comply with EN 54 part 7 and shall be VdS/UL approved. It shall have microprocessors, short-
circuit isolators and all electronic components and circuitry suitable for an Analogue addressable
system. The detectors shall also have 360 degree viewing LED fire indicator. Detectors
mounted in the false ceilings shall be provided with semi flush mountingkits.
OPTICAL SMOKE /HEAT DETECTOR
Install as shown in the drawings .These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 5 & 7
and shall be VdS/UL approved. These detectors shall have combined two individual sensing
elements to provide excellent cover for both types of fires (slow smoldering & fast free burning
fires). These detectors shall be of Automatic addressable Combined Optical/Heat type with
inbuilt isolator in a single head.
Optical sensing shall be carried out by means of an Infra-red LED transmitting a pulse of light
across an obtuse angled chamber & heat sensing shall be carried out by a thermistor, sampling
the surrounding environmental temperature.
Page 158 of 202

DUAL ANGLE OPTICAL/HEAT DETECTOR
Install as shown in the drawings .These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 5 & 7
and shall be VdS/UL approved. This device shall combine two individual sensing elements to
provide excellent cover for both ―types‖ of fires. (Slow shouldering and fast free burning).
OPTICAL SENSING: Shall be carried out by 2 infra-red LED transmitters across 2 separate
Optical detection angles. This sensor shall process both the forward and backward scattered
Light caused by entering the detection chamber of device, allowing the detector to Differentiate
between real smoke and non-smoke particles e.g. Steam & Dust.
HEAT SENSING: Shall be carried out by a thermistor, sampling the surrounding environmental
temperature.
OPTICAL SMOKE / HEAT / CO DETECTOR
Install as shown in the drawings .These shall comply with the requirements of EN 54: Part 5 & 7.
The sensor element of the optical/heat detector with CO shall be as per the specification for the
optical/heat detector. The CO element shall be incorporated into the optical chamber to sense
the presence of carbon monoxide gas emissions from shouldering fires. In normal environments
the CO element shall have a life expectancy of a minimum of 5years.
MANUAL CALL POINTS
Install as shown in the drawings. The manual initiation devices shall be electrically compatible
with all of the aforementioned detector types and shall be complete with all- electronic
components and circuitry for an automatic safe addressable device. The manual call point shall
have an inbuilt short circuit isolator and an inbuilt microprocessor to ensure a response time of
less than 1 second.
The MCP unit shall also handle all communication to the control panel. All electronic devices
contained within the MCP shall be hermetically sealed so as to prevent damage from hostile
environment conditions: e.g dust with minimum rating of IP43.
The MCP operating voltage shall be 8-42 volts DC, RED similar to RAL 3020. If the MCP are
located in public areas a transparent cover shall be provided as a protection tp prevent
inadvertent activation. MCP shall be available in two designs Large & small for aesthetic
purposes to architects.
The MCP shall have an input faclity to connect conventional devices. It should have an option of
using either frangible glass allowing for complete removal upon operation or plastic pane
resettable function. There shall be no text but SYMBOLS on the MCP ( burning house / press to
break ).
The device can be tested functionally without the need to either remove the front cover and/or
breaking the glass, with a special test key (supplied as standard). The key shall insert the
underside of the MCP ensuring easy access of the key at all times.
These devices will comply fully with EN 54 part 1.
FIELD ALARM DEVICES
Electronic sounders, combined sounder/strobe and standalone strobes shall be loop

powered for direct connection to the 2 core detection loop shall be electrically compatible with all
initiation devices. These wall mounted units shall be available in red or white and suitable for
both indoor and outdoor applications with an ingress protection rating of IP31 and IP65
respectively.
All electronic sounders, sounder/strobe and strobe only versions shall have alarm signals
synchronized across all the detection loops of the fire alarm control panel.
Page 159 of 202

All alarm devices shall have a short circuit isolation device provided as an integral
component of the device.
All sounders shall have a ‗soft start‘ feature controlled by the fire alarm panel, whereby a low
initial volume can be set and then increased at a defined rate upto a maximum volume setting.
All alarm devices shall be provided by the same manufacturer of the control system. No other
make of detectors will be permissible The Fire alarm manufacturer shall have the complete
range of following alarm devices with built in short circuit line isolators so as to meet the specific
applications of thesite.
a) AddressableSounder
b) AddressableFlasher
c) Addressable Sounder /Flasher
d) Addressable SpeechSounder
e) Addressable Sounder / Flasher /Speech
ADDRESSABLE ALARM SOUNDER
Alarm sounders shall be capable of providing a minimum sound level of 97dBA ± 2 dBA @
1meter.
The sounder shall be capable of providing 4 different sound signals, which are
selected/configured from 19 tone types stored in the device.
Each sounder shall include its own microprocessor to handle loop communications and
monitoring of the internal sound element during an alarm condition. This shall allow faulty
devices to be automatically identified during the weekly test procedure. All associated electronic
components shall be hermetically sealed to provide protection from hostile operating
environments.
It shall be possible to connect up to 32 Addressable Alarm sounders to each detection loop of

the fire alarm control panel. These devices will comply fully with EN 54 part3.
FIELD INTERFACE TRANSPONDERS
These devices shall be directly connected to the loop, four variants shall be available as
standard, these being:
(i) 4 In / 2 Out interfaceunit

(ii) 1 In interfaceunit
(iii) 32 LED output interfaceunit
(iv) 12 Relay output Interfaceunit.
These units shall be self-contained wall mountable units, similar in finish to the main control
panel.
(i) 4 In / 2 Out interfaceunit
Interface units shall be capable of accepting 4 input signals, 2 output signals. Dependent upon
the specific application, input signals may be interpreted by the system as any of the following:
 Fire signal input

 Fault signalinput
 Supervisory signalinput
 Event signalinput
The exact nature of which shall be selected by means of the commissioning software. These
units will accept and or supply clean contact signals either normally open or normally closed
(configurable) OR switched voltage inputs from conventional detectors or MCP‘s.
Page 160 of 202

The output contacts shall be rated at 30V / 1 amp. DC output of the unit shall be provided with
single pole change over contacts for control of plant, door release units or power output to drive
conventional bells, sounders etc. Both the outputs on the interface shall be individually
programmable. External power supply 12V / 24 VDC shall be provided to this unit
As with other outstations previously mentioned, interface units will contain local processing in
order to handle all signalling and loop communications. Product shall be approved by VdS.
(ii) 1in interfaceunit
Interface units shall be capable of accepting 1 input signal. Dependent upon the specific
application, input signals may be interpreted by the system as any of the following:
 Fire signalinput
 Fault signalinput
 Supervisory signalinput
 Event signalinput
The exact nature of which shall be selected by means of the commissioning software.
These units will accept and or supply clean contact signals only, either normally open or
normally closed (configurable). No switched voltage inputs or outputs will be accepted.
order to handle all signalling and loop communications.
(iii) 32-LED output interfaceunits
These interface units contain 32 outputs for triggering LEDs of e.g. mimic panels. Each output
can be freely programmed with the commissioning software. The outputs are selectable as
positive or negative signals. There shall be possibility to test the outputs/LEDs manually with e.g.
a button.
(iv) 12-Relay output interfaceunits
These interface units contain 12 clean relays which are individually programmable with the
commissioning software. All relays can be configured as NO or NC.
NETWORKING OF CONTROL PANELS
It shall be possible to network connect up to 31 controls as a secure network connection. All

messages from a panel should be transmitted in both direction on the ring structure. Any wire-
break or short-circuit on the ring shall not effect data transmission. The network shall be
configurable so that single panels, groups of panels or all panels on the network operate the
same site configured cause and effect fire plan.
The network shall also be configured to allow master control from any one of the control panels
on the network. To cover longer distance repeaters or fibre optical cable and converters can be
used between two panels.
The network shall be able to accommodate intruder alarm panels.
There shall be extensive diagnostic functions on the panel to be used to localise faults caused by
interference or wiring, Networking shall be capable of carrying out using a datacablee.g IBM type 1
or CAT5. The distance between each panel shall be standard 1200 meters and capable of
extending upto 3000 meters using boosterrepeaters.
Page 161 of 202

NETWORKED LCD OPERATING PANELS / REPEATER PANELS
The Repeat Panel shall be sited at the Rear Entrance, guard house or location where it is manned 24
hrs.. It shall provide system repeat facilities to repeat all of the liquid crystal display messages as
well as the common indications. Repeat panel shall be interfaced for netwrok fire alarm control
panles, designed for standardised display and operatio as per DIN EN 54 part 2 and DIN VDE 0833
part 2. Installation and connection to FACP shall be via the short circuit and open circuit resistant
essernet. System network. RS 485 interface or TTY interface for connecting remote printers, and
fire brigade shall be vailable. The repeaters shall have minimum three common relays freely
programmable, monitored, potentila free upto 24VDC.
BATTERIES :
Batteries shall be provided and shall be the dry sealed lead-acid type. The batteries shall have ample
capacity. With primary power disconnected, to operate the fire alarm system for a period of 24 hours
with an optional 72 hours battery backup. Following this period of operation via batteries. The
batteries shall have ample capacity to operate all components of the system,including all alarm
signalling devices in the total alarm mode for a minimum period of 30 minutes.
WIRING
All cables associated with Fire Alarm installation shall be of fire resistant 2 core 1.5 sq. mm twisted
pair . Cables shall comply with BS 6207 Part 1. The cable is to BS 6207: Part 1 having, Typically no
more than 2 cores each core having 1.5 sq. mm cross sectional area, A red cover sheath (preferred
for alarm applications), Having continuous metal sheath encapsulation, Fire resistant tested to
BS6387 categories CWZ.
INSTALLATIONS
The entire fire alarm system shall be installed in accordance with DIN / BS EN54 /NFPA Standards
and manufacturer‘s approved shop drawings, written instructions and recommendations.
TESTING
Fire alarm system shall be tested in accordance to Local Civil Defence regulations and put into
operation by the manufacturer or his authorized representative in the presence of engineer. Fault
and alarm conditions shall be simulated and all data and alarm indicators checked with full events
recorded on system printer according to the testingprocedure.
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Acceptable Manufacturers shall be
Approved either by EN 54/VDS/UL

Approved by the Local Civil Defense and subject to total compliance with the above specifications
3.16 PUBLIC ADDRESSSYSTEM
STANDARDS
International:
The technical design must comply with EN 54-16 for the VA/PA system.
Compliance can be verified by means of a manufacturer declaration, CPD certificate or by

obtaining approval from VdS or similar certification body.
Page 162 of 202

Certification according to EN 54-16 is a mandatory requirement.
With the VA/PA system provided and its additional components, it must be possible to set up a project
which also conforms fully to EN 60849 requirements and which can be approved by a relevant expert or
authority.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
For the transmission of alarm signals in the event of a fire or other disaster, as well as for public
announcements and playing music, an emergency audio warning system or a voice alarm system with
self-monitoring functionality and alarm criteria should be installed in compliance with TRVB S 158, VDE
0833-4 and DIN 33403 standards.
The purpose of the system is to quickly evacuate people in an orderly manner via escape routes through
the use of prepared clear text instructions. In addition, it must also be possible to for all instructions that
are announced live to be sent to circuits and groups.
There must be an intercom function between the digital call stations.
The failure of an amplifier or a loudspeaker circuit should not lead to the failure of a public address area.
For this reason, in addition to the backup amplifier, the loudspeaker circuit also has A/B wiring in all
publicareas.
In total, up to 6,000 programmable, monitored loudspeaker circuits must be available as well as up to

2,000 NF inputs (250 x 4 x 2) or 1,000 digital call stations.
Due to simultaneous program transmissions, there must be up to 120 simultaneous audio transmissions
within the VA/PA system.
It must be possible to assign inputs (including digital call stations) and outputs throughout the system
without any restrictions.
A graphical user interface is used for simple and convenient configuration of the combination of groups,
changes in loudspeaker circuits or key assignments without the need for any mechanical modifications.
When selecting the loudspeaker systems and rating the electrical and acoustic audio frequencies, the
following sound pressure levels are used:
- 90 dB in larger public areasand

- for fire alarm/evacuation announcements, at least 12 dB higher than the maximum anticipated
ambient noise with speech intelligibility STI >0.5.
Loudness level and speech intelligibility must correspond to all the points of the above areas where
required (e.g. in the event of an alarm or rescue operation) for evacuation purposes and transmission of
information.
The public address system must be designed in accordance with the following basic requirements:
- provision of direct sound to widest possible area +/- 3 dB of the relevantranges
- high level of system reliability (at least 99%availability)
- optimal transmissionquality
A fully digital, programmable, network-ready VA/PA system must be provided to ensure that the system is
future-proof, flexible, and can be easily extended.
A 100 Mbit Ethernet LAN, also for proprietary use, serves as a means of transmitting signals. It must
be possible to design a redundant network by means of external modules.
It is particularly important that 100 V lines, power cords, control and modulation lines are properly
isolated.
Amplifiers must have symmetrically audio inputs.
Page 163 of 202

The VA/PA system must fulfill the following requirements:
 Fully digital network-capable system with graphical user interface. Operating software for remote control
and diagnosis of all systems states. Software for optional setup (configuration) of functions, modes and
properties of system components, devices and controls including the connection of loudspeaker lines to
public address areas, and the corresponding allocation of a selection key at the system digital callstation;
The user can modify the configuration using any client with an easy-to-understand, menu-driven user
interface. Up to 120 simultaneous audio channels must be available over the network with an available
bandwithof 100Mbit/seffective.
 Continuous, inaudible monitoring of all signalpaths
 All errors must be detected, displayed, and recorded (log view) within a matter ofseconds.
 Ability to easily program digital call stations for selective, group and collective calls (e.g. 1 fire control PA
panel, 3 information call stations, more possible at anytime).
 Continuous monitoring of power amplifiers with integrated noise detection and inaudible tone. If a power
amplifier should fail, a backup amplifier will automatically and immediately replace the power amplifier
inquestion.
 Double pole connection of 100 V loudspeakermodulation;
 Continuous processor - controlled line monitoring of all loudspeaker lines for short circuits, idling, ground
faults and impedance value errors, independent of activated announcements. Monitoring must not be
audible. Save error messages with the option for subsequent display; save set points
of line parameters; Set up and interrogate system with easy-to-
understand, menu-driven software. Non-reactive disconnection of loudspeaker circuits detected to be
faulty without any consequence to any other speakerlines.
 To ensure continuous operation, the gooseneck microphone for the digital call station must be
acoustically monitored. Similarly, the malfunction of any button, component, cable, or any logical
connection must be monitored and sent to the operating unit immediately via the LAN. The signal is
transmitted between the digital call station and the central control unit in AHO/EBU digital audioformat.
 Intercom function between digital callstations.
 To adjust the volume in public address areas with constantly changing noise levels, an automatic volume
control must always be available in real time, independent of the ambient noise level. This function is
activated using software tools from the appropriate central output modules for thisarea.
 Digital storage and playback of at least 16 different alarm signals and texts for 260 seconds in non-
volatilememory.
 Input of external signal sources (independent programs/background music) in the VA/PA system via
separate input modules and via NF inputs in the system digital callstations.
 Connection to a fire alarmsystem
The planning and invitation to tender are based on Honeywell's VARIODYN D1 model. Equivalence must
be ensured in the case of alternate offers as these are based on customer- specific assessments of
requirements.
Special performance features
List features which can only be answered with YHO or NO, or with a value:
Page 164 of 202

Performance features with YHO/NO

Audio monitoring
-All audio information can be selected locally on the VA/PA system using the monitor button and can be
monitored via the integratedloudspeaker.
-The monitor function can be deactivated automatically by pressing a button or via a user-defined
timeout.
Alarm mode
- The system switches to an alarm mode for alarmannouncements.
- Announcements with low priority, such as background music, arestopped.
- Standard-compliant alarmsignaling.
Digital signal processing (DSP)

- Per DAL bus audiostream
* Adjustablevolume
* Configurable limiter for the digital call station microphone (DCS,DCSF).
- Per Amplifierchannel
* Adjustablevolume
* Automatic volume control(AVC)
* High-pass filter 2, 4, 6 sequence (cutoff frequency: 20 Hz - 20kHz)
* Low-pass filter 2, 4, 6 sequence (cutoff frequency: 20Hz -20kHz)
* Delay (0-2.000msec)
* Parametric equalizer, 8bands
- Level indicator for audio inputs andoutputs.
Audio memory/signals
-Audio memory for critical alarms such as evacuation announcements in accordance with IEC EN 60849
on non-volatile flash memory. 16 memory places for 260 sec in total are available. E.g. for pre recorded
audio signals (gongs, signals, texts, etc.) for example in accordance with DIN 33404 and KTA 3901, in
each digital audio distribution and connection system (maximum 24 Loudspeaker lineseach)
-System wide audio memory for critical alarms such as evacuation announcements in accordance with
IEC EN 60849 on non-volatile flash memory. The memory capacity is approximately 120 minutes.
-Audio memory for non security relevant announcements such as advertising texts or music on a hard
drive. The memory capacity is approximately 1000hours.
Connection of a source to a target taking the following into account

- Connection timelimit
- Activation type –press/toggle
- Individualvolume
- With/without automatic volumecontrol
- Multisource; an audio source can be used by several connectionssimultaneously.
- Priority(1-250)
- Recording the activation or deactivation of theconnection.
- Saving theannouncement
- Partialconnection
- Timeout
- Warning signal, e.g. an attention signal such agong
- Reconnection
- Repetition
Error display
- The error message can be displayed based on thelocation.
- Error display either by LED or control contact and by means of an entry in the messagelist.
- Error messages are always reported as ―OK‖ after the underlying cause has beenrectified.
- Error messages can also be automatically reset – ifnecessary.
- Error messages can also be manually acknowledged by means of key(s) orcontact(s).
Page 165 of 202

- Potential error-specific signaling to LEDs and controloutputs.

- Monitoring can be completely switched on or off at the device level for eachDOM.
Remote control, remote maintenance

- The system can be remotely maintained via an open dataprotocol.
Building management systems, path control machines, or airline passenger information systems, for
example, can set any individual announcements and obtain status information from the system.
- The system can be maintained remotely via ISDN, forexample.
Configuration changes and read outs of all events can be performed over long distances. Graphical
user interface.
- A user interface customized to specific customer requirements can be implemented easily and
flexibly.
Backup amplifier
- In the event of failure of an amplifier channel, the system automatically switches to a backup
amplifier.
- The system switches to the backup amplifier dynamically. In the case of two faulty amplifiers within
a group of amp‘s which are connected to one backup amp, the priority of the announcement decides
which amplifier is switched to thebackup.
This is must be dynamically. That means no fixed backup / amp combination. If another time the priority
of a nother not available amp is higer, this will be replaced.
- The volume from the faulty amplifier channel is transferredover.
- The ratio and the number of main to backup amplifiers can be defined by the user between 4 and
12 amplifiere channels to one backupamp
Intercom call stations

- Digital call station to digital callstation.
- Digital call station to digital call station and other loudspeakercircuits.
- Digital call station to several digital callstations.
- Digital call station to several digital call stations and other loudspeaker circuits.
Configuration
- Configuration via graphical userinterface.
- Parameters can be read and modified in realtime.
- Certain user privileges can be allocated via usermanagement.
Volume control
- Automatic volumecontrol
- Each amplifier channel is regulated dynamically depending on the ambient noise and taking into
account predefined parameters and back groundmusic.
- Announcements (mostly alarms/evacuations) with a certain priority can be played out on a fixed
configured volume, without automatic volumecontrol.
- The ratio of ambient noise to changes in volume can be setindividually.
- The automatic volume control inputs for the sensor microphones can also be used as audio
signal inputs, ifnecessary.
- Background music must not have an influence on the automatic columecontrol
- Manual volume control for all audio inputs/outputs viabuttons and contacts.
- Alarms/evacuations can be output with maximum volume perconfiguration
(Manual volume control isignored).
- Time-based volume control for all audio inputs/outputs, e.g. reduced volume at tram stops at
nighttime.
Message list
- All system-related events are recorded in the messagelist.
- download of error message with aPC/Notebook.
- ―External systems‖, e.g. emergency power supplies can create entries in the messagelist.
Power management
- Primary power supply: 230 VAC
- Secondary power supply (emergency power): 24 VDC
Page 166 of 202

- Less important announcements (e.g. background music) can be switched off when there is an outage
in the primary power supply (230VAC).
Control inputs & control outputs

- Keys with associated LEDs orcontacts
- Any allocation of control inputs and control outputs for functions, e.g. for triggering priority relays for
100V volumecontrollers.
Monitoring
- Monitoring of connection from digital call station to VA/PAsystem.
- Acoustic monitoring of digital call station microphone or hand microphone (fire control PApanel).
- Acoustic monitoring of amplifierchannel.
- Monitoring of loudspeaker line for short circuits, interruptions and impedance changes via impedance
measurement – independent ofconnections.
The thresholds for short circuits, open lines, and ground faults can be customized.
- Monitoring of loudspeaker line for short circuits or interruptions by means of EOL (end of linemodule)
– independent of connections.
- Monitoring of loudspeaker line for ground faults.
Independent of circuit-entering loudspeakerlines:
- Monitoring of the communication of several VA/PA systems on thenetwork.
- Lamp tests/contact tests via button orcontact.
- Error in data interface to fire panels (e.g. Honeywell,Notifier)
- Failure in primary and secondary power supply (emergencypower)
Wiring
- Each required system can be wired quickly and clearly using only a few systemcables.
Networking
- Up to 250 digital audio distribution and connection systems on anetwork.
- Networking via 10, 100 Mbit(recommended) or GbitEthernet.
- Transmission of various audio data is only restricted by the transmissionbandwidth.
- Up to 120 audio data channels on a 100 Mbitnetwork.
- Up to 16 different audio channels items per digital audio distribution and connection systems can
be processed simultaneously over thenetwork.
- SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) to monitor network elements from a centralstation.
- Specified delay of local destination for a connection to offset the latency period of the network
destinations.
- VLAN ID can be adjusted for integration in existing networkstructures,
e.g. taking into account other network systems such as CCTV,
etc. Timer programs
- Time-controlled connection for bell systems, e.g. inschools.
-Time-based volume control for all audio inputs/outputs,
e.g. reduced volume at tram stops at night-time.
- Time-controlled activation/deactivation of monitoring of loudspeakerlines.
- Time-controlled actuation/deactivation of amplifier channels
monitoring. Timesynchronization
- The individual devices are synchronized. Master/Slave configurationpossible.
- External time synchronization via NTP (Network Time Protocol)possible.
- External time synchronization via GPSpossible.
- Automatic adjustment for daylight savingchanges.
Page 167 of 202

Destination – Group formation

- Any circuits (destinations) can be grouped together in pre-selectionpoints.
- Circuits can be grouped in any nested format.
Temporary storage of an announcement(automatic)
- Announcements can automatically saved and played back within a user-defined timeout period when
the required points arereleased.
- Status display and control options via buttons and controlcontacts.
Temporary storage of an announcement(manual)
- Record, listen and playbackpossible.
Audio matrix
- Any input can be route to any output without anyrestrictions
- Input can be a call station, analog audio input, and audiomemory
- Out put can be a loutspeaker line, call station and analog audiooutput
Performance features with value indication

Max. number of addressable audio inputs: 2.000
Max. number of audio data items that can be transmitted simultaneously via 100 Mbit Ethernet: 120
Max. number of addressable amplifier channels: 1.000
Max. number of addressable loudspeaker circuits: 6.000
Interfaces
Connection to fire alarm system
This system also allows for alarm management with prepared texts in the case of an emergency by
means of an interface to the fire detection system. For this, the system must be connected to the
emergency power supply, and the loudspeakers should be installed in such a way that they are fire
resistant in the event of a fire escaping beyond the fire compartment (see instructions). All VA/PA
systems must be approved as alarm detector systems by an authorized testingbody.
Interface: RS232
Data rate: 19,200bps
The interface is monitored continuously; in the event of a failure/interruption, an error message occurs on
the VA/PA system and the fire alarm control panel. The triggering of the alarm can be defined via control
zones. Any other errors that may arise, such as the failure of a power amplifier, digital call station or
routing to the loudspeakers, will be forwarded to the fire alarm control panel as a trouble alarm. Trouble
alarms can be reset via the fire alarm control panel. A date/time synchronization can be configured
between the VA/PA system and the firm alarm control panel.
Connection to a building management system (or safety management system)

A building management system (or safety management system) and the VA/PA system must be linked by
means of the relevant interfaces; mere contact connections/controls are eliminated. The system is
connected to the fire detection system via the fire control settings.
With regard to the VA/PA system that is to be linked to the safety management system, the following
functions at the very least must be in operation or available:
 Circuit selection (must also be possible for each available call circuit to be selected from the
mastercomputer)
 Group call (groups can be defined freely in terms ofsoftware)
 Collective call from digital voicememory
 Alarmsounds
 System synchronization (messages,time)
 Message fault VA/PA System on building management system ( or safety management
system)mastercomputer
 Message fault amplifier on building management system ( or safety management
Page 168 of 202

 Message fault digital call station on building management system ( or safety management
 Message fault loudspeaker on building management system ( or safety management
 Message fault call circuit (by monitoring circuits) on building management system ( or safety
management system)mastercomputer
It must be possible to configure and program the VA/PA system via a PC. The software enables the
loudspeaker matrix and digital call stations to be monitored and controlled remotely. A color graphic
depicting all of the components to help users identify errors more effectively. The PC and the system are
at least connected via a serial interface.
Products
System components
Digital audio distribution and connection system for up to 8 loudspeaker zones
Module with audio signal processing for connecting and controlling power amplifiers and for connecting
loudspeaker circuits.
Four independent audio outputs for connecting power amplifiers (up to 500 Watt per channel) and for
simultaneous processing of up to four different audio information items per module.
Connection of a audio signal to one or two user-defined loudspeaker zones. In total up to eight
loudspeaker circuits per module. Either up to 8 loudspeaker circuits can be operated as transmission line
technology or as up to 4 loops with VARIODYN D1 loop technology. Where required, the two
technologies can used in combined mode via the configuration as two loops and 4 transmissionlines.
Upgrade to a complex alarm/public address system through integrated LAN interfaces.
Continuous monitoring of power amplifiers by means of a 22 kHz test tone. In the event of a failure of a
power amplifier, a backup amplifier will automatically and dynamically replace the faulty power amplifier.
The defined loudness level is also taken into account for the backup amplifier.
Continuous inaudible monitoring of loudspeaker lines (ground faults, short circuits, interruptions, and
impedance deviations with specified tolerances for each loudspeaker circuit), even in power-saving mode,
independent of activated announcements. An end of line module can also optionally be used as a line
termination and the line to the EOL can be monitored.
This ensures that short-circuited loudspeaker circuits are disconnected without affecting the rest of the
system.
Continuous monitoring of line and microphone of up to four connectable digital call stations or universal
input modules.
All errors are detected, displayed and recorded (message list) within seconds.
Audio filters such as parametric equalizers, high and low-pass filters and delays per audio channel can be
set.
For each of the four amplifier channels, there are four sensor inputs for optional, continuous and
automatic volume control in real time, independent of the ambient noiselevel.
It is possible to monitor locally all of the input and output channels via the integrated loudspeaker and
monitor button.
Eight programmable, potential-free contact outputs for controlling external components (e.g. priority
relays) or for signaling various indicator states (collective fault messages).
Four Ethernet 100 Mbit/s interface connections with switch function.
Integrated TWI bus for optional connection of an additional module (e.g. time synchronization using TCM-
GPS). Display for indicating operation status, errors, circuit connection, and active power-saving mode via
multi-colored LEDs.
Page 169 of 202

Emergency control operation during a power failure to preserve battery capacity – this means not
activating background music or low-priority announcements when there is a failure in the primary power
supply. The connected amplifiers are switched to stand-by mode.
Non-volatile audio memory for up to 260 seconds, freely scalable, for user-specific canned audio.Various
gong and alarm signals in accordance with DIN VDE 33404, ZBV.
Emergency 24 V power supply as secondary power supply.

Display
4 LEDs for device operatingstate:
in operation, warning/error, emergency control option, power-saving mode
8 LEDs for indicating the control contacts state
4 LEDs for indicating the state of each of connected power amplifier
8 error and 8 loudspeaker circuit relay LEDs
Operating elements
A button for sequential monitoring local audio channels and acknowledging an acoustic error message
1 monitoring loudspeaker
Audio output
Outputtype electronicallysymmetrical
Nominallevel 0dBu
Max.outputlevel +6dBu
Frequencyrange 20 Hz to 20kHz
Max. deviation fromlinearfrequency ± 1 dB in frequencyrange
Distortion factor atnominallevel < 0.03% at 1kHz
Max.distortionfactor 0.1% in frequencyrange
Signal-to-noise ratio atnominallevel >75 dB (A)
> 70 dB
Loadimpedance min. 5 kΩ, max. 500pF
Sensor input (AVC*)

Inputtype symmetrical,non-earthed
Nominallevel -51 dBu
Nominal level for emergencycallstation 0dBu
Max.distortionfactor 1% in frequencyrange
Signal-to-noise ratio atnominallevel > 65 dB(A)
> 60 dB
Inputimpedance typ. 200Ohm
Control contacts
Max.voltage 100 V DC/1A
Impulsewithstandvoltage > 2.5kV
Pass-through contacts
Max.voltage 250 V AC, 30 V DC/5A
Power supply
Ratedvoltage 90 V AC to 264 VAC
Nominalfrequency 47 Hz to 440Hz
Power rating with/without4xDAL 4 W/70 W at 230VAC
Emergency powersupply
Voltage range 21.6 V DC to 30 VDC
Ambienttemperaturerange -5°C to +55°C
Relativehumidity 15% to 90%
*AVC = Automatic Volume Control
Page 170 of 202

Digital audio distribution and connection system for up to 24 loudspeaker zones

Module with audio signal processing for connecting and controlling power amplifiers and for connecting
loudspeaker circuits.
Four independent audio outputs for connecting power amplifiers (up to 500W per channel) and for
simultaneous processing of up to four different audio information items per module.
Connection of audio signal to one or up to six user-defined loudspeaker zones for each audio output to
obtain upto twenty-four loudspeaker circuits per module.
Upgrade to a complex alarm/public address system through integrated LAN interfaces.
Continuous monitoring of poweramplifiers by means of a 22 kHz test tone. In the event of a failure of a
power amplifier, a backup amplifier will automatically and dynamically replace the faulty power amplifier.
The defined loudness level is also taken into account for the backupamplifier.
Continuous inaudible monitoring of loudspeaker lines (ground faults, short circuits, interruptions, and
impedance deviations with specified tolerances for each loudspeaker circuit), even in power-saving mode,
independent of activated announcements. An end of line module can also optionally be used as a line
termination and the line to the EOL can be monitored.
This ensures that short-circuited loudspeaker circuits are disconnected without affecting the rest of the
system.
Continuous monitoring of line and microphone of up to four connectable digital call stations or universal
input modules.
All errors are detected, displayed and recorded (message list) within seconds.
Audio filters such as parametric equalizers, high and low-pass filters and delays per audio channel can be
set.
For each of the four amplifier channels, there are four sensor inputs for optional, continuous and
automatic volume control in real time, independent of the ambient noiselevel.
It is possible to monitor locally all of the input and output channels via the integrated loudspeaker and
monitor button.
Eight programmable, potential-free contact outputs for controlling external components (e.g. priority
relays) or for signaling various indicator states (collective fault messages).
Four Ethernet 100 Mbit/s interface connections with switch function.
Integrated TWI bus for optional connection of an additional module (e.g. time synchronization using TCM-
GPS). Display for indicating operation status, errors, circuit connection, and active power-saving mode via
multi-colored LEDs.
Emergency control operation during a power failure to preserve battery capacity – this means not
activating background music or low-priority announcements when there is a failure in the primary power
supply. The connected amplifiers are switched to stand-by mode.
Non-volatile audio memory for up to 260 seconds, freely scalable, for user-specific canned audio.Various
gong and alarm signals in accordance with DIN VDE 33404, ZBV.
Emergency 24 V power supply as secondary power supply.
Display
4 LEDs for device operating state:
in operation, warning/error, emergency control option, power-saving mode
8 LEDs for indicating the control contacts state
4 LEDs for indicating the state of each connected power amplifier 24 error and 24 loudspeaker
circuit relay LEDs
Page 171 of 202

Operating elements
A button for sequential monitoring of local audio channels and acknowledging an acoustic error message
1 monitoring loudspeaker
Audio output
Outputtype electronicallysymmetrical
Nominallevel 0dBu
Max.outputlevel +6dBu
Max.distortionfactor 0.1% in frequencyrange
Signal-to-noise ratio atnominallevel >75 dB (A)
> 70 dB
Loadimpedance min. 5 kΩ, max. 500pF
Sensor input (AVC*)

Inputtype symmetrical,non-earthed
Nominallevel -51 dBu
Nominal level for emergencycallstation 0dBu
Max.distortionfactor 1% in frequencyrange
Signal-to-noise ratio atnominallevel > 65 dB(A)
> 60 dB
Inputimpedance typ. 200Ohm
Control contacts
Max.voltage 100 V DC/1A
Pass-through contacts
Max.voltage 250 V AC, 30 V DC/5A
Power supply
Ratedvoltage 90 V AC to 264 VAC
Power rating with/without4xDAL 50 W/80 W at 230VAC
Emergency powersupply

*AVC = Automatic Volume Control
System communication unit

The system communication unit acts as a digital audio memory for the VA/PA system.
This allows more than 50 channels of audio data to be recorded and played back at the same time –
regardless of the available bandwidth from the network.
The connection to a VA/PA system network is established via Ethernet and is monitored continuously.
As per IEC EN 60849, the audio data for critical alarms and evacuation messages is stored on non-
volatile flash memory. The memory capacity is approximately 2 hours.
Additional messages, such as announcements, signals or advertising texts, are stored on a hard drive.
The memory capacity is approximately 1,000 hours.
Page 172 of 202

The component can also be used for logging and recording announcements. These are stored on the
hard disk and saved with the date, time and triggerinformation.
Including a call stacker function which allows to stored announcements temporarily and played them back
simultaneously and automatically within a particular time limit when the desired point is released.
24 V DC emergency power supply as secondary power supply.
Audio capacityflashmemory approx. 2hours.

Audio capacityharddrive approx. 1,000hours.
Power supply
Nominalvoltage 90 V AC to 264 VAC
Nominalcurrent typ. 0.5 A @ 230 VAC
Emergency power supply

Digital call stations
Digital call station with 12 keys

Fully digital call station with electrets microphone (cardioids characteristic) on a flexible 300 mm long
gooseneck.
Integrated broadband loudspeaker for monitoring and previewing purposes as well as intercom
functions.Continuous acoustic monitoring of microphone capsule. Acoustic monitoring is not only used to
check the functioning of the voice coil but also of the capsule.
12 freely programmable buttons, which can belabeled.

13 integrated and 12 freely programmable LED display elements including a combined operation and
error display.
Digital transmission of control signals and all four audio signals to and from the digital call station and the
supply voltage via DAL link.
The digital call station is connected to the VA/PA system in star-shaped topology via CAT 5E cable
(shielded) and RJ45 socket (up to 300 meters distance).
Optional fiber optic connection for distances up to 2,000 meters.
RJ12 socket for connection with up to 6 expansion modules via daisy chain.
An audio input with 2 cinch sockets at the back of the digital call station for connecting an auxiliary device
allows audio playback outside of the central control unit.
An audio output can be used for monitoring purposes or for audio distribution or recording.
In- and output are independent from the microphone and can be used simultaneously
A 3 m long CAT5 standard connection cable for copper cabling is included as standard.
Microphone electret, cardioidcharacteristic

Gooseneck 300mm
Frequencyrange 100-15,000Hz
Loudspeaker-power 1W
Audio input
Nominallevel 0dBu
Max.level +6dBu
Signal-to-noiseratio > 95dB
Distortion factor (atnominal level) <0.1%
Audio output
Page 173 of 202

Nominallevel 0dBu
Distortion factor (atnominal level) < 0.1%
Outputimpedance 180Ohm
Samplerate 48 kHz
AD/DAconverter 24Bit
Max.powerconsumption 150mA
Ambienttemperaturerange -5 °C to +55°C
Digital call station with one key

Fully digital call station with electret microphone (cardioid characteristic) on a flexible 300 mm long
gooseneck.
Integrated broadband loudspeaker for monitoring and previewing purposes as well as intercom
functions.Continuous acoustic monitoring of microphone capsule. Acoustic monitoring is not only used to
check the functioning of the voice coil but also of the capsule.
A freely programmable button, which can be labeled.
Two integrated and one freely programmable LED display elements including a combined operation and
error display.
Digital transmission of control signals and all four audio signals to and from the digital call station and the
The digital call station is connected to the VA/PA system in star-shaped topology via CAT 5 cable and
RJ45 socket (up to 300 meters distance).
Microphone electret, cardioidcharacteristic

Gooseneck 300mm
Samplerate 48 kHz
Ambienttemperturerange -5 °C to +55°C
Fire Control PA Panel with 12 keys

Fully digital call station with handheld microphone and built-in loudspeaker for monitoring and previewing
purposes and intercom functions in integrated housing.
Continuous acoustic monitoring of microphone capsule. Acoustic monitoring is not only used to check the
functioning of the voice coil but also of the capsule.
12 freely programmable buttons, which can be labeled.

12 integrated and freely programmable LED display elements including a combined operation and error
display.
Digital transmission of control signals and all audio signals to and from the digital call station and to the
Page 174 of 202

Microphone Handheld microphone, cardioidcharacteristic

Samplerate 48 kHz
1.
Fire Control PA Panel with one key

purposes and intercom functions in integrated housing.
A freely programmable button, which can be labeled.
Two integrated and one freely programmable LED display elements including a combined operation and
error display.
Digital transmission of control signals and all audio signals to and from the digital call station and to the

Samplerate 48 kHz
Digital fire control PA panel

purposes and intercom functions in surface-mounted or flush-mounted housing.
Five freely programmable buttons for the alarm

One button for the all-clear signal
One button for reset/acoustic
Three integrated LED display elements (in operation, fault, busy)
Page 175 of 202

Digital transmission of control signals and all audio signals to and from the digital call station and the
Display window and locking mechanism in accordance with EN 54-11.
Conforms to the Austrian F 3033 standards and must be verified by a positive test protocol carried out by
an accredited body.

2.
Samplerate 48 kHz
Ambienttemperaturerange -5 °C to +55 °C
Color Red RAL3000
Weight approx. 2.0kg
Dimensions (H x WxD) 300 x 200 x 30mm
Digital Keyboard Module

Digital keyboard module for digital call stations
Allows an extension of 18 extra freely programmable keys that can be labeled as well as 18 LED display
elements.
Digital transmission of control signals to the digital call station.
The keyboard module is supplied with 24 V DC by the digital call station.
Interfaces
Universal Interface Module
Interface module for connecting two analog audio inputs, two analog audio outputs, and 48 control
contacts.
The two audio inputs are both asymmetrical (RCA) and symmetrical (XLR-f).
The two audio outputs are both asymmetrical (RCA) and symmetrical (XLR-m).
The 48 control contacts can be set via software configurations in any combination as potential input
contacts and/or output contacts; eight can be monitored.
Digital transmission of control signals and all audio signals to and from the VA/PA system and the supply
voltage via DAL link.
Display
A green POWER LED
A yellow ERROR LED
4 green SIGNAL LEDs for signaling potential audio modulation.
Audio inputs
Nominallevel 0dBu
Max.level +6dBu
Input impedance XLRsocket 100 kΩ, symmetrical,potential-free
Page 176 of 202

Output impedanceCINCHsocket 1 kΩ,asymmetrical,potential-free

Audiooutputs
Nominallevel 0dBu
Output impedanceXLR socket 200 Ω, symmetrical,potential-free
Output impedanceCINCHsocket 200 Ω,asymmetrical,potential-free
Controlcontacts
Input contact
Max.inputvoltage +36 VDC
Output contact
Contactrating 36 V DC/50mA
Short-circuit prooffor+24V 1s
Contact Interface Module
Interface module for connecting eight control contacts.

The eight control contacts can be set via software configurations in any combination as potential input
contacts and/or output contacts; four can be monitored.
Digital transmission of control signals and the supply voltage via TWI (two-wire interface).
Control contacts
Input contact
Max.inputvoltage +36 VDC
Output contact
Contactrating 36 V DC/50mA
Short-circuit prooffor+24V 1s
Amplifier
Power amplifier 2 x 250 W/100 V; class D, 24 V DC Highly efficient class D power amplifier.
The power amplifier includes the following characteristics:

- Complies with IEC BS EN 60268-3, 55013, and 55020standards
- Self-monitoring and self-testing viamicrocontrollers
- Protected against overload, short circuits andover-heating
- Built-in fan with temperature-controlled rotation speed control,
with airflow from front to back ofdevice
- Monitoring of the fan‘s t self, if one is failed – the left fan must set on 100% speedautomatically.
- LED status display per channel for POWER, SIGNAL, CLIP, andERROR
- LED status display for MAINS POWER; BATT POWER, CPU STATUS, SYSFAULT
- Emergency power supply via 24 VDC
- Symmetrical audio inputs and control via CAT 5 cable with RJ45connector
- 100 V outputs via pre-assembled system cable,lockable
Technology Class D, 100 V outputs withtransformers

Output power (at 230 Vmainssupply) 250 W with 40 Ωload
Output power (at 24 V DC emergencypowersupply) 250 W with 40 Ωload
Mainssupply 230 V AC 50/60Hz +10% to-15%
Emergencypowersupply 21.5 V DC to 28.5 VDC
Frequencyresponse 50 Hz to 22 kHz ±3dB

Distortionfactor < 0.3% at 1 kHzsine
Signal-to-noiseratio 90 dB(A-weighted)
Channelseparation > 75dB
Efficiency atmaximumpower >80%
Page 177 of 202

Color RAL7016
Relativehumidity up to 90 %(non-condensing)
Power amplifier 2 x 400 W/100 V; class D, 24 V DC Highly efficient class D power amplifier.
The power amplifier includes the following characteristics:

- Complies with IEC BS EN 60268-3, 55013, and 55020standards
- Self-monitoring and self-testing viamicrocontrollers
- Protected against overload, short circuits andover-heating
- Built-in fan with temperature-controlled rotation speed control,
with airflow from front to back ofdevice
- Monitoring of the fan‘s t self, if one is failed – the left fan must set on 100% speedautomatically.
- LED status display per channel for POWER, SIGNAL, CLIP, andERROR
- LED status display for MAINS POWER; BATT POWER, CPU STATUS, SYSFAULT
- Emergency power supply via 24 VDC
- Symmetrical audio inputs and control via CAT 5 cable with RJ45connector
- 100 V outputs via pre-assembled system cable,lockable
Technology Class D, 100 V outputs withtransformers

Output power (at 230 Vmainssupply) 400 W with 25 Ωload
Output power (at 24 V DC emergencypowersupply) 400 W with 25 Ωload
Mainssupply 230 V AC 50/60Hz +10% to-15%
Emergencypowersupply 21.5 V DC to 28.5 VDC
Frequencyresponse 50 Hz to 22 kHz ±3dB

Distortionfactor < 0.3% at 1 kHzsine
Signal-to-noiseratio 90 dB(A-weighted)
Channelseparation > 75dB
Efficiency atmaximumpower >80%
Color RAL7016
Relativehumidity up to 90 %(non-condensing)
Loudspeaker
Ceiling Loudspeaker
Page 178 of 202

Wall Mount Loudspeaker
MODE OF MEASUREMENT
The following measurement code shall apply to the Contract:
POWER AND CONTROLS CABLES:
1. All power cables / controls cables shall be measured on linear basis inmeters.
CABLE TRAY WORK:
a) The cable trays shall be measured on unit length basis, along the center line of thecable tray, including
bends, reducers, tees, cross joints, etc, and paid foraccordingly.
STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS:
No extra price shall be paid on account of structural supports required for Electrical Panel Installation
etc.
PIPING WORK:
a) The length of piping accessories & fittings shall be measured along its centre line in meters and no
measurements for bends, elbows, tees etc. shall be made. All suchfittings
/ accessories shall be treated as part of the piping work.
b) Flanges shall not be measured, as they form part of pipingwork.
c) For thermometer wells & pressure gauge sockets no measurement shall be done separately.
Page 179 of 202

d) All kinds of supports, hangers etc shall be part of piping work & no extra measurements shall bedone.
e) No additional price for installation of purge & de-scaling valves as required at site shall be paid.
INSULATION:
INSULATION OF EXHAUST PIPES:
i) Insulation of pipes shall be measured in terms of linear length of pipe for eachsize.
ii) For insulation of bends, elbows, tees etc. it shall be measured along with the center line of insulation and
shall be measured in meters or shall be measured in sq.meter.
iii) Insulation of valves shall be separately accounted as per bill ofquantities.
Note:-The items not specified above or not specified in BOQ & Specification but technically required
shall be part of that particular equipment / material.
Page 180 of 202

APPROVED MAKES
1. LISTOF APPROVED MAKES (CIVIL & PLUMBING WORKS)
SL. ITEM APPROVED MAKES

No Adhesive for Door Work Fevicol / Vamicol / Dunlop/ Araldite/Dendrite/
1.
Anabond
2. Aluminum Accessories and Classic/ Argenta/Hardwyn/ Everite/ Godrej/
Hardware Alwyne/ Kelwyn/ Newlite/ EBCO
3. Aluminum Cladding Sheets Aludecor/Alstrong/ Hunter
Douglas/Alupan/Alstone/Alshine/Eurobond/
Alkasign /Luxalon
4. Aluminum Die-Cast handles &two Giesse/ Securistyle/ Alu –alpha
Point locking kit
5. Aluminum Extrusion Indal /Hindalco/Jindal
6. Aluminum Fabricators M/s. International Glass House, M/s. AGV

Alfa Lab Ltd., M/s. Consolidated Engg.
Company/ M/s. Ajit (India) Pvt.
Ltd./Calco/Alkarma
7. Anchor Fastener Hilti / Fischer/ Bosch
8. Anti–Termite Treatment Pest Control of India Ltd/Godrej Hi

care/Bharat pest control or any permanent
members of
IPCA as approved by Engineer-in-
Charge.
9. Batch Mix Concrete (BMC)/ Ready The contractor to install his own
Mix Concrete (RMC) computerizedBatching plant of suitable
capacity and arrange for Transit Mixers,
pumps etc. as per approval of Engineer –
In- Charge. Or The RMC shall be procured
from the source as approved by Engineer–
in Charge.
10. Brass stop & Bib Cock Zoloto/ Sant/ Jaquar
11. Brass Hardware fittings Harrison/ Godrej/ Everite/ Hardwyn/Kelwyn
12. Butterfly valves Zolato/Audco/Sant/Air flow
13. C. I Fitting RKS/ AVR/ UNIK/ Electro steel/ Kesoram/

ISSCO/ Neco/ RIF
14. C.I Sluice Valve & Non Return Valve Kirloskar /Burn / Leader/ L&T/ Indian valves
Co(IVC)/ BHEL/Sant
15. C.I. Valves ( Full way, Check and Leader/ Kirloskar/ SKF/ Zoloto/ Sant/
GlobeValves Castle/ Kartar
16. C.I. Manhole Covers NECO/ BIC/ BST /RIF / SKF
17. C.P. Fittings Mixer/ Pillar taps/ C.P Jaquar / Parryware / Johnson / Nycer
brass angle valve/
ValvesWashers, C.P. brass
accessories
C.P. Waste, Spreaders(Urinal) Parko/ Kingston/ Essco
18.
Page 181 of 202

19. Calcium Silicate False Ceiling India Gypsum /Armstrong/ Deco sonic/ Daiken/
Aerolite
20. Calcium Silicate Boards Hilux/ Aerolite/India Gypsum
21. Calcium Silicate Tiles Aerolite/Hilux/India Gypsum
22. Cement ACC / Ultratech / Birla /Ambuja /JK Cement/

Binani/ Jaypee / Ramco / Lafarge
23. White Cement Birla White/ JK White / Lafarge / Ambuja / JK

Lakshmi
24. Central Control Rain Bird/USA/ Toro/ Nelson
25. Centrifugally cast C.I. Rain water Sages Metals/ Electro Steel/ Kesoram/ IISCO/
fitting /Bronze gratings etc. Neco / BIC/ Neer
26. Centrifugal Pump Crompton/ Kirloslar/ Texmo/Grandfos
27. Centrifugally C.I.Rainwater Intel Sages Metals /Electro Steel /Kesoram,/IISCO/

fitting, Bronze gratings Neco/BIC/Neer
28. Centrifugally casted C.I. Pipes Neco / SKF/IISCO/ Electro steel
29. Ceramic tiles Premium quality(1st Quality) Tiles of

Johnson/Bell/ Regency/ Somany/ Kajaria/
Spartek/ Nitco
30. Ceramic tile Adhesive Laticrete/Johnsion/ Bal Endura / BASF/ Sika
31. Chlorinator Thermax Ltd/ Watcon, lon exchange/Sigma DH

Combine Inc./ Siemens/ Techcon/ Jesco/
Prominent
32. Chlorine Dosing System Toshcon/ Chloromax/Milton Roy
33. Clear Glass/Clear Float Glass / Modi/ Saint Gobain (SG) Asahi India Safety
Toughened Glass Glass Ltd/GSC / Tata/ Atul
34. Cockroach Trap Chilly/ Player/ Camry
35. Compressed Chequered tiles Premium (1st Quality ) of Galaxy/ Eurocon/

Wonder Crete/ Ultra/ Nitco/ Unistone
conforming to IS - 13801
36. Concrete Admixtures Sika / STP/ Fosroc/ MC

Bauchemie/ BASF
37. Copper Fittings (Capillary) York shire Imperial, U.K./ Mexflow/ Rajco Metal
Works Mumbai/ Conex- Benninger
38. Copper Pipes Mexflow, Rajco Metal works, Mumbai/ Conex-
Benninger
39. CPVC Pipes & Fittings Finolex/Sudhakar/Ashrivad / Astral/ Supreme
40. Curtain Rod/ Drapery Rod Vista work/ Mac Décor/Hunter Douglas
41. Dash Fasteners Hilti / Fischer/ Bosch
42. Disc Filter Azud, Spain/Amaid/Arkal,
43. Door closer/Door spring Ozone/ Everite/ Hardwyn/ Godrej/ Dorma
44. Door Locks Godrej/ Harrison/ Link/ Mortice
45. Door Seal –Wool pile Weather Strip Anand Reddiplex/ Enviroseal
Page 182 of 202

46. Doors & Windows Fixtures/ Fitting. Everite/Argent/Classic/Crown/Earl Bihari/

Dorset Kaba/Dorma/Haffele/Hettich
47. Drainage Pumps Grundfos/ Crompton/ Texmo/ Kirloskar
48. Ductile Iron Fittings (IS:9523) Electro steel/ Kesoram / Tata/ IISCO/ Jindal
49. Ductile Iron Pipes(IS:8329) Electro steel/ Kesoram / Tata/ IISCO/ Jindal
50. E.P.D.M Gaskets Anand Reddiplex /Enviro Seals
51. Epoxy Floor Fosroc/ Sika/MC Bouchehe
52. Epoxy SLF Flooring Sika/ BASF/ STP/ Fosroc
53. Extruded Polystyrene Board Styro foam by DOW Chemicals/Insu board by

SupremeIndustries
54. Expansion joint/Filler compound/ Forsoc/ SIKA/STP/BASF

Boards
55. Filtration Plant/Softening Plant Bikon water/Ion exchange/Thermax/
Pentair/EurekaForbes/DoshiIon/Fontus
56. Fire rated Doors &Frames Navair/Shaktimet/GMP/Promat/Godrej
57. Fire Rated Saint Gobain/Torch/Glaberwal
58. Fire Retardant Paint Viper FRS 881/Nullifire/Burger
59. Fire Seal Sealz/Alstroflam/Abacus
60. Fire: Door Closures, Mortice Dead Becker Fire Solution/Inersoll Rand LCN Series,
locks Dorm/
TH Series/ DorsetKaba
61. Fire: D-Type Pull Handles Becker Fire Solution/Dorma/ Hardwin/
DorsetKaba
62. Fire Hinges, Becker Fire Solution/Inersoll Rand/ Dorma /
Dorset Kaba
63. Fire Panic Exit Device Dorma/D-line/DorsetKaba
64. Fire Panic Exit Devices Becker Fire Solution/Inersoll Rand LCN Series/
Dorma /PHA Series / DorsetKaba
65. Fire Tower Bolts Suzu/Nulite/Dorsetkaba
66. Flush Door Shutters Novopan/ National ply/ Century ply/Mangalam

Timbers/ Kitply/ Green ply/ Duro/ Archid
67. Flush Valves Jaquar/ Parko /Kingston/ Plumber/ Marc
68. Forged Steel Fittings &Flanges (For Rohini/ Kanwal/ Vijay Cycle & Steel
Welded joints)
69. G.I. Fittings Unik/ Zoloto/ K.S./ Swastik
70. G.I. Pipes Jindal / Tata/ Zenith Birla (India)LTD/Prakash

Surya / Bansal /Swastik
71. Gyser AO Smith/Racold/Venus/Voltas/UshaLexus/

Almonard/Bajaj/Havells
72. Glass Mirror Modi float/ Atul/ Prayag/ Parryware/ Johnson/
Cera
73. Glass Wool Rock wool/ UPT wiga /Lloyd Insulation
Page 183 of 202

74. Glass/ Glass for Aluminum Doors/ Glaverbel/ Asahi India Safety Glass Ltd./Atul /
Windows(Float,Toughened,wired) Saint
Gobain / Modi Float glass (India)/ Pilkington
75. Grab bars and Disabled Hardware Dorma/Jaquar/Parryware/Nycer/Cera
76. Gun metal Valves/ C.P .brass angle Zoloto/ Leader/ Sant
valve
77. Gypsum Board India Gypsum/ Kirby/ Inter arch/ Hunter
Douglas/Lafarge/ Saint Gobain (Gyproc)
78. Chairs Godrej/ Wipro/ Herman Miller/ Haworth
79. Hand Drier Kopal/ Utech Systems/ Blue Circle (India)

Pvt.Ltd./Euronics Automat/Jaquar
80. HDPE Pipes /Moulded Fittings Emco/Finolex/Sudhakar/Ashribad/Supreme
81. HDPE Solution tank Watcon/ Ion Exchange/ Water Supply Specialist
Pvt Ltd.
82. Heat Resistant Terrace Tiles Thermatek
83. Horizontal Centrifugal/ Mono block Kirloskar/ Wilo/ Groundfos/ CR Pumps/

Pumps Crompton/ Texmo
84. Hydro-pneumatic System HBDGM/Grundfos/ Salmson/ Nocchi/ Kirloskar
85. Inbuilt Drip Line Azud/ Rainbrid-USA/ Netafim
86. Insulation of Hot water pipes Vido flex insulation/ Superior insulation Kaiflex–
Kaimann/ Armo flex/ Therma flex/ Armacell
87. Laminates Kitply / Greenply/ Century/ National / Sunmica/
Formica
88. Liquid Level Controllers/ Indicators Advance Auto/ Sridhan International/ Minilec/
Radar/ Femac/Switzer
89. Liquid Soap Dispenser Jaquar/Cera/Parryware/Nycer
90. M.S. Pipe Jindal / Prakash–Surya/BST/Kalinga /TATA/ TT

Swastik
91. M. S Hardware fittings Crown/ Classic
92. Main line Isolation Valve Sant /Leader/Zoloto
93. Metal False Ceiling Hunter Douglas/Armstrong/ Lloyds/ Super sil/

Luxalon
94. Modular SS Railing System Metallica India /Stark Steel Fabricators
/Hetcreators/ D –Line International Denmark/
Mobel Hardware
95. MS Saddle with G.I. Riser Harvel/Alprene/Rain Bird,USA
96. Night Latch Godrej/Harrison/Link/Dorset Kaba/ Dorma
97. Non Return Valve Sant/Leader/Zoloto/AIP
98. P.R.S. Dials Rain Bird/USA/ Toro/USA/Nelson
99. P.T.M.T.Fitting Watertec/Polo/Wilson/Prayag
100. MDF Valbopan/Green/Archid Ply/ActionTesa
101. Pre-Laminate MDF Merino/Green/Archid Ply/ActionTesa
Page 184 of 202

102. Metalic Laminates Metlam/Homapal/Dekodur
103. Glass Fibre Acoustical Ceiling Tile Hunter Doglous/Armstrong/Lloyds/Luxalon/
104. Acoustic Wooden Perforated Slat Armstrong/Saint Gobin/Hunter douglas/Super

Sil
105. Acoustical Fabric (With Glass wood) Anutone/Ecophone/Saint Gobain/Lloyds
106. R.C.C Pipes Indian Hume Pipe/Pragati Concrete Udyog/

Panels Bharat pipes
107. Paint-Dry Distemper ICI/ Berger/ Asian/
Nerolac/Sika/Shalimar/Jonson & Nicholson
108. Paint-Oil Bound Distemper /Acrylic Premium Quality of
Washable Distemper Berger/Nerolac/Asian/ICI/Johnson
109. Paints-Cement Based Premium Quality of

Berger/Nerolac/Asian/ICI/Johnson
110. Paints-External Emulsion Paint Premium Quality of

111. Paints-Other Paints /Primer Premium Quality of
112. Paints-Plastic Emulsion Paint Premium Quality of
113. Paints-Resin Based Paints
114. Paints- Synthetic Enamel Paints Premium Quality of

115. Paint Epoxy paint
116. Paints-Texture paint
117. Paver blocks (All Types) Galaxy/Eurocon/Johnson/Ultra/Hindusthan/

Nitco/Wonder Crete
118. PEB Structures Tata blue Scope Steel Ltd./Kirby Building

Solutions /Interarch Building Products Pvt
Limited/Everest Industries Ltd/
Lloyd Insulations India Ltd.
119. Plastic seat cover of W.C Hindware/ Cera/ Johnson/

Parryware/Nycer
120. Ply /Block board/Ply board Duro/Green Ply/Century/Kit Ply/Archid Ply
121. Poly carbonate Sheets Dura tuff/ Tata Blue scope/ Build tech/
Danpalon/Lloyds/Inter arch
122. Poly-sulphide Sealant Fosroc/Sika/MC Bouchemie/BASF
123. Popup Connecting Assembly Rain Bird/ Dura /Lasco
124. Popup Spray Head Rain Bird/ Toro, USA/Nelson,
125. Powder Coating Material pure Jotun/ Berger/GoodlassNerolac

Polyester
126. PP-R Pipes(PN –16) Amitex Polymers Pvt.

Ltd./Prince/Supreme/Vector
127. Pre-coated Galvanised Steel Sheet Lloyds/Interarch/Japan metal building
system/Tata Blue scope/Bhusan/Kirby
Page 185 of 202

128. Pre-Laminated Particle Board Century Ply/Archid

Ply/ActionTESA/Novopan/Kit Ply/ Green Ply
129. Pressed Steel Doors Frame West Wind Concepts Pvt. Ltd., Gurgaon/ Shiva
Steel
Pvt. Ltd., Noida/ AGEW Steel Manufacturing,
Ahmedabad/ Sukri / Godrej /Gurdian/ Navair
130. Pressure Relief Valve Omega/Sant/Leader/Zolato/Upadhyay/Audco
131. Pumps Crompton/ Kirloslar/ Texmo/Grandfos
132. continuous fillet for periphery Roop/Anand/Forex Plastic/Nagalia/Trading

Packing of Company
Glazings/
133. Structural/
PVC Glazing
Flooring Forbo/ Tarkett Floors/ Armstrong/Rikvin/ Poly
floor
134. PVC flushing cistern H Hindndware /Parryware/ Nycer/ Johnson/
Cera
135. PVC Pipes & fitting SWR Soil, Waste
& Prince/Supreme /Sudhakar/ Astral / Finolex
Vent Pipes and fittings, Type
BPVC Casing & ScreenPipes
136. PVC Water Stops Prince/Supreme/Finolex/ Oriplast/ Maruti
137. PVC Storage Tank Sintex/Polycon/Polywell/Storex
138. R.O. System Ion Exchange/Sterling India Ltd./Pentair

water/
139. Reinforcement Steel SAIL/RINL/TISCO/JINDAL
140. RQRC Hydrant Harvel/Alprene/Rain Bird,USA
141. RQRC Key Harvel/Aqua/Drip & Drip
142. Sensor Operated Auto Flushing Jaquar /AOS-Robo/U-tec/Angash/Euronics
143. Automatic Flushing System Urinals Jaquar/Parryware/Hindware/Nycer
144. SFRC /RCC Manhole Covers/ Perfect KK Manholes /SK Precast Concrete/Advent
RCC Grating Concreteo vision
145. Silicon sealants/ Weather Sealant/ BASF/Forsoc/McBouchemie

Structural Glazing Sealant /Sika
146. Sluice valve/ NRV Kirloskar/IVC/Kilburn /Zoloto/Castle/ Leader/
L&T/Audco
147. Solar Hot water system Tata BP Solar/ EPL India Limited/ Solahart
(India),
BHEL, BEL
148. Solenoid valve Rain Bird, USA/Toro/Nelson
149. SS Gratings, Soap Dish Towel Rail Gem/Jaquar/Parryware/Johnsion

etc.
150. Stainless Steel Salem Steel/Jindal or as approved E-in-
Charge
151. Stainless steel hardware fittings Hindustan/Spyro/ Supreme/ Swastik/ Fischer/

Jyoti/ Ace
152. Stainless Steel bolts, Washer sand Kundan/ Puja /Atul
Nuts
153. Stainless Steel Clamps Hilti / Intellotech /Fischer
Page 186 of 202

154. Stainless steel CP Grating Chilly/Camry
155. Stainless Steel D-handles D-line/Giesse/Dorma/ DorsetKaba
156. Stainless Steel Friction Stay Earl Bihari/Securistyle/EBCO
157. Stainless Steel Pressure Plate Kundan/ Puja/Atul

Screws
158. Stainless Steel Screw for Kundan/ Puja /Atul
Fabrication
And fixing of Windows
159. Stainless Steel Sink Hindware/Neelkanth /Nirali/ Kingston
160. Stone ware pipes & Gully Traps Perfect/R.K/Hind / Orind / Burn
161. Submersible Drainage pump Crompton/Kirloskar/Grundfos/Mather&

Platt
162. Sunken Portion Treatment Sika/MC Bouchemie/BASF/STP
163. Building chemicals (plasticizer, BASF/SIKA/Forsoc/STP/Mc Bauchemie

admixture, sealant etc)
164. Glass Mosaic Tiles Mridul/Italias/Bissaza/Lamosaic/ Little Glass
165. Texture paint Berger/ Asian/ICI Dulux/ Shalimar/Nerolac
166. Tiles Glazed Bell/Somany/Johnson/Kajaria/ Regency

/Spartek/Nitco
167. Vitrified Tiles Premium quality (1 st Quality) Tiles of

Bell/Somany/Johnson/Kajaria/ Regency/Nitco
168. UPVC Pipes & fittings Finolex/Prince/Supreme/

Astral /Sudhakar
169. Vacuum Dewatered Flooring Tremix/Sun Build/Avcon technics
170. Valve Box Rain Bird/Carson Brook, USA/Dura,
171. Veneer Duro/Green Ply/Century/Archid ply/National
172. VFD Pump Jyoti/Crompton/Kirloskar/

KSB/Grundfos/Mather&
Platt/Ebara.
173. Vibration Eliminator Resist o-flex Relay Corpn/Kanwal
Pads
&Connections
174. Vitreous China/ Sanitary ware Parryware/Nycer/Cera/Hindware/Johnson
175. Water Cooler Blue Star/Voltas/Usha/Godrej
176. Water Meter Capston /Kranti/ H-Guru/ Desmech
177. Water Proofing Agencies Authorised applicator of Fosroc/Sika/BASF/ MC

Boucheme
178. Water Proofing Materials Fosroc/Sika/BASF/ MC Boucheme
179. Water supply pumps Grunfos/ Kirloskar/Crompton/Texmo
180. White Glazed Fire Clay Sink Sanfire/Cera/Neycer/Hindware
Page 187 of 202

181. Wooden Laminated Berry floor/ Rikvin/ Wonder

floor/Harro/Pergo/Armstrong
182. PU Water Proofing BASF/SIKA/FOSROC
183. T.P.O Laxer W.P. BASF/FOSROC/SIKA/Mc Bouchemie
184. Modular Furniture Godrej/ Wipro/Feather lite/BP Ergo
185. Fabric Blinds Hunter Douglas/ Jacobs Blinds/ Marvel Blinds/

Mac Blinds
186. Aluminium Louvers/ Facades. Hunter Douglas/ Lindner/Chicago Metals
187. Ductile Iron covers  Jayaswal Neco/Neco Heavy Engineering &

Castings Limited/Neco Heavy Engineering &
Castings Limited
188. Structural steel SAIL/RINL/TATA/JINDAL
189. Wall Putty Birla White/JK Cement/Berger/JK

Laxmi/Shalimar
190. Anti Corrosive paint  Berger/Sika/Basf/Fosroc/Asian/Mc Bouchemie
191. Poly Urethene paints  Asian/Berger/Shalimar/Johnsion & Nicholsion
192. Road marking paint  Johnsion & Nicholsion/STP/Berger/Asian
193. Wall paper  Krazy walls/Viking/BOHR/SHIRIJ/Hunter

Douglas/Decors
194. Wood finishes  Asian/Berger/Shalimar
195. Plaster of Paris  JK Lakshmi/Birla white/Saint Gobain
196. Paving Tiles  Galaxy/Eurocon/Wondercrete/Ultra/Nitco/

 Unistone/Hindustan
197. Tile Grouts  Laticrete/Bal Endura/Johnsion/Fosroc
198. PTMT based sanitary fittings and  Prayag/Water-tec/Ploy-tuff/POLO/Wilson

coks
199. CI pipes for Soil,Waste& Vent  NECO/BIC/BST/RIF/SKF/Hepco
200. Water Meter  Capston/Kranti/H Guru/DesMech
201. PVC doors and pannels  Sintex/Rajshree/Polywood/Polytex/Duraplast.
202. Aluminum Acessories and  Hardwyn/Everite/Godrej/Alwyne/Kelwyn/Classi

Hardwares c/Argenta/Newlite/EBCO
203. Brass accessories/Hardware  Harrison/Godrej/Rarg/Everite/Hardwyn/Kelwyn
204. Hinges  Dorma/Jothi/ECIE/haffle
205. Galvalume sheets  Lloyds/Inter Arch/Japan metal building

system/Tata Blue
206. Welded hard drawn steel wire  SAIL/RINL/TISCO/JINDAL

fabric
207. VITREOUS CHINA SANITARYWARE HINDWARE / PARRYWARE / CERA/

JOHNSON/KHOLER
208. PLASTIC W.C. SEATS  HINDWARE / PARRYWARE / COMMANDER/

CERA
209. STAINLESS STEEL SINKS Hindware/Neelkanth /Nirali/ Kingston

Page 188 of 202

210. C.P. FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES &  JAQUAR/AQUAPLUS/KOHLER/ GROHE

FLUSH VALVES
211. LIQUID SOAP DISPENSER  JAQUAR/PARRYWARE/CERA/JOHNSION
212. C.I (IS:3989) AND SCI(IS:1729)  SKF / NECO / NIC /HIF/BIC/RIF

PIPES
213. RCC PIPES  INDIAN HUME PIPE/PRAGATI CONCRETE
UDYOG/K K BRAND PIPES/JAIN SPUN PIPE
214. G.I. PIPES  JINDAL /SAIL/PARKASH SURYA / TATA
215. G.I. FITTINGS  Swastik/ZOLOTO / UNIK / R BRAND / R/KS
216. CPVC PIPES & FITTINGS  PRINCE/SUPREME /

ASTRAL/FINOLEX/ASHRIBAD/SUDHAKAR
217. PPR PIPES & FITTINGS  SFMC/ FUSION/ SUPREME
218. M S PIPES  JINDAL / PRAKASH SURYA / TATA
219. GUN METAL VALVES  ZOLOTO / SANT/ ADVANCE / LEADER
220. C.I. VALVES  ZOLOTO / KIRLOSKAR / SANT / LEADER
221. BALL COCKS  GPA / SANT / L & K/ ALLEX
222. STONEWARE PIPES & GULLY  PERFECT / BURN / RK / HIND

TRAPS
223. C.I. MANHOLES COVERS AND  SKF/NECO / R.I.F. / B.C. /BIC / HEPCO/KK
FRAMES
224. SUBMERSIBLE DRAINAGE PUMPS  KSB / CRI/CROMPTON/GRANDFOS
225. ELECTRIC MOTORS  KIRSLOSKAR / GEC / SIEMENS/CROMPTON
226. LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLLERS,  MINILEC / RADAR

LIQUID LEVEL INDICATORS
227. SFRC MANHOLE COVERS  KK / S K PRECAST CONCRETE / ADVENT

CONCRETOVISION
228. MIRROR  ATUL / MODI FLOAT /

PRAYAG/JOHNSION/PARRYWARE/JAQUAR
229. WATER HEATER  RACOLD / VENUS / BAJAJ
230. SEAT COVER (HEAVY DUTY)  HINDWARE/ PARRY WARE/JOHNSION
231. STORM WATER DRAINAGE PUMP  GRUNDFOS/KSB/KIRLOSKER/
232. PIPE SUPPORTS, HANGARS  INTELLO TECH / CAMRY/ CHILLEY/ EURO

CLAMP
233. PH METER  VATS/ HANNA (ITALY)/ ASTER
234. THERMAL INSULATION  ARMAFLEX / THERMAFLEX / KIFLEX /

AEROFLEX / A- FLEX
235. SOLAR WATER HEATER  AQUATIC/TATA BP / PHOTON / BHEL
236. PUMP ACCESSORIES  GRUNDFOS / WILO / CROMPTON

GREAVES/KSB
237. CLEAN OUT PLUG  NECO/KAPILANSH/ HEPCO
238. WATER COOLER  VOLTAS/USHA/GODREJ
239. VALVES  C&R/KARTAR/CASTLE
Page 189 of 202

240. LEVEL CONTROLLER & INDICATOR

(WATER)  TECHNIKA / MINILEC
241. PRESSURE GAUGE  H GURU/FIEBIG
242. AIR BLOWER  EVEREST/BETA
2. SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES (ELECTRICAL WORKS)

No
1 SWITCH FUSE UNIT (HRC TYPE) SCHNEIDER / L&T / SIEMENS /ABB
MCB'S, RCCBS,RCBOS, ELCB'S,

2 MCB DBS & ISOLATORS SCHNEIDER /ABB/L&T / SIEMENS/
LEGRAND
LT XLPE AL/CU CABLES UPTO 11kV
3 BATRA HENLAY/POLYCAB/SKY-TONE/
FINOLEX/KEI
HT XLPE AL/CU CABLES UPTO 11
4 kV SEICHEM/POLYCAB/SKY-TONE/
FINOLEX/KEI
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS/ MCCB/
5 CONTACTOR SCHNEIDER/ ABB / L&T/ SIEMENS
APC/ EMERSON/ EATON POWER/

6 UPS GE POWER
L &T/ SIEMENS/VAISHNOV/
7 INDICATING LAMPS (LED) RASS/ TECHNIQUE/ AE /
SCHNEIDER/ ABB
8 RELAYS /POWER FACTOR L&T/ SCHNEIDER/ EPCOS / ABB

CORRECTION RELAY
KWH, PF, FREQUENCY,
9 AMMETER/ VOLTMETER L&T/ SCHNEIDER/ CONZERVE / AE/ IMP
(DIGITAL TYPE)
10 TRIVECTOR METER L&T/ CONZERVE / SOCOMEC
11 CURRENT/POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS L&T/ KAPPA / SIEMENS

12 TIMERS L &T/ SIEMENS/ SCHNEIDER/ GE
L &T/ SIEMENS/ LEGRAND /

13 TIME SWITCH ABB/ SCHNEIDER
14 APFC RELAY SIEMENS / L&T / SCHNEIDER/ ABB

SELECTOR SWITCHES/PUSH L&T/SCHNEIDER/
15 BUTTON/PILOT LAMPS KAYCEE/SALZER/AE/ SIEMENS/ ABB
SCHNEIDER / SOCOMAC/ L&T/

16 CHANGE OVER SWITCHES SIEMENS/ ABB
17 11 KV VCB PANEL CROMPTON/ SCHNEIDER / SIEMENS / ABB

Equivalent -CPRI Approved Manufacture
POWER TRANSFORMERS &
18 PACKAGE SUB-STATION SCHNEIDER / SIEMENS / ESENNAR/
(FACTORY BUILD MAKE) Crompton Greaves
Page 190 of 202

HT JOINTING KITS/ GLANDS/

19 TERMINALS/ LUGS RAYCHEM/ 3M/ DENSON
20 STARTERS SIEMENS/ L&T / CROMPTON
SINGLE PHASING PREVENTOR/ OVER

21 LOAD PROTECTION UNIT OMERON / MINILEC / L&T/ SIEMENS

No
FUSE DISCONNECTOR SWITCH /

22 SWITCH FUSE UNIT SIEMENS/ L&T / SCHNEIDER / ABB
DIGITAL METERS & INTELLIGENT

23 MULTIFUNCTION METER CONZERVE / HPL/ AE/ SCHNEIDER
BRASS COMPRESSION CABLE

24 GLANDS (HEAVY DUTY) COMMET / DOWELL / INDIANA
25. LUGS & THIMBLES / FERRULES DOWELLS / JAINSONS/ CAPITAL
INSULATING MATTS / RUBBER

26. MATTS ISI MARKED
PROTECTION AND OTHER

27 RELAYS L&T / ABB / SCHNEIDER / SIEMENS
28 DG SETS AND RELATED ITEMS :-
CUMMINS/ KOHELER / CROMPTON

a DIESEL ENGINE GREAVES/ KIRLOSKAR /
CATERPILLAR
KIRLOSKAR / JYOTHI/ STAMFORD /
b ALTERNATOR CROMPTON GREAVES/ NGEF /
LERROY SOMMER
CUSHY FOOT MOUNTING (AVM PAD)

c DUNLOP
d. BATTERIES EXIDE/ AMCO/ AMARON
e. SOUND PROOF ACOUSTIC AS PER DG SUPPLIERS

ENCLOSURES
29. LT PANELS/ FEEDER PILLARS/ TRICOLITE / SPC ELECTROTECH/

STARTERS/ RISING MAIN/ BUS ADVANCE PANEL / PRECISION SYSTEM
DUCT/ APFC PANEL/ DG PANEL CONTROL/ KEPL/ MADHU ELECTRICAL
Equivalent -CPRI Approved
Manufacture
FINOLEX / HAVELLS/ SKY-TONE/
30. CONTROL CABLE BATRA HENLAY / BONTON/FINOLEX
POWER CAPACITORS, CAPACITOR BANK

31. (ISI MARKED) L&T/ SCHNEIDER/ SIEMENS / CROMPTON
32. HRC FUSE BASE & HRC FUSES L&T/ SIEMENS / SCHNEIDER/ABB
Page 191 of 202

PIANO/MODULAR TYPE
34. SOCKETS/SWITCHES / FAN ANCHOR-ROMA / SCHNEIDER / CRABTREE
REGULATOR /TV SOCKET / / WIPRO NORTH WEST / PHILIPS /
TELEPHONE OUTLET HAVELLS/MK
STEEL CONDUIT PIPE (ERW) ISI

35. MARKED BEC/ M Kay / AKG/ STEEL KRAFT/GUPTA
36. PVC CONDUIT PRECISION/ AKG/ MK / ATUL POLYPLAST/

D PLAST
PVC INSULATED COPPER WIRE

37. (FR/F.R.L.S/Fire Survival) FINOLEX/ POLYCAB/SKYLINE / BATRA
HENLAY/KEI
38. DWC HDPE PIPE DURALINE/ REX/EMCO/POLYFINS
39. GI PIPE FOR EARTHING ETC. JINDAL/ T.T. SWASTIK/ SURYA/TATA
40. SENSOR (LIGHT & OCCUPANCY) PHILIPS / L&T / WIPRO/ SCHNEIDER
INDUSTRIAL SOCKET / METAL CLAD

41. SOCKET OUTLET L&T/ SCHNEIDER / ABB / SIEMENS
42. CEILING/ WALL/ EXHAUST FANS USHA/ CROMPTON / GEC / BAJAJ
LED LIGHTING FIXTURE &

43 LUMINARIES WIPRO/PHILIPS/ CROMPTON/BAJAJ
44. AVIATION LIGHTS WIPRO / PHILIPS / CROMPTON
45. STREET LIGHT FIXTIRES WIPRO/ CROMPTON / PHILIPS/BAJAJ
PRE-FABRICATED CABLE TRAY /

46. RACEWAY VENUS/ SLOTCO/ INDIANA
FINOLEX/ BONTON/ SKY-TONE/

47. TV/TELEPHONE CABLE BATRA HENLAY / NATIONAL
EARTHING STRIP/TAPE &

48. ACCESSORIES VENUS/ SLOTCO/ INDIANA
49. FIRE EXTINGUISHER MINIMAX/ NEWAGE/ LIFE GUARD
50. FLEXIBLE CONDUCT LAPP/ HENSEL/ JAINSONS
51. BAKELITE SHEET HYLAM/ FORMICA/ GREENLAM
Page 192 of 202

52. COMPUTER/ DATA CABLE SYSTIMAX/ AVAYA/AMP /

PANDUIT/FINOLEX
53. TAG BLOCK KRONE/ HENSEL
EPBAX & TELEPHONE SYSTEM PHILLIPS/ SIEMENS/ BPL/TATA/

54.
ERICSSON/ TADIRON
55. MULTI-METER & MEGGARS ESCROP/ MOTWANI OR EQUIVALENT
56. TELEPHONE TAG BLOCK KRONE/HENSEL
57. CRIMPING TYPE LUGS DOWELLS / JAINSAN/ ELMEX
58. HEAT SHINKABLE SLEVES SFX/ RAYCHEM
59. HIGH COOLING FAN HIGH COOL/ REXNORD
Page 193 of 202

3. SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES (HVAC WORK)

No
1 SPLIT AC UNITS (DUCTABLE CARRIER/VOLTAS/DAIKIN
& PACKAGED UNIT)
2 VRV/VRF SYSTEM DAIKIN/ TOSHIBA/MITSHUBISI/ O General

Y JOINT
3 REFRIGERANT PIPING DYNA FLOW/ MANDEV/MODERN/RAJCO/ Met

Tube
4. CLOSED CELL ELASTOMERIC/ K-FLEX/A-FLEX
NITRILE RUBBER
5 CHILLING MACHINES / TRANE / CARRIER / DAIKIN MCQUAY

CHILLERS WITH VSD (AHRI
CERTIFIED)
6 COOLING TOWER PAHARPUR /ADVANCE / MIHIR
7 PUMPS GRUNDFOS / ARMSTRONG / ITT /

WILO/KIRLOSKAR/CROMPTON
8 BUTTERFLY VALVES ADVANCE / KIRLOSKAR /HONEYWELL /

AUDCO
9 3/2 WAY MOTORISED HONEYWELL / SIEMENS / JOHNSON

BUTTERFLY VALVES CONTROLS / BELIMO
10 BALANCING VALVES ADVANCE/ HONEYWELL/ AUDCO
11 PRESSURE INDEPENDENT HONEYWELL / DANFOS / SIEMENS /

BALANCING VALVE BELIMO
12 DUAL PLATE CHECK VALVES ADVANCE / CASTLE / HONEYWELL/ SANT
13 GATE/GLOBE/SWING TYPE LEADER / ZOLOTO / HONEYWELL /

CHECK VALVES SIEMENS
14 2 WAY MODULATING JOHNSON / SIEMENS / HONEYWELL /

VALVES BELIMO / SCHNEIDER
15 POT AND Y-STRAINERS SANT / RAPIDCOOL / EMERALD / SM

INDUSTRIAL
16 PRESSURE GAUGE FEIBIG / EMERALD / H GURU / BOURDON
17 THERMOMETER FEIBIG / EMERALD / H GURU / BOURDON /

WAREE
18 EXPANSION TANK GRUNDFOS / RAPIDCOOL / EMERALD /

(PRESSURISED TYPE) ANERGY
19 AIR HANDLING UNITS & ZECO/ EDGETECH / SYSTEMAIRE / VOLTAS

FCUS
Page 194 of 202


No
20 AIR WASHER/WET HUMIDIN/ ZECO/ EDGETECH/ AIR FLOW
SCRUBBERS
21 FILTERS THERMADYNE / ANFILCO /

PUROLATOR/SPECTROM/ AAF
22 REFRIGERANT (ONLY FOR BRASSOMATIC/TOTALINE/DU PONT/

TOP UP AT SITE) FACTORY CHARGED
23 COPPER REFRIGERANT RAJCO / MANDEV / MEXFLOW

PIPING
24 GI/ MS PIPES SAIL / TATA / JINDAL
25 PVC PIPES ASTRAL / FINOLEX / SUPREME / JINDAL
26 CENTRIFUGAL FANS FOR NICOTRA / KRUGER / GREEN

FIRE APPLICATION (AMCA HECK/AIRFLOW
CERTIFIED)
27 AXIAL FANS FOR FIRE KRUGER / GREEN HECK / NICOTRA /

APPLICATION (AMCA AIRFLOW
CERTIFIED)
28 INLINE FANS (AMCA KRUGER / NICOTRA /HUMIDIN/ AIRFLOW

CERTIFIED)
29 CENTRIFUGAL FANS FOR KRUGER / NICOTRA / GREEN HECK /

NORMAL VENTILATION & AIRFLOW
AHUS (AMCA CERTIFIED)
30 BALL VALVE AND BALL ADVANCE / HONEYWELL / CASTLE / RAPID

VALVE WITH Y-STRAINER CONTROLS / EMERALD
31 STRIP HEATERS DASPASS/ KEPL/ RAPID
32 GI /GSS SHEET SAIL / TATA / JINDAL
33 CENTRIFUGAL AIR EMERALD / ANERGY/ BRYAN

SEPARATOR
34 PRESSURE PUMP (FOR EMERALD / ANERGY/ BRYAN

CENTRIFUGAL AIR
SEPARATER)
35 GRILLES/DIFFUSER CARYAIRE / RAVISTAR / MAPRO /
AIRMASTER / TITUS/SERVEX/
SUVIDHA/SERVEX/ Tristar
36 VCD/ Gravity louvers/ Exaust & Caryaire/Ravistar/Mapro/Tristar/

fresh air louvers AIRMASTER
Page 195 of 202


No
37 FACTORY FABRICATED SAIL / TATA / JINDAL
DUCTS
38 FLEXIBLE DUCTS CARYAIRE / ATCO /

RESISTOFLEX/MAPRO
39 FLEXIBLE DUCT CARYAIRE / ATCO /
CONNECTION RESISTOFLEX/MAPRO
40 CROSS LINKED PARAMOUNT /

POLYETHYLENE TROCELLENE /
INSULATION THERMOBREAK/
SUPREME
41 FIREDAMPER/CONTROL CARYAIRE / GREENHECK/
DAMPER MAPRO/ RUSKIN
42 ACTUATOR (FOR DAMPERS & BELIMO / SIEMENS / HONEYWELL

VALVES)
43 NITRILE RUBBER/Closed VIDEOFLEX / AEROFLEX /

Cell Elastomeric ARMAFLEX / TROCELLEN / K FLEX
/ ARMACELL/SUPERLON
INSULATION
44 FIBREGLASS INSULATION UP TWIGA / OWENS CORNING/ SIPLA
45 Self Adhesive Sealing Gasket for Ducts Prima Seal/ Air Flow/ Trocellen
46 ADHESIVES FEVICOL / SUPERLON /

PARAMOUNT POLYTREAT
47 VIBRATION ISOLATORS RESISTOFLEX / DUNLOP/ KINETICS

NOISE CONTROL/ STARLINE
ENTERPRISES
48 FASTENERS HILTI / FISHER
49 PAINT (REFER TO CIVIL WORK)
50 WELDING ELECTRODES (REFER TO CIVIL WORK)
51 CONTROL CABLES (REFER TO ELECTRICAL WORK)
52 POWER CABLE (REFER TO ELECTRICAL WORK)
53 MCCB/ISOLATORS/ACB/ MCB (REFER TO ELECTRICAL WORK)
54 ELECTRIC MOTORS ABB / CROMPTON / SIEMENS

/ GE MARATHON
55 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE DANFOSS / ABB / SIEMENS

FOR PUMPS & AHUS
Page 196 of 202


No
56 STARTERS / CONTACTORS / L&T / GE / SIEMENS / JOHNSON /
RELAY / PUSH BUTTONS HONEYWELL
57 MS CABLE TRAY RICO STEEL / AKG / MAHESHWARI

ELECTRICALS or Equivalent
58 THERMOSTAT / HONEYWELL / SIEMENS / STEFORD / JCI

HUMIDISTAT / WATER
FLOW SWITCH / AIRFLOW
SWITCH
59 ELECTRICAL PANEL (REFER TO ELECTRICAL WORK)
60.
AIR COOLED HI-WALL / VOLTAS / BLUE STAR / CARRIER / HITACHI
CASSETTE UNIT / DAIKIN / ETA-O-GENERAL
61
HOT WATER GENERATOR & KEPL / EMERALD / RAPID COOL
PAN HUMIDIFIER
ELEVATORS - M/S OTIS ELEVATOR CO. (I)LTD./

M/S KONE ELEVATOR INDIA PVT.
LTD./ M/S. JOHNSON LIFTS PVT. LTD.
/M/S. SCHINDLER INDIA (P) LTD.
Page 197 of 202

4. SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES (FIRE FIGHTING WORKS)
SL. ITEM APPROVED MAKE

No
1 PIPES ( M S / G I ) TATA/JINDAL /PRAKASH/JYOTINDRA/SAIL
2 GI FITTINGS UNIK/ ZOLOTO/KS/ISI MARKED
3 GUN METAL VALVES LEADER / SANT/ZOLOTO
4 SINGLE HEADED HYDRANT NEWAGE / MINIMAX /

VALVES, FOUR WAY FIRE SB/GTECH/ASCO/GEI
BRIGADE INLET & SHUT OFF
NOZZLE
5 RUBBER PIPE FOR HOSE REEL JYOTI / GATES / KESARA/

GTECH/GENETH/GEI
6 SLUICE & NON RETURN KIRLOSKAR / KALPANA /KARTAR /

VALVES. AIP/KOLEY
7 PRESSURE SWITCH. INDFOSS / SWITZER / DANFOSS/ HD/

BRC/INFCA
8 PRESSURE GAUGES. BRC/HD/ITALTEC/H-GURU/FEIBIG/ BOURDON/

EMERALD / H-GURU
9 PUMP KIRLOSKAR / GRUNDFOS / M & P/

CROMPTON
10 MOTOR. ABB/SIEMENS/CROMPTON GREAVES/

KIRLOSKAR
11 ENAMEL PAINTING OF PIPES ASIAN/GOODLAS NEROLAC/ICI/ BERGER

ETC.
12 PAINT PRIMER. ASIAN/JENSON NICHOLSON / BERGER
13 FASTENERS. HILTI / FISCHER/ CAPRO
14 WELD RODS. ADVANI / ESAB / ADOR.
15 BALL VALVES. RB ( ITALY ) / BUGATTI / ZOLOTO/ CIM
16 BUTTERFLY VALVE. AUDCO / C & R / KSB./ ZOLOTO/

SANT/KOLEY/KALPNA/LEADER
17 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS. MINIMAX / LIFEGUARD / KANADIA, KANEX

(WATER TYPE / 50 KG DCP / / VIJAT / AGNI
CEILING MOUNTED DCP /
AFFF )
Page 198 of 202


No
18 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS MINIMAX / LIFEGUARD / KANADIA, KANEX/

GTECH ( ABC / CO2 )
19 HOSE. NEWAGE PREMIER EXTRA / CRC EXTOCOAT

20 RUBBER GASKETS C I C / VARUNA.
21 ENGINE. CUMMINS / CATERPILLAR / KOEL.
22 HOSE DRUM. NEWAGE. / SUKAN / KESARA/ GTECH
23 MECHANICAL SEAL. DURAMETALLIC/ SEALOL.
24 SIGNAGES PROLITE / GLOLITE
25 SPRINKLERS GTECH
26 FIRE RATED DOORS & FRAMES NAVAIR / SHAKTIMET / GMP/ PROMAT /
GODREJ
27 FIRE RATED GLASS SAINT GOBIN/ TORCH/ GLABERWAL

28 FIRE RETARDANT PAINT VIPER FRS 881/ NULLIFIRE/ BURGER
29 FIRE SEAL SEALZ/ ALSTROFLAM/ ABACUS
30 FIRE: DOOR BECKER FIRE SOLUTION/ INERSOLL RAND
CLOSURES, MORTICE LCNSERIES/ DORMA THSERIES
DEAD LOCKS
31 FIRE: D-TYPE PULL HANDLES BECKER FIRE SOLUTION/ DORMA/

HARDWIN
32 FIRE: HINGES/ BECKER FIRE SOLUTION/ INERSOLL RAND/

DORMA
33 AIR VENT VALVE OR / VB / ANERGY
34 HYDRANT VALVE MINIMAX / SAFEX / SUPEREX / EVERSAFE /
ASCO / GEI
35 VIBRATION ISOLATOR RESISTOFLEX / DUNLOP / KUNWAL

36 FLOW SWITCH SYSTEM SENSOR / POTTER / ANERGY
37 ALARM CONTROLLER VALVE / VIKING /HD / GETECH / LIFEGUARD
DELUGE VALVE
38 FIRE MAN AXE MINIMAX / SAFEX / SUPEREX / EVERSAFE

39 GM TWO WAY/THREE MINIMAX / SAFEX / SUPEREX / EVERSAFE
WAY/FOUR WAY COLLECTING
HEAD
40 FIRE FIGHTING (ELECTRICAL) (REFER TO ELECTRICAL WORK)
Page 199 of 202

Construction of New Campus for National Institute of Design (NID),
Vijayawada,A.P.
5. SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES (FIRE ALARM SYSTEM)

No
1 ADDRESSABLE PANEL HOCHIKI / RAFIKI / SIEMENS / ESSER /
INTEGLEX NOHMI/EDWARD /HONEYWELL
2 INTELLIGENT ADDRESSABLE HOCHIKI / RAFIKI / SIEMENS /

SMOKE DETECTORS+ MULTI ESSER
CRITERIA, /INTEGLEX NOHMI/EDWARD
3 INTELLIGENT ADDRESSABLE HOCHIKI / RAFIKI / SIEMENS/ ESSER /

RATE OF RISE HEAT INTEGLEX NOHMI/EDWARD
DETECTOR
4 ZERO HALOGEN COPPER LAPP / NATIONAL / SKYTONE.

CABLES
5 ADDRESSABLE DUCT EDWARDS/HOCHIKI/ RAFIKI / SIEMENS /

DETECTOR UNIT ESSER
6 INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES BYPARENTCOMPANY MANUFACTURING

DETECTORS /PANEL
7 MANUAL CALL BOX BY PARENT COMPANY

MANUFACTURINGDETECTORS /PANEL.
STROBE. UL LISTED/AGNI DEVICES/SYSTEM SENSOR

8
STEEL CONDUIT(FOR BEC / AKG / M-KAY / SENCO

9 ALLSYSTEMS)
PA SET EQUIPMENTS / BOSCH / AHUJA / AURAL/SURE / PHILIPS

10 SPEAKERS
11 FIRE ALARM (ELECTRICAL) (REFER TO ELECTRICAL WORK)
Page 200 of 202

6. BMS SYSTEM

No
1. DD C & NETWORK HONEYWELL / SIEMENS / ALERTON
CONTROLLER (NOVAR) /SCHNEIDER
2. SOFTWARE HONEYWELL / SIEMENS / ALERTON

(NOVAR) /SCHNEIDER
3. LIGHT SENSOR HONEYWELL / SIEMENS / ALERTON

(NOVAR) /SCHNEIDER
4. CURRENT TRANSDUCER HONEYWELL / SIEMENS / ALERTON

(NOVAR) /SCHNEIDER
5. TRANSDUCERS ABB / SITU / MINILEC.
6. PC IBM / COMPAQ / HP / WIPRO / HCL /DELL
7. PRINTER EPSON/TVSE / HP / CANON / PANASONIC.
8. CCTV HONEYWELL/TYCO/BOSCH/ SCHNIDER/

PANDUIT(PANNET)/ QEOQUIP/ MOBOTIX
9. ACCESS CONTROL HONEYWELL/ HID/ ROSSLARE
10. UPS APC/ EATON/ GE AVO/LUMINOUS/

/EMERSON/ SNIEDER
11. BOOM BARRIER MAGNETIC CONTROL/ BFT/ DELTA

SCIENTIFIC
12. BATTERY EXIDE/AMMRON/LUCUS /PANASONIC /SU- KAM
Page 201 of 202

7. AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM

No
1 MICROPHONES SHURE / AKG / SENNHEISER
2 CONFERENCE SYSTEM BOSCH / DIS / BRAHLER
3 AUDIO MIXER ALLEN & HEATH / SOUNDCRAFT / YAMAHA
4 DSP - 4 INPUTS X 8 OUTPUTS BIAMP / BSS AUDIO
5 DUAL CHANNEL POWER CROWN / LAB GRUPPEN / QSC

AMPLIFIER
6 VIDEO SWITCHER EXTRON / CRESTRON / AMX
7 PROCESSOR - TOUCH PANEL AMX / CRESTRON

CONTROL
8 DVD PLAYER TASCAM / DENON / PIONEER
9 CD CAROUSEL TASCAM / DENON / PIONEER
10 HARD DISK BASED RECORDER PANASONIC / PHILIPS / PIONEER
11 LOUDSPEAKERS BOSCH /JBL / TANNOY / EAW
12 DISPLAY SYSTEM- CAMERA BOSCH / PELCO / PANASONIC

WITH MOUNTING
ARRANGEMENT
13 MICROPHONE AND LOUD BELDEN / KRYSTAL / SOMMER

SPEAKER CABLES
14 STAGE LIGHTING & SGM / ZERO88 / STRAND

FURNISHING- LIGHTING
CONTROL CONSOLE
15 ELECTRONIC DIMMER MRH / DARBARI
16 PATCH PANEL MRH / DARBARI
Page 202 of 202


Technical Data

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Data

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Construction of New Campus for National Institute of Design (NID), Vijayawada,A.P.

CONSTRUCTION OF NEW CAMPUS FOR NATIONAL

GENRAL CONDITIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF NEW NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF

SPECIFICATION FOR NON SCHEDULED ITEMS OF WORK

1.0 GRANITE STONE IN RISERS OF STEPS, SKIRTING,DADO AND FLOOR

1.1 Granite StoneSlabs

1.3 Preparation ofSurface

1.3.2 Curing, Polishing andFinishing

2.0 TRAP DOOR IN THE FALSECEILING

3.0 CHICKEN WIRE MESH ON JOINTS OF RCC & BRICKWORK

Chicken wire Mesh at Junction

Double scaffolding to be used shall be as specified.

To overcome the possibility of development of cracks in the plastering work following

Terracotta colouredprecoated with silicon, brick faced tiles of size 230x75x15mm of

5.0 ETCHING STRIPS(FILM)

6.0 12MM THICK FRAMLESS TOUGHENED GLASS DOORPARTITIONS

7.0 MULTIWALL POLYCORBONATESHEET

8.0 GLAZING 6 MM THICK TOUGHENEDGLASS

10.0 FOAM CONCRETE FILLING IN SUNKENAREA

12.0 MELAMINE POLISHING:

13.0 ANTITERMITE TREATMENT:

14.0 PVC FLOORING IN 2MM THICKNESS:

15.0 COLORED CONCRETE FLOORING:

Top surface of concrete, in accordance with broadcasting of Bomanite Color Hardener / OR

16.0 INTERNAL TEXTUREDPAINT:

17.0 EXTERIOR TEXTURED PAINT:

18.0 PVC GUARD:

5 Inspection and testing ofmaterials

12 Site clearance andcleanup

13 Licence permits andauthorities

14 Recovery of cost for materials issued to Contractors free ofcost

15 Cutting of Water ProofingMembrane:

17 Materials supplied byemployer

Section-II Specifications for Sanitary Fixtures & C.P BrassFittings

c) Porcelain or stainless steelsinks

3.7 Toilets forDisabled

3.13 Protection againstDamage

3.1 Schedule of PipesUse

1. CI Spun Soil & Waste PipesI.S3989 Horizontal Soil, Waste.Vent

3 uPVC SWR pipes Type-A(IS 13592-1992-) For Rain waterSystem.

3.2 Soil, Waste & VentPipes

3.3 Cast Iron Soil, Waste & VentPipes

Nominal diameter thickness overall internal Depth of lead

3.6 uPVC Rain WaterPipes

3.10.2 Floor Trapinlet

3.10.3 Floor TrapGrating

3.11 Jointing (CI Soil Pipes &Fittings)

Two pack system, which hardens on mixing

MIXING & APPLICATION:

Dia of Pipes in mm Lead required per Joints in Grams

100 200 to 250

150 250 to 300

3.12 Cleanout plugs

a) Floor Clean out Plug.

3.13 Waste pipe fromappliances

3.13.3 Galvanised pipes (Where specified or required at site for Wasteonly)

3.14 Cleanout on Drainage Pipes (COPlugs)

3.15 Encasing in CementConcrete

a) Cast iron soil and waste pipes underfloor

3.17 Cutting and makinggood

3.20.4 Pipes (unit of measurement linear meter to the nearestcentimetre).

a) Expandable anchor fasteners

b) Galvanisingof all supports andhangers

c) Cutting holes in walls, ceiling of floors and making good wherepermitted